JP6736419B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”).

Conventionally, when a lottery is performed based on the input ball game ball to the starting opening result is jackpot, that have gaming machines are known in which the bonus game in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out is performed.

This type of gaming machine is provided with a frame-shaped light-emitting decorative member that is arranged in a door frame so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window and is three-dimensionally formed in a predetermined shape and capable of emitting light. The outer shape of the game area facing from the game window is decorated with such a shape, and the decoration effect is enhanced by emitting light to entertain the player (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-195354, A

However, such a gaming machine has a low appealing power to the player, which may reduce the interest of the player in the game.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a suitable new gaming machine that has a high appeal and can strongly attract the interest of the player.

In order to achieve such an object, in the invention of means 1, a game board having a game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a main body frame for detachably supporting the game board, and a main body frame of the main body frame. A door frame having a game window facing at least the game area of the game board supported by the main body frame when it is openably and closably supported with respect to the front surface, and below the game window. A dish light emitting decoration means having a dish portion that is formed and bulges forward and can store the game medium, and a light emitting decoration portion that can perform light emission decoration, and the dish light emission decoration means is provided in the vicinity of the dish light emission decoration means. A predetermined area on the outer periphery of the window is decorated to decorate a region different from the predetermined area on the outer periphery of the game window, and the first light emitting decoration means capable of emitting light toward the player side, Second light emitting decoration means having a bulge portion that bulges forward of the light emitting decoration means and is capable of emitting light, and the three-dimensional shape of the decoration applied to the light emitting decoration portion of the dish light emitting decoration means and the second light emission. An integral decoration is made with the three-dimensional shape of the decoration applied to the decoration means, and the light emission decoration portion of the dish light emission decoration means and the bulge portion of the second light emission decoration means cooperate with each other to emit light. Performing an effect, the bulging part capable of emitting light has an inner side surface part that is easily visible to the player facing the game board, and an outer side surface part that is difficult to see from the player facing the game board. The inner surface portion is decorated in an inclined shape toward the peripheral portion of the game area, and is formed so as to have a gentler angle than the angle of the outer surface portion toward the main body frame, and the second light emission decoration Light emitted from the bulging portion having means is emitted inside toward the inside of the gaming machine, which is the gaming window side, through the inside surface portion that is easily visible to the player facing the game board, and the game. There is an outside light emission that is emitted toward the outside of the game machine through the outside surface portion that is difficult to see from the player facing the board, and the outside surface portion notifies the employee of the game hall where the outside is easily visible. The information light is emitted as the outside light, which can be emitted toward the outside of the gaming machine through the outside surface portion, and is visually recognized by the player facing the outside surface portion and the gaming board, which is difficult to see by the player facing the gaming board. The bulging portion having the easy inner side surface portion can be light-emitted and decorated by the effect control means , and the notification light for notifying the employee of the game hall where the outer side surface portion is easily visible is the game. A gaming machine characterized in that light is emitted only through the outside surface portion which is difficult to be visually recognized by a player facing the board .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a new game machine.

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main body frame was opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame was opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame which constitute a pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame which constitute a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. FIG. 4 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure of an upper shaft support fitting of a main body frame and an upper support fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) seen from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for explaining the relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right back of a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in the door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the upper decoration unit from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled and saw the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the site|part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the upper right front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state where the press operation part in the operation unit was pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from the front after disassembling, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as disassembled as seen from the rear. (A) It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and which was seen from the front, and (B) is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where the front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front view of an antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view when the door frame showing the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism is seen from the back. It is a principal part rear view of the door frame which shows the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism. It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the tamperproof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamperproof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamperproof member as seen from the front, (D). FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing the action of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnects and shows a door frame in the up-down direction substantially center. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at after disassembling a main part frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the rolling path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining an operation of a standing wall part of a power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, which is disassembled and seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like, which is seen from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 107. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 107 taken in the vertical direction. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front component member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like as viewed from the front. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 110. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing a crime prevention structure on the pivotal side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state where the game board was stored in the body frame. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally upper left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally lower left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from the back diagonally. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in a game board from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which saw the attacker unit partially, and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the front side unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front side unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the center accessory for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the acceptance unit of a center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the acceptance unit of a center accessory from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the receiving unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the receiving unit and was seen after. It is a front enlarged view showing the movement of the receiving unit in the center accessory, and is a view showing a mode in which the game ball is guided to the left side route. It is a front enlarged view showing a movement of the receiving unit in the center accessory, and is a view showing a mode in which the game ball is guided to the right route. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive of a receiving unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive of the movable decorative body of a receiving unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the flow of the game ball in the acceptance unit in a center accessory. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main component and it saw from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main component and it looked at after. (A) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit of the back unit as seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back front decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back front decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back production unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back production unit for each main unit and viewed from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main unit and it looked at after. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper center unit in the back upper production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper center unit in the back upper production unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper center unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back upper center unit from the back of the military officer Ishite. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment/detachment of the 2nd raising/lowering decorative body in a back upper center unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper side unit in the back upper production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper side unit in the back upper production unit and was seen from behind. It is a front view explaining movement of a back upper center unit in a back upper production unit. FIG. 160 is a front view for explaining the movement of the upper back center unit following FIG. 159. FIG. 160 is a front view for explaining the movement of the upper back center unit following FIG. 160. It is a front view explaining movement of a back side unit in a back side production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the under side production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the under side production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and looked at it afterwards. It is the perspective view which saw the back lower front unit in the back lower production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front unit in the back lower production unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower front unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower front unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view showing the under side effect unit in a normal state. It is the front view which shows the state where the back lower front slider of the back lower front unit in the back lower production unit is raised part way. It is a front view showing the state where a back lower front slider of a back lower front unit was raised to a rising end. It is a front view showing a state in which a back under-rear inside decoration in the under-rear effect unit is raised to the appearance position. FIG. 172 is a front view showing a state in which the pointer member of the back lower back middle decoration is rotated in the state of FIG. 174. FIG. 9 is a front view showing a state in which a back lower front slider of the front lower back unit is raised to a rising end and a back lower rear middle decorative body is raised to an appearance position. It is a front view showing a state in which a back side rear side decorative body in the back side production unit is rotated to an appearance position. FIG. 187 is a front view showing the state where the back middle back decorative body is raised to the appearance position in the state of FIG. 177; FIG. 179 is a front view showing a state where the back lower front slider is raised to a rising end in the state of FIG. 178. FIG. 187 is a front view showing a state where the back lower front slider is raised to a rising end in the state of FIG. 177; It is a front view of the back lower right production unit. It is a front view of a jackpot mode determination effect device that constitutes a lower right part of the back effect unit. It is a plan view of a jackpot mode determination effect device. It is an AA sectional view in FIG. 182. It is a BB sectional view in FIG. 182, and is a figure which shows the flow of a game ball. It is the front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back production unit. It is the front view of the game board which shows the movement of the under side production unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal sound signal interception board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of an abnormal sound signal interruption board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power failure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing. It is a flow chart which shows a starting mouth winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game preparation process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game mode decision processing. It is an example of a table used in the jackpot game mode determination process when the jackpot flag is ON. It is an example of a table used in the jackpot game mode determination process when the game ball passes through the right gate at the time of winning the normal type jackpot. It is an example of a table used for jackpot game mode determination processing when a game ball passes through the left gate at the time of jackpot winning of the normal type. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game processing. It is a table for determining the display effect pattern displayed on the mini liquid crystal display device based on the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 which is the process of the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the display effect pattern displayed on a mini liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the display effect displayed on the display area of a mini liquid crystal display device.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame forming the pachinko machine seen from the rear, and FIG. 7 is the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board forming the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the front.

1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, and an outer frame 2 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable so that the front side is open. A box frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and in which a game ball as a game medium is driven, a front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It is provided with a door frame 5 rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. On the door frame 5 of this pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 is visible from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. It is provided with a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the pachinko machine 1 has a horizontal direction. The widths of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical direction. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2, and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

In this pachinko machine 1, when viewed from the front, a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 protrudes forward below the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. A handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can operate the handle device 500 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting ball strength according to the rotation angle, and the player can play the game.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. The player cannot touch the game ball, the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 114), the various winning holes, the accessory, etc. in the game area 1100 by inserting the hand or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment/detachment structure of the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. .. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the action of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (up and down) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and the four connecting members 14 that connect the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 are provided, and the frame members 10, 11, 12, and 13 are connected by the connecting members 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and are substantially centered in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends, and the upper and lower parts. An engaging cutout portion 15 is provided which penetrates through and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step portion 10a that is recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It is like this.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material having a constant cross-sectional shape (for example, an aluminum alloy), the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward at the rear end portion. The projection 16 having a cavity that penetrates in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided to enhance the strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 112). A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer and inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, the operator's The pachinko machine 1 becomes a finger rest so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held, and the design of the appearance can be improved. Note that, for convenience, in some drawings, a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 which can be inserted and engaged in the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been done.

In this connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state in which the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 in a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13. By screwing into the vertical piece 18, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protrusion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like this. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the lower ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame board 10 and to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame board 12 so as to face the upper support fitting 20. And a reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower supporting metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner.

First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front side of the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projection. A support hook hole 20c formed by cutting out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b (FIG. 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20. In addition, the upper support fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the supporting projection piece 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the supporting projection piece 20b, and the details of the supporting projection piece 20b will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. In addition, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side (the right side) on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed to the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted and fixed on the reinforcing fitting 22 and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped supporting protrusion 21c protruding from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the front side of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the supporting protrusion piece 21c. Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 70 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame support fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are used as hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 97) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, the engagement between the hook portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 is released by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal member 22. The guide plate 26 is for guiding the main body frame 3 smoothly when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably attached and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the supporting projecting piece 20b is supported by the rivet 28. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. The lock member 27 is made of a synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operating portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it moves away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

As shown in FIG. 14(B) and FIG. 15, in this lock member 27, in the state of being supported by the supporting projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20e so as to close the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a has an inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the front space part of the support hook hole 20c. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the stopper portion 27a of the stopper portion 27a is inserted. A state in which the side of the leading end faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the side of the leading end of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the axial support pin 633 and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, which are located in the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending, respectively. The centers are opposite to each other with the centers shifted diagonally. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a from the stopper 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the stopper 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, the lock member 27 can be smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. Is becoming Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the shaft support pin 633 acts on the arcuate tip surface 27d due to the acting force F in the direction in which it is removed along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the acting force F is A component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d), and one side of the shaft support pin 633 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, and the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (rotation center of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is separated. A moment for rotating the tip end portion from the support projection piece 20b (clockwise direction in the drawing) does not act, and the shaft support pin 633 causes the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to move. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the one side. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if unreasonable force is applied and the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) that is disengaged from the support projection piece 20b, one side of the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is rotated. Abuts the stop hanging portion 20f and does not rotate in a direction in which it further disengages, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b.

Even if the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate in shape, the tip end portion of the lock member 27 is directed to the outside of the support projection piece 20b at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times, and the lock is performed. The present applicant has pointed out that even if the member 27 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. I'm confirming.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame pivot support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 67). It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16(A), the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed in, thereby As shown in FIG. 16(B), since the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 16(C). Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out from the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening/closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16(E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b and the operating portion 27b of the lock member 27 is moved counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to release the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to fix the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails on the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily drive the nails, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily applied to existing island equipment. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, it is possible to form the wall thickness while maintaining strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 67, etc.) adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension. The game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed at the same time as the main body frame 3 can be mounted.

In addition, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the inner frame is fixedly attached to the outer frame 2 and the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are fixed to each other, the outer frame 2 can be assembled with high strength and is sturdy. It is designed so that it can have a rectangular shape. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14 and then the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right side. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front side, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right back side. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the back.

As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It is provided with a left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 is a plate unit 300 attached to the lower portion of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. Attached to the foul cover unit 540, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. And a glass unit 590 that is operated.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is an enlarged perspective view.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present embodiment is a door having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner periphery formed in a substantially oval shape having a vertically long shape. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the lower end of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, are provided.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can also hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or detached. It has become.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower part of the game window 101 with the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction in rear view (open side) ) Disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. A handle device relay substrate 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100, a handle device relay substrate cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192, and a firing cover 191 that sandwiches the center in the left-right direction. And a door frame base board 194 that is arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay board 192 and the like (right side of the center in the left-right direction in rear view (axial support side)) and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base. A door frame base substrate cover 195 that covers the rear side of the substrate 194, and a wiring 196 that is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 and that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (FIG. 28). Wiring holding member 197 for holding a part of the above).

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the whole is improved by fixing the reinforcing unit 150, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it is strong enough to support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. 4140, which is provided with an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified acoustic signal to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative units 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring 196 connecting the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like with the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, and the like is located on the right side (the shaft support) in the rear view of the door frame base board 194. Although the details will be described later, after being bundled together in a position of (1) side, the main side relay terminal plate 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are held by the wiring holding member 197 and extend rearward. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

The door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, and penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the inner shape is vertically long. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, in the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a rectangular cutout 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Are formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and the widths of the left and right side sides are such that an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider area of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 can be easily formed as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is like this.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, and a ball feeding unit 580 for mounting and fixing. To the ball feeding unit 580, the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) for the game ball which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 which is obliquely inclined so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is disposed in the lower right corner portion in a front view and bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, a wire passage opening 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and has a tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. A lock hole 116 that is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described below can be inserted is provided.

As shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 in rear view. From the board mounting portion 118 arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side) for mounting the door frame base substrate 194, and from the arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101. The security cover mounting portion 119 for projecting rearward and mounting the elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180, and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side along the inner circumference of the game window 101 to the front side on the rear side. Glass unit support step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface can abut, and two locking member attachments for projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 to rotatably support the glass unit locking member 190. The part 110b is further provided.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame projecting piece 110c which projects rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire will be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even in this case, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, many mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with an appropriate position for a mounting boss 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker cover 338. Are formed respectively.

Further, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower dish ball supply port 310g and the foul cover unit 540 of the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 which is formed on the front side of the door frame base body 110 above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and is recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to perform a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to prevent a hole from being made from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 with a thin drill or the like. The crime prevention member 121 can prevent the crime and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 has an intersection of central axes thereof in a front view at a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 (for example, 0.2 m to 1). 0.5 m) is obliquely fixed so that a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can receive sound most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is mainly configured to output a sound in a mid-high range, and is arranged at a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high sense of stereo.

The outer periphery of each of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and the speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, so that the door frame. It is adapted to be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment boss 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open, and the rear side rear surface has a vertical direction. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly lower than the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section as shown in FIGS. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the present example, three in the upper and lower direction) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 is vertically aligned with the step 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. Although not shown in detail, the wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported about the extended axis, and the wiring holding member 197 is rotated by the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be housed in the step portion 195a.

The wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined binding band in the upper and lower holding holes 197a with wiring 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface thereof. The wire 196 can be held by inserting the wire 198 and tightening the wire 196 together with the wire holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3. As a result, it is pushed forward and rotated in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free end. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. Then, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring 196 is in a state of being folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that the wiring is held by the wiring 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 smoothly rotates so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring 196.

As described above, according to this example, the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported moves the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is rotatably supported on the rear surface and part of the wiring 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles (breakage of the wiring 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.).

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is made of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force is applied through the wiring 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent the wiring from being shaken in the direction, and it is possible to surely fold the wiring 196 in the lateral direction to prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 creates a bridge between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control section 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electric device and the door side. The wiring 196 connecting the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, the speakers 130, 222, 262, the ball rental unit 360, the handle device 500, and the like as electrical devices is defective. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of the noise as much as possible.

Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, so that the wiring holding member 197 can rotate even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Since the force can be released by the wire, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent a problem such as the wiring 196 being pulled and broken or the connection connector coming off. it can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, a conventional wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-213675) is used. The wiring 196 does not slide like the above), and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a penetrating through the wiring holding member 197 arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 can be reliably prevented from dropping from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position apart from the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring holding member 197 causes the wiring 196 to move the wiring 196. Since it is possible to favorably prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by being guided (guided), the main body frame 3 having enhanced strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. The door frame 5 can be used as the pachinko machine 1 having a high crime prevention property against illegal acts.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the projecting ridges projecting from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring holding member 197 is wired by the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. It is possible to surround three sides of 196, and it is possible to easily hold the wiring 196 along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 can be prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wire holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the body frame 3 in the wire 196 extends. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. A pantograph-shaped link is formed by the axis center of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, so wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 is performed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be smoothed, the opening and closing work can be facilitated, and an unnecessary force is exerted on the wiring 196, etc. to cause a problem such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back along the wiring holding member 197 at the tip end side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3, A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since the wiring holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring 196 can be compactly assembled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught by another member and prevent a defect from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the effect described above. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by increasing the size and having the large game board 4 to attract the player's attention strongly. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the right-angled direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions projecting into the tubular portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although illustration is omitted, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wiring passage port 115 when mounted on the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted into and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 that is inclined, so that the shaft of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward when viewed from the front. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also tilted in the same manner.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes, as mainly shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 153 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 that is attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws or rivets to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface in the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155, 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the main body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110. A lower bent protrusion 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent protrusion 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) in front view of the upper long side edge. , A vertical bending protrusion 161 which is bent rearward at the center of the upper long side edge and is vertically extended. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent projection piece 159, the upper bent projection piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bending projection piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the rear surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a cutout portion 162 that substantially corresponds to the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base body 110.

In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open side outward bending protrusions 163 bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154. The opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 is provided so that the opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 extends rearward longer than the opening-side outer bending protrusion 163 as illustrated. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, is provided on the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft-supporting-side protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of its long side and is open to the outside on the shaft-supporting side (FIG. 112). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending protrusions 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the long sides thereof.

The shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is adapted to be mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158. If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, which is illegal. Although it may be easier to perform actions, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. In addition, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that the front end piece 952b of the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the C-shape (FIG. (See 112), it is possible to prevent the insertion of a tool, and it is possible to prevent only the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent illegal tools from entering the game board 4. As shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and has an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 on the upper side thereof. The contact recess 181 is formed, and the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, at the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting rearward along the end shape thereof are respectively provided. In addition, the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (the pivotal support side) in the rear view is formed to extend rearward longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front projection 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and on the outside of the crime prevention front projection 184, A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side) is mounted. By mounting it on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, the crime prevention front protrusion 184 is adapted to fit with the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 contacts the vertical bending protrusion 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4, and the half open is forward. The component member 1110 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an illegal tool is made to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, it is possible to prevent the intrusion by the crime prevention rear projection 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. ..

Note that the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the guide passage for the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the back surface of the security cover 180 closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of a ball hitting the glass plate 594 that flies or reverses through the guide passage portion.

Thus, in this example, the security cover 180 covers the lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are connected from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to carry out a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (inside the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, and thus fraudulent acts. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more safe against such problems.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 of the door frame base unit 100 are provided with a fitting portion 190a that is rotatably fitted to a locking member attachment portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. This glass unit locking member 190 fixes a retaining screw to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a rearward projecting ridge that rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a fingerhold when operating.

The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base body 110. When the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit which is disassembled and seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit after disassembling it.

As illustrated, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outside is formed in a linear shape along with the arc shape. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 that is arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210. A right side upper decorative substrate 214 having a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from approximately the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a side inner on the lower side. Rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and lower right side decorative board 216, which are arranged below the substantially vertical center of the lens 212 and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted. The right side upper decorative board cover 218 that is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and the right side lower decorative board 216 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216. The lens 210 and the right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 attached to the side outer cover 202.

In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the front side of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is omitted. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 are the side inner lenses. An inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

In this right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The front surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right-side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right-side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. The decoration boards 214, 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are respectively connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b are made to emit light as appropriate, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and the left end thereof is the game window 101. Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 includes a circumferential lens portion 210a formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of circumferential lens portions 210a divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens section 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centering on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

In addition, the side lens 210 includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusion lens portion 210c is capable of widely diffusing light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 to the right and up and down directions of the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be satisfactorily transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, the portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses in a mountain portion protruding forward in a wrinkle-shaped portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light with a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses, and cooperates with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side to make the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 glitter. At the same time, the perspective can be made to look strange and mysterious.

The right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A narrow angle (for example, 15° to 60°) is used. The LEDs 214c on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red and green LEDs in this example.

Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, which is a noise for other pachinko machines. It's hard to come by. Like the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-shaped front surface, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in the ridges protruding forward in the wrinkle-shaped portion. Therefore, light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is adapted to be inserted and arranged in front of the radiation lens portion 210b which is recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit which is disassembled and seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit after disassembling it. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a photograph of a light emitting mode of the left side decoration unit.

As illustrated, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the right side is the game window 101. The left side and the upper side are linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetrical to the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with a width substantially equal to the width of the right side decoration unit 200, and an oval shape arranged between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decoration frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a continuous to the upper side of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and arranged in a row. The frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

The left side decoration unit 240 includes the side flash lens 246, which is fitted from the rear side into the small window frames 242b and 244b of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. In the side lens 250, a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a supported from the rear side and fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 from the rear side. A rear side of the inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens section 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the inner decoration member 251. And a side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below the substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof; A left side upper decoration board cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decoration board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decoration board 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decoration board 256. The left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 is attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256.

Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 is a front left side speaker 262 arranged on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right side in a front view, and a transparent speaker attached to the upper right side of the front side of the side inner lens 252 that supports the upper left side speaker 262. A diffusion portion formed by the upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of belt-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264, inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 on the upper right of the front view, and extending radially around the lower left and right center. And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In this left side decoration unit 240, the side lower decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a non-translucent member, and The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). In addition, the side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows in the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) are used. Opening frames 242c, 244c are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b in a state where the side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are cut out to the side surfaces, and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. The diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusing portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and to the rear of the side inner lens 252. The side is not clearly visible. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left-side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left-side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

The front surfaces of the left-side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left-side lower decoration substrate 256 are white, and the left-side decoration unit 240 can be efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b. In addition, the decoration boards 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Is appropriately emitted, so that the left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light.

The lower side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is configured to extend in the up-down direction along the left outer periphery of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side opened. The side lower decorative frame 242 is a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a small elliptical shape arranged between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c which is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and on the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Has been formed.

The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is to be fitted from the rear side. In other words, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 corresponding to each other.

Further, the side upper decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in a front view which is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extends from the upper left side outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101, It is formed to have a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The side decorative frame 244 is arranged between the large window frames 244a and two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially oval small window frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c that is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. ing.

The side decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is adapted to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the side decoration frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 corresponding to each other. The upper side decorative frame 244 forms a continuous design with the lower side decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. The 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size in which the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are combined, and has a size extending from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a configuration in which a peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 from the rear side and a concave portion rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens section 250b on which the side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens section 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the emission lens section 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decoration member 251 of the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, and has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decoration member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and also in the width direction thereof so as to be concentric with the center of the game window 101 as the center. There are multiple. Further, the inner decoration member 251 has a front surface formed with a plurality of slits 251a formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of the present example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

The side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, has the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decoration member 251 is inserted into each inner decoration member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of belt-shaped lenses radially extending around the lower center of the game window 101 in the left-right direction on the front surface, and the inner direction in which the belt-shaped lenses extend is arranged on the front side. The slits 251a of the decorative member 251 intersect (substantially orthogonal) with the extending direction of the slits 251a.

The side inner lens 252 is configured such that the diffusing portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but light is diffused and refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusing portion 252a. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

Further, the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 are mounted with a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs on their surfaces, and the large size of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 is large. LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60° to 180°) and are used. LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 (the radiating lens section 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246), As 256b, one having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°) is used.

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, similarly to the side speaker 130, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects obliquely forward and downward at the center of the pachinko machine 1 on the left and right when viewed from the front. Then, the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not visible from the player side in a front view. It has become. In addition, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the upper left speaker 262 from being mischievous and breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to prevent an unauthorized tool from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is adapted to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and is unlikely to make noise to other pachinko machines.

Next, the characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side lens 250 including the curved transparent peripheral lens portion 250a forming the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and the surface of the side lens 250 disposed behind the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a plated layer of metallic luster, and arranged in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting with the extending direction of the slits 251a. A left inner decoration substrate 254 and a left inner decoration substrate 256 on which a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of belt-shaped lenses and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a arranged behind the side inner lens 252 are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). Accordingly, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

By the way, the light emitted forward (on the side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is emitted to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and illuminates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decoration member 251 side on the inner surface of the peripheral lens part 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected to the side of the peripheral lens section 250a (on the front side), and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decoration member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens section 250a and is emitted to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, since the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decoration member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side is converged, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and the peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surfaces of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the respective shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape and intersects with the extending direction of the slit 251a by a diffusion portion 252a formed by a plurality of belt-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades, extending in a direction longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting with the extending direction of the slit 251a. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

The upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends from the upper portion of the central frame 281a to a left and right direction and narrows toward the tip, and A front decoration member 281 provided with a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c that extends from the lower portion of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes narrower toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion that are arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281. A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 that is inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulges forward, and a plate-shaped diffusing lens 285 that is disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 and has a plurality of fine prisms formed on its surface. An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and a tube disposed on the rear side of the lens support member 286 and having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged on the rear side of the light shielding member 287 and corresponding to the inner side of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287, and a position corresponding to the outer side of the cylindrical portion 287a. A plurality of LEDs 288b arranged on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288.

In addition, the upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289. LED 290a mounted on the upper side decoration board 290, a board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decoration board 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends rearward. The mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 that is attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extends rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 has a large amount of light-transmitting property and a predetermined size. And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped in a shape.

Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 that closes the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decoration member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape are provided. ..

In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, so that the front decoration member 281 is shimmered by light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decoration member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the lower extension frame 281c. The upper lens 282 has a plurality of radially extending strip-shaped lenses arranged in a row in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the center of the axial center of the through hole 282a on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms and the band-shaped lens of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper center lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed in a spindle shape with a smooth front surface, while a plurality of concentric lenses is formed on the rear surface, and light can be irregularly refracted, so that the rear surface is clear. Is not visible to.

Further, the upper central decoration board 288 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, respectively. The outer circumference of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, the upper side decoration board 290 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the inside of the frame. The upper side decoration substrate 290 can appropriately light the LEDs 290a to lighten and decorate the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281.

[1-2E. Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view taken at a portion of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in the door frame.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 described later, and a game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a plate unit base 310, which is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction, and a plate unit base 310. When the upper plate main body 312 is covered with the plate-shaped upper plate body 312 which is fixed to the center of the front surface and which is open at the upper and rear sides and bulges to the front on the left side (axial support side), the front end is the front. When viewed, the upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion. An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 arranged between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and a right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 are continuous with and cover the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is provided.

Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to a plate-shaped board mounting base 320 having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left-right center to the right lower surface, and to the lower side of the board mounting base 320. And a top plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately causing the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 to emit light, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be illuminated.

Further, in the dish unit 300, the lower side of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 to open the upper and rear sides, and the center in the left-right direction is bulged forward in front view and the front end is moved to the center in the left-right direction. The dish-shaped lower tray body 324 is formed so as to become lower as it goes, and the center in the left-right direction fixed to the upper portion of the lower tray body 324 is bulged forward in the same manner as the lower tray body 324 and the front end is in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 described below at a portion that covers the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and a right side of the lower plate cover 328 at the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 are decorated on the right side with the upper opening 330a and the upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a. And a lower plate side cover 330 having a lower opening portion 330b that is opened to the lower side and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes a lower plate upper left side cover 332 that extends obliquely to cover the left side front end of the lower plate main body 324 and a left side front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and is disposed at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332. A lower left side plate cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 formed of a metal plate that is configured to close the opening 334a of the lower left plate side cover 334 from the rear side, and which allows sound to pass through. A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered by the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left side cover 332 are designed. And a side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. And a cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in the shape of a disc that is loosely curved so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate body 312 for drawing the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and the lower plate body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and attached to the lower surface and the plate unit base 310 are installed on the upper left side of the plate unit base 310 and adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

The plate unit 300 of the present example constitutes a plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the plate main body 312, the plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 that can store game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate body 324, the lower plate top plate 326, the lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper edge extending in the left-right direction. It is equipped. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in a front view) and has an oblong rectangular shape which penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an upper dish ball supply An upper plate ball discharge port 310d that extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction below the mouth 310c (generally in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) and below the vicinity of the right end of the decorative portion 310a, A pair of lower tray support portions 310e are provided immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper dish ball supply port 310c, project forward, and have the same upper surface. In addition, the upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support portion 310e arranged immediately below.

Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e, and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower part on the right side of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It has a notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball can pass.

The upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the cutouts 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is adapted to communicate with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends to the right in front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined lower in the front end direction in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 at the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540, Since it becomes impossible to linearly exit from the upper plate ball supply port 310c into the upper plate 301 in the front, the paid out game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls there. The direction is changed, the guide recess 310j is guided to roll to the right in the front view, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, since the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even if it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed when the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself or herself to a game ball driving operation or a game with a game ball that has been driven, and thereby suppressing the interest in the game from decreasing, and increasing the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 301. You can do it.

The upper bowl discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper bowl removal base 344 in the upper bowl removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the through. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344.

In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with a widened portion 310k that widens to the left in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by the widened portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging from occurring in the lower plate ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games can be played. The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in the front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. As for the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312, the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed near the intermediate position in the vertical direction so as to be located respectively, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can contact the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, this upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) and can remove the static electricity charged in the game ball.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is installed and through which the upper plate ball removing button 341 is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape at the front end, which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c for attaching an operation unit 400 described later, which is formed in a step shape further lower than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction. There is.

The upper plate front part decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape that extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314 in a curved shape. The upper plate front part decoration member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position to the right of the center in the left-right direction, whereas the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved in a spindle shape, and It is formed in a rugged shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front part decoration member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and is capable of irregularly refracting light. The rear side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decoration member 318 is arranged on the rear side of the left side smoothly formed portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316, and has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be seen clearly. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the sense of distance is not fixed.

The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 has a surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces which are curved in a spindle shape like the right side portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316. In addition to being formed integrally with the right side portion, the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of an upper plate ball removing button 341, which will be described later. Further, the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) thereof, which allows light to be diffused and refracted so that the player cannot clearly see the lower side. There is. In addition, the upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The bottom plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan-like shape extending forward in a plan view, the rear end thereof being linearly formed in the left-right direction, and the center of the top surface thereof being the lowest, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are mounted and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plates 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by the opening/closing shutter 352 of the lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and has a silver-colored plating layer on its surface (not a mirror surface but a matte state like sandblasted). The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-shaped portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328a of the lower tray cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower tray side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

The lower plate upper left side cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. Further, the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface thereof, and extends from the lower end to the rear to extend to one side of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. It has a plate-shaped portion that forms a part. The opening portion 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the lower speaker 821 (speaker for bass) provided in the main body frame 3 described later, and the sound from the lower speaker 821 is played by the player. It can be transmitted to the side. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate to prevent an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein. ..

In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover 334 close the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover. The bottom surface between the base plate 334 and 334 is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 described later.

The upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 is mounted on the upper plate upper panel 314 in a mounting hole 314a so as to be able to move up and down. And the operation plate 342 that is moved up and down by a greater amount than the up and down movement of the upper plate ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and the operation piece 342 is operably (rotatably) supported and the plate unit base 310. Of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 that slides in the vertical direction and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 described later. An upper dish ball removing slider 343 provided on the rear side of the dish unit base 310 and an upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310 that supports the upper dish ball removing slider 343 slidably in the vertical direction. And a removal base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 includes an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the upper bowl ball removing base 344.

The upper plate ball removing base 344 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharging port 310d of the plate unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper plate ball discharging port 310d and opens toward the front 344a (Fig. 43), and a ball guide flow path 344b that guides the game sphere that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344 and that has passed through the opening 344a and then guides it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 42). 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, and then extends toward the right side (shaft support side) end in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball punching base 344. The ball removing passage 344c, which allows the game ball to roll, is provided.

In the upper dish ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a has a ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. Can be supplied to.

In addition, the ball removal channel 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 communicates with the ball removal port 581b of the ball delivery unit 580 through the ball delivery opening 113 of the door frame base body 110, with the upper end adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b. At the same time, the lower end extending to the shaft support side is in communication with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 is connected. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removing flow channel 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removing flow channel cover 345.

In this upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball removing button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also formed. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. By moving, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 go from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding flow path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball removal port 581b to the ball removal channel 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Note that the ball punching member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the abutting piece 343a of the upper plate ball punching slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring. Even if the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition part 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like are provided. It is possible to prevent damage and also to prevent the game ball from bouncing back at the partition 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is disposed below the lower plate main body 324 between the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover 334, and forms a bottom central portion of the plate unit 300. The ball removing base 351 and a plate-like opening/closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 and capable of opening/closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 are rotated. A lower dish ball removing slide 353 that is supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removing base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removing button 354 that is attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removing slide 353. ing.

This lower dish ball removal base 351 is provided with a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating vertically in a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324. Further, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b, and a shutter ball removing hole which is disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and which can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and which penetrates in the vertical direction. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by a coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removing base 351 and the lower dish ball removing base 351 so that the closing portion 352a closes the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a. ..

Although not shown in detail, the opening/closing shutter 352 is provided with an abutment pin capable of abutting the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the abutment pin abuts the lower dish ball removal slide 353. The closing plate 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slide 353 so as to move rearward, or the lower plate ball removing slide 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring 356. You can do it.

Further, in the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, when the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening/closing shutter 352 is substantially aligned with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball pulling slide 353 in a predetermined position in order to hold it in the moving position.

This lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. There is a state in which the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening/closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removing button 354 in the closed state is pressed rearward, the lower plate ball removing button 354 and the lower plate ball removing slide 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removing slide 353 slides backward. The opening/closing shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring 356.

Then, as the open/close shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball removing hole 352b comes to overlap the lower plate ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower plate ball removing hole. Matching with 324b, the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged below the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball removal hole 324b. In addition, when the lower dish ball removing slide 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b substantially match, the lower plate ball removing slide 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower bowl ball removing slide 353 is locked (held), the lower bowl ball removing button 354 is moved backward and remains in the open state, and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is opened. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removing button 354 is held in a state of being matched with the hole 324b.

On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the retracted and opened state is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower plate is removed. The opening/closing shutter 352 is configured such that the ball-sliding slide 353 can slide and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball-hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving to the direction (front) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the open/close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 moves down. It is possible to return to the closed position that substantially coincides with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and to store the game balls in the lower plate 302.

It should be noted that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a loan remaining display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit 300. It is possible to lend (pay out) into the upper plate 301 of the dish, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card will be returned after subtracting the remaining amount of the loan There is. In addition, the remaining balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and which mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivotal support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

More specifically, the ball lending unit 360 includes a transparent ball lending unit front cover 365 that covers the front surface side of the lending balance display portion 363, and a loan remaining display portion 363 that is arranged behind the ball lending unit front cover 365. Ball rental unit substrate 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 is attached, and the ball rental unit of the dish unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit substrate 366. And a rear cover 367 attached to the rear side of the attachment portion 310b. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367.

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and a rental button formed between the button openings 310m. It is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the ball unit front cover 365, and projections 310o formed on the outer circumferences of the two button openings 310m and protruding forward, respectively, and are transparent to close the display opening 310n. The lending remaining display portion 363 arranged on the rear side through the ball rental unit front cover 365 is visible from the player side. Further, the protruding portion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end as shown in FIG.

As shown in the drawing, the ball rental unit 360 of this example has the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged to face. Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the dish unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362.

In addition, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (on the player side) from the outer circumferences of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts his/her hand into the upper tray 301. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent the 361, the return button 362, and the like from being erroneously operated.

The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. The machine can be used as a pachinko machine, and even a new pachinko machine 1 (a new model of pachinko machine) can reduce the anxiety and the like given to the player so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing. Has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the upper right front side, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation portion of the operation unit is pressed.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at the substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and the pressure that can be pressed by the player. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted or the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and not only the operation of driving the game ball into the player, , It is also possible to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that fixes the drive gear 412 to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 slidably in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation portion 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. A base member having a spring 418 biased upward, an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. 420, an upper cover 422 that has an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 to pass through, and a base member 420 that is attached below the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420. It mainly includes a lower cover 424 that covers lower surfaces of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

The operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and has an opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a plating which is arranged on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and has a predetermined shape and which has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with layers and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and the dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface. , A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the dial decoration board 430 having a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted at a position corresponding to the ring and a lower side of the operation portion holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation portion 401. 432b, a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

The dial operation part 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a light-transmissive material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and an outer side from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extension surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and an outer cylinder portion 401c shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a. A flange portion 401d that extends annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c is mainly provided. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation portion 401 includes a connection locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operation portion 401 is locked. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Furthermore, the dial operation portion 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner tubular portion 401a. The protrusion 401f can come into contact with the step 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, which will be described in detail later, and the step 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By abutting against the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the drawing, the contacting surfaces of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operating portion 405 are lowered toward the center of the dial operating portion 401. The inclined surface is formed so as to increase the contact area when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation section 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation section 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation section 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation section 405 side. It has become.

The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is applied to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is like this.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower outer periphery and having a lower end protruding outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b of the operation portion holding member 416 are provided. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button holding cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (depressing operation portion 405) does not rotate inside the button support cylinder 416b. It should be noted that a gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the abutting portion inside the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to move at a predetermined angle. It can be rotated within a range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c extending downward from a position different from the lower part of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter below the center in the up-down direction smaller than that on the upper side, and a step portion 407a is provided between the upper side and the lower side. Are formed. In the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405), the lower side of the step portion 407a is smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the upper side of the step portion 407a is the dial operation portion. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner tubular portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operating portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular sliding surface on the lower surface that abuts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the facing positions of the upper ends and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation part 401 are integrally rotatably connected by being locked with the connection locking part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are adapted to be detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details of the rotation detection pieces 410c will be described later. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to rotate integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 rotates the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, by rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in the forward and reverse directions in small steps by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time for each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to add a feeling.

Further, the operation portion holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f (lock projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking the locking claw 406b of the button body 406). 49 and 50), and a through hole 416c for sending light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the bottom center of the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation portion 405). An opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b moves in the vertical direction. An opening 416e through which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 is viewed from the upper side, and a pair of board holding claws 416g extending downward from the lower surface to hold the button decoration board 432. I have it.

Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406, and locks it. It further includes a plurality of contact portions that can contact the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button body 406 from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 has a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, and the like at appropriate positions. Is equipped with.

The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be rotatably supported. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. .. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy so that the operation unit 400 is less likely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower recess 420b that is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation unit holding member 416 can be fitted, and a bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b, and vertically extends through the operation unit holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape that allows the gear rail 416a to pass therethrough, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and that is recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410, Equipped with. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f opening downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e are provided.

In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper concave portion 420c, and a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g, which are different from each other outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430 protruding to the bottom. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses for mounting the respective members, mounting holes and the like at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower recess portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass through the central opening 420a. The operation portion holding member 416 can be supported by screwing the operation portion holding member 416 through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b from above. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base member 420 has the upper end of the gear rail 416a slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation member holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can be slidably rotated in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof that fits with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424, which will be described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. The board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 in the surface by mounting the dial drive motor 414 on the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 and the like from being defective due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box-like shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a of an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass, on its top plate. ing. The top cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

The upper cover 422 extends downward from one outer periphery (front side in the pachinko machine 1) of the minor axis direction (front-back direction in the pachinko machine 1) and has a lower end protruding outwardly, which is a claw-shaped locking piece 422c. Equipped with. The locking piece 422c can be locked with the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c with the upper plate front decorative member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off from the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

In the upper cover 422, the operation portion holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial operation portion 401, and the like are attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 422a from below. By covering the upper portion of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation portion 401 from coming off upward.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper part, and has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that are engageable with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (the left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

As shown in the drawing, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that vertically penetrates through the center and allows the upper cover 422 to pass through, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a to attach the operation unit of the dish unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although not shown in detail, it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached so that the lower surface thereof is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when the is pressed or hit, so that the impact can be alleviated.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attaching portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then, The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation portion 401 has the circumferential length of the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 have a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 that is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that. Thereby, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection/non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation portion 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414, which will be described later in detail. .. In addition, the operation unit 400 gradually rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 as shown in FIG. Since the 407 (pressing operation part 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylinder part 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protruding part 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to break.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small increments in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. By repeating turning and reversing, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game or effect. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. In addition to being operable, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and it is possible to entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. it can.

In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is inevitably hit and the operation unit The force of striking 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the concentration of hit impact can be suppressed to prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Since it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 capable of withstanding a smash, it is possible for the player to freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405, entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300, and when the operation portions 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with a shock or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, shock and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 becomes the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the impact and the load can be received by the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, so that the impact and the like from the operation portions 401 and 405 are dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like. The operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can improve impact resistance and load resistance.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at a position away from the position where the operation portions 401 and 405 are supported, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 is abutted against the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c and impacted by the operation portions 401 and 405, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. The portion supporting the member is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is flexed (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, since the operation portion holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side holds the dial operation portion 401 so that a part of the dial operation portion 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in a plan view, the dial operation portion 401 is held. When the operation portion 401 is struck from the upper side, even if the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is disengaged from the base member 420 and moved downward, the dial operation portion 401 contacts the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can favorably prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 in accordance with the game state, the dial operation unit 401 is arbitrarily rotated (rotationally driven including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and the effect produced by the operation units 401 and 405 can be paid attention to, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414. It is possible to make the effect using 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and prevent it from getting tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is probably set to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotating shaft of (410), even if the dial operating unit 401 or the pressing operating unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotating shaft of the dial operating unit 401. It is possible to avoid directly contacting the dial drive motor 414 and prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, since the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 supports the dial operating portion 401 through the opening 420a, the dial operating portion 401 is supported. Even if the gear rail 416a (operating portion holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operating portion 401 can abut the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operating portion 401 can be moved to the base member. It can be surely prevented from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating portion 401 and the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating portion 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 that rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation motor 414 frequently rotates the dial operation unit 401 or the dial drive motor 414. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player in spite of being driven to rotate by, the amount of heat generated by the excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being defective due to overheating. It becomes possible to endure a high load, and the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial drive motor 414 as described above can be sufficiently embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. can do.

Further, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, and it is more convenient for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with which the player can experience, and it is possible to keep the player entertained and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Further, since the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 for light-emitting decoration of the operation units 401 and 405 are provided and the operation units 401 and 405 can be light-emitted, the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 contact each other, so that the player operates the pressing operation portion 405. When is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 vibrates the dial operation portion 401 by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined angle range, so that the dial operation portion 401 is vibrated by virtue of the step portion 407a in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation unit 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, and entertaining the effect using the operation unit 400. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move arbitrarily, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that something is happening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 is allowed to participate. In addition to facilitating the operation, the player can positively operate the operation unit 400, entertaining the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be achieved. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing due to the interruption of the game.

In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is rotatably supported only within a predetermined angle range around the axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, a dial drive is performed. Even if the dial operating unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operating unit 405 from attempting to rotate together with the dial operating unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial operating unit 400 in the dial operation. The roles of the section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to easily entertain the player using the operation unit 400 and guide the upper surface of the pressing operation section 405. The characters “PUSH” displayed can be easily read by the player without turning or greatly tilting, and the player can be sure to recognize that the pressing operation unit 405 is to be pressed. be able to.

Further, the dial operating portion 401 is provided with a protruding portion 401f protruding from the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401a toward the axial center side, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operating portion 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined vertical position. Since the stepped portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible at the upper end of the operation unit 400. In addition, the gap between the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and at the same time, the inside of the operation unit 400 can be provided through the gap between the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as the difficulty of turning the dial operation unit 401 and the difficulty of pressing the pressing operation unit 405 due to the entry of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operating portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operating portion 405 is pressed, a portion of the dial operating portion 401 in the circumferential direction is pressed. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position biased to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), it is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are in contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to decrease toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation portion 401, there is a case where the contact portion is not inclined. By comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially distributed outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing the load from concentrating and increasing the resistance of the operation unit 400. The loadability and shock resistance can be surely enhanced, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, the occurrence of defects during the game can be reduced as much as possible, and the interest of the player can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward/reverse rotation, not only the dial operation portion 401 is simply rotated, but also the dial operation portion 401 can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, forward/reverse rotation. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) having the above-described operational effects can be surely embodied because it can be easily vibrated by repetition.

Moreover, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the plate unit 300 has a high strength and rigidity in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a strong hit to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51(A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 51(B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and seen from the rear. As shown in the drawing, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis in a round shape, a handle main body 504 that is arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, A front end cover 506 that is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the handle body 504.

In the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that is integrally rotatable with the transmission gear 511. The rotational position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view through the transmission gear 511. The biasing auxiliary spring 514, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the touch sensor 516 are attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the firing stop switch 518 and the inner base 508. A one-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported and operates the firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504. And a handle return spring 522 for urging the handle return spring 522 so as to return it to a rotation end in the direction of.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion which is open at the front side and bulges rearward and has a rear end portion which extends rearward in a cylindrical shape. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylinder. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting the handle base 502 into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

In the handle device 500, the handle body 504 is formed with an arcuate slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof, and the front end cover 506 is formed with three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b protruding rearward, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, one end of the handle body 504 is biased by the handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 so as to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in a front view.

The handle device 500 of this example is adapted to be attached to the handle attaching portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face the outer side (open side) in a plan view seen from above, so that the handle mounting portion 114 is mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip portion inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable in the turning operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 506 are plated with conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle main body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is hit. You can do it. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the one-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the one-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 188) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotation drive can be stopped. Accordingly, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520 is released, so that before the one-shot button 520 is operated. It is possible to shoot a game ball with the driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, after the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the frame 5 is linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the link is released when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a defect in the joint unit, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being deteriorated due to a defect in hitting the game ball.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52(A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is shot by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hitting ball launching device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example is provided with a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of flow paths for gaming balls inside, and a front cover 544 closing a front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 communicates with the first ball inlet 542a which is disposed in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A first ball passage 542b that spreads to the right in front view as it goes to the front end of the cover base 542, and a second ball entrance that is arranged outside the first ball entrance 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. 542c, and a second ball passage 542d which communicates with the second ball inlet 542c and extends downward and is inclined downward toward the lower right corner in a front view inside the cover base 542. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 is such that the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is approximately three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball, as shown in the figure. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 is arranged in a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and is open upward, and can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e and guide the game ball to an upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening/closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 to rotate the opening/closing crank 793. The open/close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a and the second ball outlet 544b which is arranged at the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is configured to be connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 of this example uses the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. It is possible to supply to the upper plate 301 from 544a via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. 544b can supply the lower plate 302 to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received in the foul ball inlet 542e to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 from the second ball outlet 544b through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply). ) You can do it.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms the upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and the cover base 542 is swingable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. Of the swing member 548 pivotally supported by the full swing sensor, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in the non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. And 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported by the cover base 542 and an upper end that rotates leftward when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is provided with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. There is.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , Are provided so that static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the game ball can be removed.

In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, Even when the upper plate 301 is full, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game balls stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770. When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also filled, the game balls start rolling to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83), and the full tank branch unit 770. From the full tank outlet 776 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b.

When the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the game balls cannot be output from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a lot of the game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the rocking member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 188) stops the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and the game is played. It is designed to give a notification to the person to expel the game balls in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is detected. It becomes non-detection, and the payout of gaming balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[Antistatic measures for door frame base board 194]
As described above, the foul cover unit 540 (molded product of transparent polycarbonate) (see FIGS. 52(A), (B) and FIG. 53) has the second ball passage 542d and the game ball for guiding the game ball to the lower plate. Since the accommodation space 546 that retains the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while contacting the wall surface of the passage, static electricity is generated by rubbing the game ball and the resin, and the game ball is charged. Cheap.

Therefore, at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d, a metal ground rail 554 is provided for removing static electricity of the game ball generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the game ball and discharging it to the lower plate. There is. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-shaped grounding metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the grounding metal fitting 556 at the left end can be electrically conductive to the ground rail 554 on the bottom surface of the foul cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 52A, 52B and 53). The earth metal fitting 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing metal plate 154 (FIG. 18, FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity can escape.

The second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game sphere by the ground rail 554 as described above, but electrostatic charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate of this portion, which may reach 10 kV or more. There is (at most 3 to 4 kV even when pain is felt due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, even if the electric charge accumulated in the resin is grounded, it escapes only in the very periphery and most of it remains. Then, the electrostatic induction by the electric charges may cause a malfunction of the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 near the electrostatic induction.

A ground wire for releasing static electricity is attached to the gaming machine, for example, on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. However, there is a possibility that the ground wire may be broken or the connection terminal portion of the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident.

The embodiment described below is made in view of such a situation, and electrostatic charge induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 even if the earth is not taken. Related to the invention relating to the static electricity prevention mechanism for shielding the door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (shield plate 562 described later) and preventing static electricity escaping to the shielding metal plate from jumping to surrounding conductors. Is.

FIG. 54 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the door frame provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism as viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a rear view of the main part of the door frame showing a state in which the antistatic mechanism is provided. Further, FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 54, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a metal (tin plate in this example) thin plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction due to charges accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. -Shaped shield plate 562 and a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed in an outer peripheral shape larger than that of the shield plate 562 and insulates electric charges that have jumped to the shield plate 562 so as not to jump to surrounding conductors. The insulating sheet 570 is included.

The shield plate 562 has a flat plate-shaped conductive portion 563 that is in conductive contact with the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the door frame 5 at the upper portion in the vertical direction, and a step portion 568 that is bent and formed in the horizontal direction. Is located below and behind the conductive portion 563 with the boundary as a boundary, and is disposed substantially over the entire rear surface side of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame 5, and is a substantially plate-shaped shield portion 564. And have.

A mounting portion 565 that extends in a substantially semicircular shape is formed in the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563, and an insertion hole 566 is formed in the mounting portion 565. Has been drilled.

The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562, and serves to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from surrounding conductors. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, an insulating sheet 570 is attached to the shield plate 562 near the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 by adhesion.

55 to 57, as described above, the door frame base substrate 194 has the rear side covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the static electricity prevention mechanism 560 is arranged over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, the shield plate 562 is arranged on the back surface of the insulating sheet 570 such that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located radially outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562. The conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 comes into conductive contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5 so as to be conductively contacted with the static electricity to escape.

Note that mounting bosses 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for the foul cover unit 540 are provided at appropriate positions on the right side portion of the lower back surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base body 110). Further, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the shield plate 562 and the grounding metal fitting 556 to the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 made of metal so as to release static electricity to the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 at appropriate places. 154c are provided (see FIG. 56).

The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss portion 110g into the insertion hole 566, and the screw is inserted into the mounting hole 567 and the screw insertion hole 154a of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and the screw is screwed into the door frame. It is screwed to the base body 110.

Then, the foul cover unit 540 is arranged with the front cover 544 in surface contact with the back surface of the shield plate 562, and a screw is inserted into the mounting portion thereof, and the screw is screwed into the mounting boss portions 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back surface of the door frame base body 110. Further, the grounding metal fitting 556 has a screw inserted into its mounting portion, and further, the screw is inserted into the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. The door frame base body 110 is screwed so as to escape.

The shield plate 562 and the foul cover unit 540 are screwed together and attached to the attachment boss 110g with screws. A ground wire (not shown) is also fastened together with the ground metal fitting 556 by a screw and attached to the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154.

[Operation of Antistatic Mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 escapes to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 through the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 which is in surface contact and the conductive portion 563 which is in surface contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. The thin plate-shaped shield plate 562 can shield the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction due to charges accumulated in the foul cover unit 540.

In addition, since the shield plate 562 is arranged so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the electric charges that have jumped to the shield plate 562 are transferred from the corners or end faces of the shield portion 564 to the surrounding conductor (metal). (Objects and harnesses) can be prevented from jumping.

[1-2I. Ball feeding unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. 58A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. Further, FIG. 60(A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 60(B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. Further, FIG. 61(A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front. , (D) are explanatory views showing the action of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be supplied. It is possible to pull out to the lower tray 302 by operating the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340.

In this ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having an opening 581a penetrating therethrough and a ball outlet 581b opening to the lower side of the entrance 581a, the rear end of which is closed, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. Box-shaped, a rear cover 582 having a batting ball supply port 582a for supplying a gaming ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from an entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the batting ball launching device 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover. A ball removing member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a that partitions the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581; , Sending the game balls on the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 one by one to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover and rotatably supporting the shaft extending vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. And a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. It is arranged.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing port 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b below the inlet 581a, and the upper surface of the partition 583a is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584, and bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end thereof extends around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotatable rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. And a weight portion 583d that protrudes to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110. It is configured to come into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball-removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. A ball holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90° about the rotation axis. The ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is adapted to rotate with respect to the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball hitting launcher 650, and at the same time, the game entered from the entrance 581a onto the partition 583a. The movement of the ball to the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 584a and remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the side of the rod portion 584c closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition part 583a is held in the ball holding part 584b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved back and forth by the movement of the ball feeding operating rod 586 whose tip is vertically swung by the driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 585, and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 586 which is vertically swung. A ball feed crank 587 that rotates about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the up-down direction. The ball feed crank 587 includes an engaging portion 587a that is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 60) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation in FIG.

The ball feeding unit 580 of this example uses a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 that is swung by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 that moves up and down. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

In addition, the sphere member 583 rotatably supported in the sphere feed unit 580 of the present example is adapted to receive a moment to rotate counterclockwise in front view by the weight portion 583d. The rotation of the operating rod 583c protruding forward is regulated by abutting the upper end of the abutting piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300. At normal times, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-removing member 583 partitions the space between the entrance 581a and the ball-removing opening 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball-removing opening 581b side. Then, when the player presses down the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and abuts. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, whereby the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and enters through the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b into the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition 583a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball is The partition part 583a can be prevented from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 of this example is provided with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 60(B) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape having a laterally long overall outer diameter in a rear view, and is located on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip that is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, which are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of the boundary, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c. V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in the direction perpendicular to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 (backward) so as to move away from each other. It is provided with a V-shaped cut portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is bent at the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (the left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b is moved backward, so that the cut portion 588d is formed. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted inside the V shape. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. Is formed.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d. It is like this. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is provided. The portion corresponding to the portion where the mark is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time, is formed so as to communicate with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw attached is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the fraudulent game ball I is played by the ball striking device 650 in the game area of the game board 4. When struck into the inside of 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the batted ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in a front view, and between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempt to penetrate into the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I will be pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the illegal moving path of the game ball I, and the passage of the game ball. It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 to the side of the ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 is such that the game ball I moves to the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). In order to move to the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at that position. After being guided to the inside of 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the improper momentum of the game ball I.

As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (leftward when viewed from the front) by the cutting portion 588d of the illegality preventing member 588 by the force of the illegal game ball I. Then, the cutting portion 588d acts on the wire Iw by friction or shearing force (see FIG. 61D). At this time, the illegal game ball I with the wire rod Iw has its momentum damped due to the friction or the like acting on the wire rod Iw, so that it does not enter the game area 1100 and is between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, an illegal act is performed in the game area 1100 with the illegal game ball I attached with the wire rod Iw. It is possible to prevent people from being exposed. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality preventing member 588 as described above, so that the illegal act cannot be performed. Even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to damp the force of the illegal game ball I and the gaming area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

As described above, according to this example, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the player installs the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is driven to send the game ball to the hit ball launching device 650, and the ball hitting device 650 drives the game ball into the game area 1100, whereby the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is opened. The game is played in the game area 1100 that is visible through the game, and it is possible to entertain the player, and at the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585) is provided. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball-stripping member 583) are provided, so that not only the ball-sending member 584 and the ball-stripping member 583 but also the ball-sending member 584 and the ball-striking device 650 are possible. When the game balls in the upper plate 301 are discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the number of game balls remaining on the ball feeding member 584 side can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and prevent the interest from decreasing.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 having the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the operation, and to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled up with the game balls early, and to the game balls in the upper plate 301. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's annoyance and suppress a decrease in interest, and the size of the plate unit 300 can be reduced while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game is relatively performed. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball removing member 583, compared with a case where the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 are separately provided, only by attaching the ball feeding unit 580, the ball feeding member 580 is attached. Since the 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor for assembling can be simplified, and the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, so that the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583 have a problem. However, even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be easily solved.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the upper dish ball It is not necessary to configure a transmission mechanism (upper dish ball removing mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removing button 341 to the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the openable/closable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the transmission mechanism ( It is possible to avoid the risk that the transmission mechanism is quickly consumed and malfunctions or is damaged due to the interruption of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340), and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580 and the like. And durability can be improved.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, only by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, the game balls can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the discharge of the game balls from, and it is possible for the player to easily operate the ball removing operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removing button 341.

Further, the partition plate 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, since the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the horizontal movement range of the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the partition 583a as much as possible, and the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feeding mechanism are provided. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described operational effects can be provided.

Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is biased upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 connects the admission port 581a and the hitting ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts on the partition part 583a, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition part 583a (ball removing member 583) durability can be improved. Further, since the impact on the partition 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper bowl ball removing slider 343, it is possible to prevent the game sphere from bouncing even if it collides with the partition 583a, and the sphere of the game sphere is repelled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a in the planar projection can be reduced. The effect of can be achieved.

Further, since the partition part 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b communicate with each other, when a problem occurs in the partition part 583a or the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340, the partition part 583a Is rotated by its own weight so that the entrance and discharge ports are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (insertion device) side even though the discharge operation section is not operated. Since it is not discharged to the player side, it is possible to let the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble, and to move to the pachinko machine 1 with no trouble, which is interesting. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Further, since the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is rotated through the bent rotating rod portion 583b, when the game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact is bent. The impact is prevented from being linearly transmitted to the rotary shaft by dispersing the rotary shaft 583b by the 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotary rod portion 583b. Can be increased.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game ball in the upper plate 301, the left and right sides of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are discharged. It is possible to minimize the movement in the direction, improve the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580, and discharge the game ball favorably. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge route of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can serve as a discharging mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from unnecessarily increasing in size.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the hitting ball launching device 650. As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. With respect to the wire rod Iw being pulled fast (strongly), the wire rod Iw can be surely cut, and the illegal momentum of the game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting concave portion 582b which is recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front side, in order to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward may not be projected rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece portion 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 may injure an operator during assembly or the like. It is possible to prevent it.

In addition, in the illegality preventing member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent rearward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material interposed therebetween. Since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 that is formed of synthetic resin and has an opening that is substantially the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stopper pieces 592a which are arranged on the upper portions of the left and right sides and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement portion which extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and extends downward. And a stop 592b.

In this glass unit 590, the locking piece 592b at the lower end is locked so as to be engaged with the vertical bending protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step portion 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stopper piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Modeling decoration on door frame]
Next, a molding decoration on the door frame 5, that is, a shape decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame by cutting it at substantially the center in the vertical direction. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls lined up and down below the vertically elongated elliptical game window 101. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 which closes the game window 101, on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. Further, the door frame 5 has the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the game window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

The door frame 5 has greatly different appearances on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has an appearance like a natural rock rugged by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, which are visible from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 on the left side, give a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

As shown in FIG. 62, the door frame 5 differs in the amount of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 has the left side decoration unit. It projects more than 240 forward. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved plane shape.

As a result, in the door frame 5 of this example, when viewed from the right front, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 appear to be similar to each other (see FIG. 19), while the left front When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, which makes it possible to give different impressions depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like this. In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the pachinko machine 1 relative to the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to give the illusion of a pachinko machine of a different model. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing to the player and can attract the player's attention.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left-right asymmetrical, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the left-right direction in an island facility of a game hall or the like, the overall appearance of the island facility feels solid and solid. By arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of different configurations alternately, it is possible to give a rhythmic impression and to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). Therefore, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 and the like provided in each of the units 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby causing the game window 101. It is designed to be able to emit light with any color so as to surround it. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246 are included. , 254b, 256 can be turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light-emitting decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. Further, FIG. 64 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment is a ring-shaped outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed so as to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by making each LED emit light as appropriate, the game window 101 The outer periphery of the can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference except the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centering around the lower part of the left and right center of the game window 101. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is included. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by a single smooth curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

In addition, the door frame 5 is behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256, which are arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, have circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a, respectively. It is provided with LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to emission lenses 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is used as an LED. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214, the right-side lower decorative substrate 216, the left-side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), white coating, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 214a, 216a and the like are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210, 250 from becoming too dark and unattractive to look, and by reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated brighter.

As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portions of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that face the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. And four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 and an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed behind the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the extended frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decorative substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decoration substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted. It is possible to separately decorate the and. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be decorated to emit light. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decoration substrate 288 and the upper side decoration substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and has an appearance continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this plate unit 300, an upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper plate decorative substrate 322 allow the upper plate front decorative member 316 to operate. The right side portion and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 for decorating the front plate outer periphery of the upper plate ball removing button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation portion 401 and a light-transmitting columnar pressing operation portion arranged inside the dial operation portion 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are arranged below the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 430b (four in this example) arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 correspond to each other. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a have a first annular group 102 near the game window 101 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 63 and 64) and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (Within the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 63 and 64) and by making the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light as appropriate, a substantially concentric shape is formed so as to surround the game window 101. A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be provided. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the hatched area near the game window 101 is illuminated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are made to emit light. When all the lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , A radial group 104 (in FIGS. 63 and 64) that extends radially around the lower left-right center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be divided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is set as the notification group 105, and the LED 214c is caused to emit light as appropriate to play the game. A variety of information can be notified to a person or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is defined as an upper center group 106 for illuminating and decorating the upper center of the. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It has become possible to make luminous decorations that become dots. Further, the LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 are an upper center side group 107 that lights up and decorates both left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 arranged below the game window 101, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate 301 is illuminated. It is a dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the dish unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 are the operation units 400. The operation group 109 is used for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be played. You can inform the person.

The light emission decoration of the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a-102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second ring-shaped group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been.

The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, the central portion 106a, the right portion 106b, and the left portion 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. In addition, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include a pair of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are diagonally arranged with the pressing operation unit 405 interposed therebetween, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b. No. 2 system, and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In the light emission control, the number is 84 times, which is triple. The LEDs 288a and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 109a, and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, there are twice as many as eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs of normal brightness and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b formed by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, and therefore the same number of systems is used for the actual light emission control, that is, ten systems.

Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. As a result, it is possible to produce a luminescent effect with a rich expression.

As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first annular group 102 is sequentially emitted to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitted in the same color or in similar colors) to spread outward with the game window 101 as the center. Luminous effect, or conversely, luminous effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequentially emitting the same color or similar colors), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with an LED (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the game board 4, the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101, and the first annular group 102. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged further outside, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the respective systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j are appropriately made to emit light, so that the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 is provided along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to give a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284, or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited to this. , If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to favorably perform a light emission effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Further, by making only the radial groups 104 emit light, a light emission effect is produced in which the game windows 101 are emitted radially, and at the same time as the radial groups 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted. By doing so, a light-emitting effect in which the entire outer circumference of the game window 101 is made to emit light substantially uniformly is performed, or while the first radial group 104 and the second annular group 103 are emitting light, the radial groups 104 emit light (lighting/blinking) It is possible to give a luminous effect that gives an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by individually emitting light from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to provide a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) orbit.

Further, by illuminating the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 107, the player has a chance or a specific game state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, a time shortening gaming state, a probability variation short time gaming state). , Etc.) can be performed.

Furthermore, by making each system 108a-108d of the lower group 108 light-emit appropriately, the upper plate 301 is made to emit light, and by making it emit light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation are performed. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405. In addition, by appropriately lighting the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and guides the rotating operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Furthermore, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108,. For each 109 or each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, it is possible to perform a light-emission effect with different gradations of light-emission color, brightness, etc. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 71. FIG. 65 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the main body frame. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Furthermore, FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 at the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of the present example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support metal piece 630 and a lower shaft support metal piece 640, which are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The award ball unit 700 for and a flow of game balls from the award ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the body frame base 600. A ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 for

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electric parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unit of the above, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. 73 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view that is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially forward and backward. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 69). Accordingly, when the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the locking device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, when the main body frame base 600 is laid down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 becomes substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and the workability in assembling the main body frame 3 is improved. Is able to improve.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction in a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part, and a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer circumference of the game board 4 is held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms a front end outer periphery of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side when viewed from the front, a recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Of the door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the door, the upper bending protrusion 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bending protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and a lower rear wall portion that spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like this.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board placing portion 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placing portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605, the game board of the game board 4 being formed. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the front right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. There is. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but its movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. The unit 610 is provided (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72, etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, so that the upper shaft supporting metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft supporting metal fitting 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. You can do it. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in a front view, and the door frame 5 formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in a front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view. And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, in the main body frame base 600 of this example, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the lower rear wall portion 604 is viewed from the front right side. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. With the ball hitting launcher 650 attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 67, FIG. A foul space 626 spreading downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall part 604 in front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both left and right sides in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is configured to be closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 70 and the like), and through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the lower rear wall portion 604. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having an impact wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that expands in a fan shape around an axis centered on a fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in a front view). This game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported on the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a projects upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving to the front side. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by coming into contact with the stopper 617, the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is regulated. Has become.

Further, in the main body frame base 600, a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. As shown in FIG. 73), when the body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that extend vertically inward in the front side (in the axial support side) with respect to the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) side in a front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock engaging hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is lined up in two left-right directions are provided below the lower door hook hole 620. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in substantially the center of the vertical direction. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view. Then, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

Further, the main body frame base 600, when viewed from the rear, gently and obliquely descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604, and then at the substantially center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 that hangs down from the middle of the up and down direction to a position slightly above and allows the game ball to roll. This main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is designed to be closed on the rear side by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the details will be described later, but a game ball rolling in the ball removal passage 741d in the prize ball device 740. Are supposed to roll.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is arranged at the rear end of the rear wall left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and a plurality of back cover shaft support portions 623 that pivotally support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 diagonally upper left in front view of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 of the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame base 600 on the front end left end upper and lower rear view front surface of the main body frame base 600 using predetermined screws, respectively. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side in front view of the shaft support pin 633. And a door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 67) penetrating in the up-down direction and the front extension 632 downwardly hangs downward from the left end of the front extension 632 when viewed from the front side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) that regulates the end. In this upper shaft support member 630, a mounting portion 631, a front extending portion 632, and a stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5, and the main body frame 3 is axially supported with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that spreads vertically and horizontally, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 634 that vertically penetrates near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and the front extending portion. A stopper 642d is provided upright from the left end of the front side of the front view 642b and restricts the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, the mounting portion 642a, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame support metal fittings 644 of the lower support metal fittings 640 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and have a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. Also in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extending portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of this example is such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support metal fitting 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is like this.

The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and serve as a shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are positioned on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the main frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c and the metal fitting 642c are arranged coaxially with each other, and the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame fitting hole 634 of the door frame fitting fitting 642 in the lower fitting fitting 640. The lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame shaft support fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support fitting 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is not supported. Once it is slid downward, the upper shaft support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, a launching base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a projecting to the front side on the lower back face of the launching base 652. Of the launch solenoid 654, a ball hammer 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 so as to be rotatable integrally, a mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the ball hammer 656, and a trajectory of movement of the mallet 658. A hammer 656 at the tip of a hammer 656 is provided between a launch rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in a front view and is attached to the front surface of a launch base 652 with a predetermined position above as the base end, and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. A ball stopper 662 that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 and forms a gap in which the game ball cannot pass at the same time that 658 is allowed to pass, and is held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662. And a stopper 664 for restricting the rotation of the hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) from the hitting position where the played game ball can be hit.

Although not shown in detail in the drawing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650, the drive shaft 654a is adapted to reciprocally rotate at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. In addition, the batting mallet 656 of the batting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 and a tip extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b facing the normal direction and having a mallet tip 658 fixed at the tip, and a stopper portion 656c extending toward the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664 are provided. ing. Since the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 contacts the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower side is recessed so as to be substantially along the lower extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102), and in the front-back direction. On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting the turning end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and a turning position of the hitting mallet 656 apart from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, and it is possible to absorb the impact when the hitting mallet 656 abuts, and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutting. You can do it.

As shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 102, etc., the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower part of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), is located outside the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward in the left-right direction with a predetermined width is formed between the rail 1111 and the lower end thereof. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example shoots the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by launching the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view with respect to the launch rail 660. You can do it. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 is provided. The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received in the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the hitting ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It can be driven so as to be synchronized with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 which supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball and drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 from that state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is adapted to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Therefore, the launching solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580. By (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the hitting mallet 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 83. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. Further, FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and shown from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a rolling passage of a ball in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then makes a predetermined payout instruction. Based on the above, it is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. This prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper portion of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the island facility side. And, a tank rail unit 730 which is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and which aligns the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends it to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. It is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof, and the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof. Back cover fastening holes 780b are formed (see FIGS. 77 and 79, etc.).

In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in a front view. It is made of transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a with a predetermined width, and is arranged in a substantially same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. This prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

In addition, the prize ball base 710 includes a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate which are arranged beside the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal board mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and a rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. Award ball device mounting portion 714 for attaching the award ball device 740 to the award ball, award ball passage 715 adjacent to the award ball device mounting portion 714 for guiding the game balls discharged from the award ball device 740 downward, and a rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 has an escape hole 717 for escaping the payout motor 744 and the like penetrating in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projecting forward from the prize ball device 740, and a back hole. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a mounting hole, a mounting boss, or the like for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, or the like, or the body frame base 600. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper side, and has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape only in the right side rear portion (open side rear portion) in a plan view. A discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the right rear portion projecting rearward of the bottom wall part 721 of the right rear portion 722 and opening downward, and a plate shape from the left side (shaft support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Formed on the eaves portion 724 that extends to the rear, a rod-shaped shaft portion 725 that extends rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in plan view, and a rear end of the outer peripheral wall portion 722 and the proximal end of the shaft portion 725. An attachment portion 726 for attaching the tank 720 to the award ball tank attachment portion 711 of the award ball base 710.

In this prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the drawing, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein, and the other end side hangs down by its own weight. .. This ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning game balls rolling in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730, and It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although not shown in detail, the top surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view becomes lower toward the right side. In plan view, the right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the outlet 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 is a gutter having a predetermined depth with an open upper side, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction, and a left end (axial support side) end in front view. The bottom is slanted so that The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) that opens downward at the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 78) that project further downward and are locked from the upper side to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 are provided.

This tank rail 731 is arranged such that the right end (open side) end in front view is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 are stored. After being received, it can be rolled to the left and passed from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the top of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper that can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game ball divided into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 is provided with a mounting portion 734a on which the ball stopper 735 is mounted, and two slits 734b which vertically penetrate and allow the protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735 to be inserted.

In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. Further, the ball retainer plate 734 is for forcibly setting the game ball that has not been stepped by the ball leveling member 727 to the next level, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 are axially supported so as to shift by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the outlet 723 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately prized one by one. Device 740.

It should be noted that the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball inside the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. Is becoming Although not shown in detail, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is designed to be grounded to the outside through the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 through the grounding metal fitting 782. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 inside the tank rail 731, it is possible to remove the charged static electricity.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the ball stopper 735 rotatably mounted on the mounting portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734 is rotated so that the protrusion 735 a of the ball stopper 735 is passed through the slit 734 b to the inside of the tank rail 731. By inserting into, it is possible to close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 by the projecting piece 735a, it is possible to stop the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the state of the game balls and the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game ball discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage that opens to the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball and slightly below the center in the vertical direction. 741a, a distribution space 741b that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and has a space of a predetermined width, and a distribution space 741b that communicates with the lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b A prize ball passage 741c opening to the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end (right side of the rear side) of the distribution space 741b in rear view and extends downward and opens to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back lid 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support disposed below the back lid 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects rearward of the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated with each other. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is axially supported by the unit base 741, and a second gear 746 that meshes. The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741 are the third gear. A rotation detection plate 749 is fixed on the opposite side with the 747 interposed therebetween so as to be integrally rotatable, and has a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In addition, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball that is attached to the unit base 741 and rolls in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 are held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, a rotation angle sensor 752 and a payout control board 4110, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, Equipped with.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection plate 749). ), and a sensor cover 753 from the rear side, and a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with a back cover 742 sandwiched therebetween, and a supply passage that can contact a game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. An earth metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 while sandwiching the motor support plate 743, and a screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744, and a back cover 742 are detachably supported on the unit base 741. A detachable button 759 for removing and attaching.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the open rear end of the ball removal passage 741d. Are to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be alleviated. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out on one side surface (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741a bulges rearward, and outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the out-of-ball switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball break switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and is present in the supply passage 741a. It is possible to detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a by the ball break switch 750 by pressing the operating piece by the game ball. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball cut switch 750 (ball cut state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It will be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotor 748), a switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and a distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed at an upper portion of the unit base 741. I have it. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 to the grounding metal fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 comes into contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a is removed via the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757. You can do it.

The back lid 742 of the prize ball device 740 is in the form of a vertically long plate and has an upper end bulging rearward. A button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attachment/detachment button 759 is formed on the upper part of the back cover 742, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the rear surface of the substantially vertical center, and a relay board mounting The sensor board mounting portion 742c is provided below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor board 753, and the through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is configured to come into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be prevented. It is designed to facilitate heat dissipation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a having a size capable of accommodating one gaming ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotating body is provided. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated in the recess 748a one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout motor is generated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6 or the like to the payout control board 4110, or operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is adapted to rotate. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detecting board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 82, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then passed to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the pay-out motor 744 rotates the pay-out rotating body 748 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the side of the ball-out passage 741d, and the pay-out rotating body 748. The game balls dispensed to the ball removal passage 741d side by the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full tank branch unit 770, the main body frame base removal passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, the substrate unit 800 from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d. Can be discharged to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of the present example is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled into the main body frame 3, the prize from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 79 and 83. The full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. At the same time, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are full, it is possible to distribute the game balls to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full-tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the upper part of the center in the front-rear direction by a locking part 770a that is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710, and is fixed to the rear end upper part on the back surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixed portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the attachment locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and thus the prize ball base 710 is By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the entire unit is lowered from the rear end toward the front end, and the upper end of the rear end is opened substantially at the center in the left-right direction. A prize ball socket 771 for receiving a game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball socket 771 and expanding in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83). And, the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball that rolls in the normal passage 773 is discharged to the front side. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end in front view and a full tank passage 775 for guiding the game ball toward the front side from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 83). (See), and a full-ball outlet 776 that discharges the game ball rolling in the full-tank passage 775 to the front and opens to the left side of the normal-ball outlet 774 in front view.

Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball removal port 777 that opens upward at the left end of the upper rear end when viewed from the front and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball received in the removal opening 777 to the front side, and the game ball rolled in the ball removal passage 778 is discharged forward and the normal ball exit 774 at the left end in front view. And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full tank outlet 776.

In the full tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5. The ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are arranged to face each other and communicate with each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball exit 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and is placed in the dish unit 300. The game balls supplied to the upper tray 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the body frame base ball passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear side, and the game balls emitted from the ball outlet 779 are main body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base removal passage 622.

In this full tank branching unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down in the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b and the first ball outlet 544a of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

By the way, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot be output to the upper tray 301 side from 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually passes through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to fill the upstream normal passage 773. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and then moves laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b. It is designed to be supplied to the dish 302.

The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily detect foreign matter such as dust or dust that has entered the full tank branching unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging without disassembling the full tank branching unit 7700. ..

In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are full, the game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740 are automatically Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the upper plate becomes full like a conventional pachinko machine and the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button of the upper plate. It is possible to prevent the driving of the game ball from being interrupted, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example branches the passage of the game ball paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game balls accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game ball can be directly driven by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the amount of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. In other words, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. You can Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided and the game can be played. The pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing to the player, and the large game area 1100 can entertain the player.

Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray and the receiving opening (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c are provided, the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branching unit 770) of the game balls in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in cost required for the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be dealt with without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 for changing the door frame 5 The cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

Furthermore, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray is provided. Even if it is exchanged, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing due to lack of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. ..

In addition, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to dedicate the player to the driving operation of the game ball, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even if the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storage plates, It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, it is possible to deepen the storage dish to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls, and the player can frequently play without worrying about the storage amount. And the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the substantial storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full with game balls and the game balls cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the amount of game balls stored in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The number can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 are set to have a size in which the game balls can be rolled in a plurality of rows, and the retention amount (storage amount) of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 is stored. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be adapted to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be seen from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, a game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In doing so, the location of the ball clogging can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and the malfunction can be eliminated early, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening/closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view, and is attached to the main body frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to interrupt the flow of the game ball.

The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in a front view so as not to project from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening/closing crank 793 for sliding the opening/closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised via the opening/closing crank 793. And an opening/closing spring 794 that biases the

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 has a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening/closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to project above the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank arranged on the front surface of the left end in front view to support the opening/closing crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening/closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged near the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

Further, the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 has a flat plate-shaped shutter main body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter main body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ) And a drive hole 792b having a horizontally long rectangular shape, which is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening/closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. Drive rod 793b extending outward from the right side to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and protruding rearward from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening/closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, an abutting portion 793d that extends downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and has a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end of the open/close spring 794 formed on the intermediate upper surface of the drive rod 793b). ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking

In addition, in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening/closing shutter 792 are formed of transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised, it is arranged on the rear side through the opening/closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the opening/closing crank 793 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, whereby the drive pin 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 rotates in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening/closing shutter 792 is adapted to slide in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 contacts the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is configured to be rotated clockwise in the front view against the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening/closing shutter 792 descends and the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 and the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening/closing crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the urging force of the opening/closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, in response to opening/closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to be automatically opened. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 93. 87 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit which is disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 91 is a perspective view for explaining the action of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 92(A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 92(B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 93(A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A).

The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. The emission power supply board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of the front view of 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the emission power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear surface and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 that is attached to the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front; a main side relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810; And a terminal plate 882.

The board unit base 810 of the board unit 800 of the present example has a shape that extends in the left-right direction as shown in the drawing, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered one step downward and is gradually inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shield wall portion 811 that protrudes forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position at which the center of the shield wall portion 811 in the left-right direction is lowered and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower portion of the shield wall portion 811. And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting section 813 in front view. Cylindrical duct portion 814 penetrating through, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the rear view left side (the front view right side). ) A box accommodating portion 816, which is opened rearward and upward and is capable of accommodating the front side of the firing power supply board box 830, is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion.

In this board unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. In addition, the board unit base 810 sends the game ball, which has flowed down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622, through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810. You can do it.

Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are forwarded from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. To face. Further, the board unit base 810 can favorably transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, it is possible to form a housing recess for housing the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a lower speaker 821 attached so as to face the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, has a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, this opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 via a predetermined labyrinthine passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting deep bass to the caliber of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted to the front. ing.

The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the launching power supply board 831, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like via the slits 830a formed in the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

This firing power supply board box 830 is detachable from above in a housing recess formed by a box housing 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing 843 of a power board box holder 840 which will be described later and opened upward. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thus, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily removed from the front side of the body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 67).

Further, the emission power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, the emission power supply board 831 includes a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging electric power from the DC/DC converter 831a. And a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 to drive it. This emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a as heat dissipation holes formed on its upper and lower surfaces in order to radiate the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a and electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC/DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged serves as a heat dissipation hole. The slit 830a is formed. In addition, in the power source board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is formed on the inner wall of the upper surface. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall with the inner wall of the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 to close the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830, the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces, that is, a housing space 830c for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a, are formed, the partition wall 830b serves as a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , A storage space 830d for storing the DC/DC converter 831a and a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is housed by being released to the outside via the 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC/DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a is a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated by being radiated to the outside through the slit 830a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing in the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the emission power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its miniaturization, and the replacement operation of the emission power supply board 831 can be facilitated, which can contribute to the reduction of the time spent for the exchange operation. In this replacement work, the emission power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the emission power supply board 831 is still attached to the end opening of the emission power supply board box 830, that is, the entire emission power supply board box 830.

Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly cannot be fired and the game has to be interrupted, it is easy to replace the firing power supply substrate 831. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to very easily eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire at an early stage and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a direct current power supply from an alternating current power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but it does not repeatedly charge and discharge at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. The life of the emission power supply board 831 is extremely longer than that of the emission power supply board 831. In other words, the emission power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 which is a separate body from the power supply board 851, so that the life is shortened. It is possible to concentrate the electronic components on the power supply board 851 due to the long-term change of As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component, which has a long service life and is aged, from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 which has a short service life.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached/detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity for changing the hitting characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach and attach the launch power board 831, and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. By doing so, it is possible to make it harder to carry out fraud, and it is possible to prevent fraudulently changing the optimized driving strength by illegally modifying the launch power supply board 831 and making it difficult to carry out fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a player who feels irritated or the like from developing into fraud such as fraud.

Further, since the emission power board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the emission power board 831 is tampered with, the emission power board 831 is immediately replaced to tamper with it. It can be resolved, the period of interruption of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game can be eliminated early, It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 which controls the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced by changing the model, the launch power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By changing to the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC/DC converter 831a capable of realizing the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the hit ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be changed to a new game. It can be matched with board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is prevented from deteriorating. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached/detached from the front side, when exchanging the launch power supply board 831, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 to the island facility such as a game hall, The time and effort required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall side can be prevented from increasing. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply board box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristic is changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control section 4120 (the payout control board 4110) is replaced. It is possible to reduce the cost required for, and to reduce the burden on the side of the hall.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is exchanged so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the firing control unit 4120 can be used for a long time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. It is possible to solve the problem by shortening the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and to eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601 in order to be detachable. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing a fraudulent act is entered through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being fraudulently acted on, and the pachinko machine 1 having high defense power against fraudulent acts can be prevented.

Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position supporting the launch power supply board box 830 is rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the launch power supply is possible. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily ensured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the firing power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, the power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 easily deteriorates, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-described effects.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game balls discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the left front surface rather than the left-right center in a front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, and a side surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. And a front box housing 843 which is opened forward and upward and can house the rear side of the firing power board box 830, and the front end of the power board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side. And a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 600 is formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600 and rolls through the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 to pass through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 to the rear of the board unit base 810. The game ball flowing down to the side and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharging section 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving section 841 will be described later in detail through the discharge passage 842 and the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 house the firing power supply board box 830. The recess can be formed.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is configured to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like is externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 90, the power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

Further, the power board box 850 is a standing wall protruding rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 of the power board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the power supply board box 850, the standing wall portion 850b is slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 with the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. Is formed so as to project to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state in which the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is adapted to be connected.

By the way, when connecting the connector terminal with the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the board and then pulling the wiring cord toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. A force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 side can be prevented from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. The wire cord 854 can be made to be hard to come off and the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It can be performed, and the work process for assembling can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed such that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When mounted on, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing the opening of the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851, and the connector 855 is projected by the standing wall portion 850b rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction such that the connection with the 853 is released, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. This makes it easier to remove the board, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, the bending degree of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from breaking due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 which the power supply terminal 853 faces, and the standing wall portion 850b is probably located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connected connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and it is impossible. It is possible to prevent the application of various forces, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, or the like, which causes a defect, from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and defense power against fraud can be enhanced. Is becoming

Further, the direction in which the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power supply terminals 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminals are connected to the power supply terminals 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting 855 can be made to easily act on the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the breakage of the power supply and the occurrence of a power failure, or the power supply terminal 853 is disengaged from the power supply board 851, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a failure.

Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means including the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be fixed. Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 through the direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being released. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor current flow.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that prevents the above and surely achieves the above-described effects.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to be moved to the standing wall portion 850b side, the wiring cord 854 is hard to come off from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to carry out a series of operations continuously, and it is possible to simplify the work process relating to assembly and suppress an increase in cost.

The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a horizontally long, thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened. 862, and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 188) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separating/cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and the separating/cutting portions 863 are provided at one place. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball removal switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the rear surface on the upper left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. A board base 871 having the board base 871, a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 having a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface of the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871, and a board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 that is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b that extends vertically in the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. Also, a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and a board box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 are provided.

The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each made of a transparent synthetic resin, and are connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display installed on the island facility side, the CR unit 6 or the like is displayed. A displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 92, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 includes a fixing piece (not shown) that is formed on an inner upper portion of the board mounting portion 871a to fix an upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and a peripheral panel relay formed on a lower inner portion of the board mounting portion 871a. A terminal board box locking claw 871I for locking the lower end of the terminal board 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871I. You can do it.

In addition, the board base 871 has a board cover attachment portion 871b formed in a thin box shape that is open to the rear side, and the inner circumference of the board base 871 has a size that allows the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 to be inserted. In addition, its inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 abuts on a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction and a front surface of the CR unit connecting terminal board 874 extending rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover attaching portion 871b. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f which is arranged on the left outside of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The ridge 871e of the board base 871 is in a state in which the amount of rearward projection is slightly less than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the drawing, it is possible to extend to both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is located so that it is close to

Further, the board base 871 is arranged on the rear right side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in the rear view in a vertically spaced manner so as to vertically support the board box cover 875, and a pair of bearing portions 871g and a left end in the back view. And a locking portion 871h in the shape of a rectangular tube that is disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 and is insertable into the board cover attachment portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b. The inner wall portion 873d extending forward from the 873a (toward the substrate base 871) and the upper and lower outer wall portions that hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has a plurality of openings 873f arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and a plurality of openings in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a board base 871 that extends outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. Pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and elastic claw-shaped members that can be locked in the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871 that are formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear. And a claw piece 873i. Although not shown, inner wall portions 873d extending forward are also formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening portion 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with its front side opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving backward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the forward movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Is becoming Further, in the connection terminal plate cover 873, the fixing piece 873h is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) thereof. Besides, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a rectangular two-piece connector. There is.

The board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is open to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front and rear from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b. And a locking piece 875d that is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The substrate box cover 875 pivotally supports the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the substrate base 871 can be opened and closed together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. There is. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (a side pivotally supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. In other words, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective collision walls 875c are in a state of substantially contacting the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like this.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as the D-sub connector, and therefore, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside even on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear, as shown in the drawing.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the assembled state, the terminal board box 870 of this example has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Of the ridge 871e and the outer piece portion 871c, and in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the shaft portion 875a of the substrate box cover 875. Since the side wall 875c and the side wall 875c are respectively present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an illegal tool having excellent flexibility is made to enter between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal is not bent. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit connected as the CR unit connection terminal 874a is attached. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraud can be prevented. It is like this.

In addition, the terminal board box 870 includes a pair of shaft portions 875a on a board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 on the side of the shaft portion 875a of the through hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Since an impact wall 875c having a length that spans between them is provided and the impact wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like can be inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, thereby making it difficult to perform fraudulent action and reducing the deterrent force. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector, it is illegal to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are separated from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the space between the pachinko machine 1 and the tip of the illegal tool is inserted into the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal board 874. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal board 874.

When the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 (the back surface of the board). The ridge 871e and the outer piece portion and 871c of the base 871 are connected to each other, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d and the board of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each of the impact walls 875c of the box cover 875 is present, a multi-layered defense wall is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. By analogy, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is attempted to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal board is provided. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the 874, and reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraud.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear surface of the board base 871 to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. The board box cover 875 having a plate-shaped collision wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through hole 875b on the pivotally supported side to the rear surface of the board base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected by the collision wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then the connection terminal board cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against misconduct. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted and a gap can be prevented from being formed, and fraudulent acts can be made difficult and deterrence can be enhanced.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, a countermeasure is taken. Since the rear side of the opened opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 ( A needle-shaped electrode cannot be inserted from the rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cords, which has a high crime prevention capability. Can be

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e that holds the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal board 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal board cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It is possible to keep the protection of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such as.

Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an unauthorized tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or has the CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. itself been replaced with an unauthorized tool? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether or not the electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like are replaced with unauthorized ones. Since it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts and to detect fraudulent acts, it is possible to hesitate to perform fraudulent acts against those who perform fraudulent acts, and enhance deterrence against fraudulent acts. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the rear surface side of the main body frame 3 such that the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 3 is turned to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 is turned to the operator side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal board 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control section 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and a door frame. 5 is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in FIG. 5, each decorative substrate, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals are directed from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side.

The front side of the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side are exposed to the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, and the wiring 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

In addition, the main relay terminal board 880 is a rotation position detection sensor of the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining lending display portion 363, the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94(A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 95 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover taken apart and seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. This back cover 900 has a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of axial support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction and project downward and are axially supported by the back cover axial support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball that is formed on the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main body portion 902 in front view. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and a back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and the back cover 900 near the lower engaging piece 908. 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the fastening mechanism 920 of the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating to the left side in the front-rear direction in the rear view of the lower locking piece 923a of the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically elongated rectangular locking hole 922 that is disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in a rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking hole 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally elongated slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a slot 923b of the guide member 923, which is inserted from the rear side of the main body 902. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, which is attached so as to sandwich the guide member 923. And a holding member 925. The guide member 923 of the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disc-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out from the long hole 923b. In this fastening mechanism 920, when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening member 924 protruding to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is locked. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 that is inserted from the rear side to the front side of the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw part 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 that is locked in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. When the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example does not remove the fastening member 924 even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is oblique with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, the fastening and the fastening can be easily performed only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released and the back cover 900 can be opened and closed easily and the maintainability can be improved.

In addition, the back cover 900 has a connecting cutout 910 that is cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower end on the right side of the main body 902 in a front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connection cutout 910 in a front view. The main body 902 is provided with a rectangular notch for confirmation 914 and a confirmation notch 914 at the lower left corner of the main body 902.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is in a state of being closed to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 through the connection cutout 910. Etc. are facing the rear side. Further, the back cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 through the check opening 912 so as to face the rear side, and also to check the back cover 900. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the cutout portion 914. Accordingly, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

In addition, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portion 904 in an elongated shape. It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at a position slightly leftward from the center when viewed from the front and are wide and extend long in the up-down direction and are arranged in rows at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board 4 is provided. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the device so that heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. Is becoming Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

Thereby, in this example, a fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Since it is movably held, when the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 with the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4, maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is guided by the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. The pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing the pachinko machine from falling off can be provided.

Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been fastened at a predetermined position at the time of maintenance or the like. Since the back cover 900 can be held near the insertion hole 921 through the guide member 923, maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a can be secured in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head of the holding member 925 and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off the long hole 923b of the guide member 923, and at the same time, the holding member 925. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap between and the long hole 923b.

Further, an accommodation recess for accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back cover of the main body frame 3. When the fastening member 924 is fastened to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 can be brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of a defect. In addition to being able to do so, it can improve the appearance.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion so as to be screwed with the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening can be performed only by pulling, as compared with the engagement by a simple locking claw. Therefore, the back cover 900 cannot be easily removed, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activity can be obtained.

Furthermore, since the guide member 923 is flexible and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921), It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or move the male screw portion 924a straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Therefore, the male screw part 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

Further, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking hole 922 of the back cover 900 with the locking hole. Since it is elastically locked to the 922, the tip end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably attached extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923a can be pivotally moved around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the front end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. Is further provided with a plurality of engaging pieces 908 for engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the rear cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, thereby the fastening by the fastening member 924. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 at only one place, and the work such as assembling and maintenance. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening members 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the body frame 3. Therefore, only by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b through the insertion hole 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened even if the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released for maintenance or the like. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the labor required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side crime prevention plate]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a U-shape that is shallow in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed above and below the front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaging with the positioning recessed portion 1119 of the game board 4.

The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 has a side piece 952a that extends in the vertical direction with a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and the front end of the side piece 952a is viewed from the front right. A front end piece 952b extending in a direction, a middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap behind the front end piece 952b and having a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front surface from the rear end of the side piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction when viewed (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by the side piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d with the front constituent member 1110 in the game board 4. The left side when viewed from the front with the game panel 1150 is designed to be inserted (see FIG. 112).

In the side crime prevention plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In the side crime prevention plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 causes the shaft supporting side metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 to support the shaft supporting side plate. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the letter-shaped protrusion 166, and to prevent a tool for performing an illegal act from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 112). Further, the main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the front end piece 952b, middle piece 952c, and Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are enhanced, so that the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be enhanced and the game board 4, the door frame 5, etc. can be favorably supported. It has become.

Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (intruded), and the front end piece 952b is inserted in the U-shaped side. Since it is in a state of being sandwiched by the projecting piece 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotal-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the pivotal support side of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 by contact, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented, which can prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being easily distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the side crime prevention plate 950 on the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5 (axial support side) is made of metal. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal.

Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a burr. It is possible to favorably prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread even if they are gouged by another tool, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made to extend rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the length of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction is increased. Since the bending rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the entire side crime prevention plate 950 can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the side crime prevention plate 950 from being forcibly bent and performing fraudulent acts. ..

Further, since the side face crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extruded mold material, the side face crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost, and in comparison with the case where the metal plate is bent, there are defects such as strength reduction during processing. The side crime prevention plate 950 can be made as small as possible and has high durability and strength.

[1-3I. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. 97(A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 98(A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98(B) is a sliding lever for a glass door and a main body frame which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. FIG. 3C is a rear perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device after disassembling it, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the sliding lever for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 from approximately the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in an upper part of a front end right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600, a lock locking hole 621 formed in a lower part, and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. A plurality of lock attachment portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front, and are attached.

As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base body 1001 as a lock base body having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. Tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the bottom of the base 1001.

The U-shaped base body 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and has a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base body 1001 is extremely thin in its lateral width dimension as compared with a conventional locking device which is integrated into a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, which further increases the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached so that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped base body 1001 is U-shaped. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 become the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to fraudulently act on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the open side (rear side) and the closed side (front side). The hook through opening 1002, the upper side of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw stopper portion 1003 protruding outward toward the middle, and the screw stopper portion An upper end portion and a middle portion on the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projecting portion 1003 is provided, and the lower end portions of the open-side side surfaces 1001a and 1001b project forward. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

The screw fastening portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is the hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 603 of the main body frame base 600 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the lock device 1000.

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only in the upper and middle screw stoppers 1003, but also in the screw stopper 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 described below and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also attached to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base body 1001 on the upper side, the lower side, and the front side are provided with the hook holes 620 for the door in the upper side and the lock locking holes. Since it has a structure in which the locking device 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting part 625 with a screw, the locking device 1000 is extremely simple in structure. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is formed by consolidating the U-shaped base body 1001 having an extremely thin width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front side and the rear side of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking protrusion 1004 forming the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) is provided on the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 forming the fixing structure on the rear side is provided so as to project from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b thereof. A rivet 1006 is inserted into the insertion hole 1005 and caulked while the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is housed, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper ends of the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower three positions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the elongated rivet holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower part thereof and a side surface 1001b which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side and protrudes laterally from the front end. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. Although the details of the fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 when the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The lock insertion hole 1009, which is provided so as to project from the front end portion to the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010, are attached at two upper and lower positions for mounting with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 bored in and a screw fastening portion 1003 bored to attach the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 that biases the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and a side escape hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. Equipped with.

The cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and has one end side serving as a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engaging projection 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 at the time of rotation.

In this cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion is inserted from a rear side into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008, and then attachment holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of a lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through.

The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illicitly move the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire or a wire, thereby tampering with the body frame sliding rod 1050. This is to prevent lowering. As shown in FIG. 99, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first tampering prevention member 1023, together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base body 1001, passes through the swing shaft hole 1025. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 is opened vertically in the plate-shaped surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base body 1001 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The ascending engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined to the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 diagonally above and diagonally so as to come into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers the swing shaft hole 1025. Is oscillated (clockwise in FIG. 101(B)).

Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base body 1001 side from an outer periphery of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely rearward and downward, and a position from which the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a restricting protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 that penetrate through the restricting protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and that are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inserted into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from unintentionally sliding. Further, the restriction protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, whereby the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

In addition, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed in the pin hole 1029 is Guide the first tampering prevention member 1023 along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally elongated opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. You can do it. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 rotatably by the connection pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second tampering prevention member 1032 connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 is formed of a plate material having an inverted "te" shape, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second tampering prevention member 1032 may be rotatably connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first tampering prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 urges the spring upward. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the locking device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base body 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 that project toward the front at three locations in the upper, middle, and lower portions of one vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base body 1001 with the door frame sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door hook hole 620 (see FIG. 67 and FIG. 72) formed in the main body frame base 600 protrudes forward to open the door. The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. It should be noted that the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover can be lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long rivet slot 1042 formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side faces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, there is provided a guide projecting piece 1043 which projects in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is adapted to be inserted with the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 is slid for the door frame. It is formed vertically long so as not to interfere with the raising operation of the rod 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that has penetrated the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact with the rivet elongated hole 1042. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The sliding movement of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at an upper end portion for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 allows the sliding of the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 and can prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base body 1001. It is like this.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 has a tip end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The section constitutes a movable space. Further, when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 causes the sliding movement of the door frame 1040 to ascend due to the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. For engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief cutout portion 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction larger than the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 at the rear of the lower portion of the vertical side. The escape notch portion 1049 interferes with the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 surely engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so as not to become.

On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, Equipped with. That is, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of one vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating in a lateral direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook penetrating opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper inside of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claw portion is formed upward.

The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1040 are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured so that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base body 1001. It has no play and can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet for penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. The long hole 1061, the downward engaging hole 1062 arranged below the long hole for rivet 1061, the play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the down engaging hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed at the lower portion of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portions 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed on the lower portion of the outer frame 2 on the inner side of the open side. The locking claw portion is formed upward. Further, the rivet elongated hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet elongated hole 1061 is riveted. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

Further, when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lower hook member 1052 lowers the lower frame member 1052, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotating operation. Is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is inserted into the second engaging projection 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the second engaging projection 1018 when the second engaging projection 1018 is rotated. The distal end of the can form a movable space. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without backlash.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and superposed. In a state where they are overlapped with each other, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook penetrating opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main body frame After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the long holes for rivet 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is fixed to the pin hole. It is necessary to fix the guide pin 1028 to 1029 with a screw (not shown) and then insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base body 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is closed. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is bridged between the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second improper prevention. The member 1032 is brought into contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tampering prevention member 1023.

In this way, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning with the lock attaching portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projections 1004 forming the locking structure of the front part are projectingly formed on the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall part 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while the rear part is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. As shown in FIG. 100, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are engaged with the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 are The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging projection 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is rotated in a direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engaging projection 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the biasing force of the spring 1048, and connects it. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the body frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the body frame 3 to the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 100A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 upward claw portions and the closing plates 24 and 25 are again locked, so that the main body frame sliding rod is moved. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a not-shown key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the second engaging projection piece 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

Note that when the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 100A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame causes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 ascends upward by contacting with the upper end of the door frame, and the downward facing claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. A door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of an upper end portion, a central portion, and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire from between them. You are unable to perform any act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment unlocks the body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. In addition, the locking device 1000 of this example does not engage in an illegal act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. You can't. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032. The second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. In this structure, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact each other. It is in the state of doing. In this state, the urging force of the spring 1035 causes the first tamper-proof member 1023 to rotate counterclockwise, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 tamper-proof cutout. It is in a state of engaging with an engaging notch portion 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101B, the key is rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. Starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a result, the whole of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, so that the hooked portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 are released from each other, and the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Therefore, the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1023. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 101(A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not interfere with the closing of the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the above are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Since it is in the state, even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 are pulled down. This prevents the fraudulent device from entering the enclosed space, so that fraudulent acts cannot be performed easily.

As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a door frame sliding rod 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose lateral width is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the conventional L-shaped base is integrated. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely increased, and even if the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

Further, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged in the above, are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. It is impossible to easily carry out an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided therein.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. Since it is structured such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with screws, With such a structure, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

In the lock device 1000 of the present example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 and a portion near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 have a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. Although the structure in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 that mounts the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is lock mounted. A lock mounting hole that is screwed through the piece 1008 may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625. It can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of the present example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped base body (lock base body), and a door frame slide rod 1040 and a main body frame slide rod 1050 are provided in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and a peripheral wall portion 605. The structure may be such that it can be housed, and the same effects as those of the locking device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (forward and backward) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. In the rear wall of the prize ball base 710, the prize ball tank 720 storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of 710b, and game balls released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Part of the award ball device 740 attached to the rear side of 710b has a transparent sphere device 740 and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is substantially the rear face of the tank rail unit 730 and the award ball device 740. Since the transparent back cover 900 arranged in the same plane is provided, the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900 and the like. A pachinko machine 1 that can visually check the rear side surface and can easily inspect the rear side of the game board 4 (visual inspection) without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. can do.

Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., so that the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be seen. Even when tools such as a driver and pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust and dirt are left between the game board 4 and the back cover 900 when the game board 4 is attached to and detached from the front side of the 601 side, remove them. It can be easily found from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of some trouble due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an unauthorized device or tool for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear surface or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it is possible to easily find out, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is possible to easily find out an illegal device attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 can be hesitant to attach an unauthorized device or the like and has a high deterrent against illegal acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is laid down can be made as low as possible to have a flat shape. The attachment work for attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be facilitated.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be a substantially flat surface, so that it is possible to prevent it from catching or abutting on other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the protrusions to the rear. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a buffer material having a simple shape can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the stacking efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 and the like, and thus the game board. It is possible to make the rear side of No. 4 and the like easier to see, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, and the trouble such as the deformation of the member such as the synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the game ball passes through the slit 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 111. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 106(A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 106(B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

In addition, FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like, viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is a game of FIG. 107 viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 107 taken in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like as seen from the front, and FIG. 111 is a game board as seen from the back of FIG. 110. FIG.

As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment defines the outer periphery of a game area 1100 in which a player operates a handle device 500 to hit a game ball, and the outer shape is a substantially rectangular front shape. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 that accommodates a main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface of the game machine 1100 and controls a game content performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180, which is capable of displaying a game status and is visibly attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, is provided. This game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, although illustration thereof will be omitted in FIGS. 102 to 109 and details will be described later. Further, it is further provided (see FIGS. 114 to 120, etc.).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by the front component member 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The outer shape of the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 of this example is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from a lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 that extends in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise as viewed from the front, an end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113, and the outer rail 1111. Of the game area 1100 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1112 and the stop portion 1114 to which the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 can be brought into contact. From the upper end of the inner rail 1112, which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111, which is arranged at the lowermost end and is lowered toward the rear, and the upper rail of the inner rail 1112. Only the closed position that extends upward and the open position that rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front to open the space between the outer rail 1111 and the closed position can return to the closed position side. And a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown).

When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. It is intended to be located on an extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space that is widened in the left-right direction and downward is formed. By jumping over the space, it is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is installed. , By turning to the open position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when a game ball is strongly hit in the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. It is possible to forcibly change the rolling direction of the game ball by bringing the game ball into contact with this stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (struck) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not received in the starting openings 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the table unit 2000 described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, by the outlet guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1113, it is guided to the outlet 1151 of the game panel 1150 and discharged from the outlet 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hit ball launching device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, and from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed. When it falls, it is received in the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located under the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

The outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to its surface to improve wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball and to allow the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. Further, the stopper portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is mitigated. In addition to being able to play, the game ball can be repelled inward.

In addition, the front component 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention protrusion 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially vertical center along the inner rail 1113 from the lower side of the outlet guide surface 1115. A rail-shaped crime prevention groove 1118 in the form of a groove extending from the front end to a predetermined depth. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component member 1110 overlaps with the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. As a result, even if an injustice tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the injustice tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. You can't.

Further, in the front component member 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime projection 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. In addition, the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even in the inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118, and the crime prevention rear projection piece 182, a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

The front constituent member 1110 is vertically spaced apart from the front end on the right side in the front end, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 arranged at the left end on the front side in the vertical direction so as to be recessed from the front to the rear and open at the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 that are arranged as a set, a fixed recess 1121 that is arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 when viewed from the front, is opened downward, and is formed in an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side, Near the left end of the lower end, a rectangular notch for ball passage 1122 that extends upward from the lower end in the left-right direction is provided. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to the positioning member 956 mounted inside the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 in front view. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be attached to the game board stopper 1120. By locking to the locking portion 608, the front end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

Further, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a state in which the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is seen in a front view. When it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It is like this. Further, the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is provided with a game board holding opening 601 of the main frame 3. The front end of the full-tank branching unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152 in the state of being inserted into.

Further, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center of the lower side of the through hole 1123 in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate paper sticking portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in front view for sticking a certificate stamp for proof confirmation are provided. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 has a predetermined fastening band in the fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame when the game board is attached to the conventional body frame. By winding and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

Further, in the front component member 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged outside the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. In addition, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing the gaming panel 1150, the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 can be held between them. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This game panel 1150 has an outlet 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the outlet-introducing surface 1115 of the front component 1110 in the lower part in the substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front end on the left side when viewed from the front at the lower end. And a ball passage cutout 1152 of the same shape as the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component member 1110 and a downward projection 1152 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower right corner in front view. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted is provided.

Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 near the lower left and right ends, and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 (see FIG. 105) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1151 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front and the lower end side is opened downward. And a notch portion 1157 that is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and that is cut out so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the outlet 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled on the game board 4. The game ball guided to the rear by the out-out guide surface 1115 thus entered enters the out-out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box-like shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharging portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at approximately the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the top surface of the bottom wall portion has an out-ball discharging portion 1161. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and are discharged (discharged) from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and are supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160. It is adapted to be discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. The out-ball discharging portion 1161 is located directly above the discharging-ball receiving portion 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the gaming board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

The substrate holder 1160 also includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 that project forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are designed such that the tip ends are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1150, and are fitted with the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. With the boss 1126 fitted, a predetermined screw is threaded from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126 to attach the substrate holder 1160 to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 while being assembled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side at the rear end left side end of the rear wall portion, and a fixing portion. An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear side. The fixed portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 allow the main control substrate box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. This main control board box 1170 is a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 whose rear side is opened, and a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 which covers the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be fitted is provided, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals and the like mounted on the rear surface side is provided at the front end of the board cover 1172. In addition, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and is fixed to the fixing portion 1174 that fits into the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and the right end of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the rear. An elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right and left ends in a rear view by sandwiching the elastic fixing pieces 1175, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. Possible sealing part 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal. A protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same structure as the separating/cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed at any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulked and fixed sealing portion 1176 so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Is becoming As a result, it is possible to visually and clearly determine from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened.

Since the main control board box 1170 is provided with four sealing parts 1176 in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, in the main control board box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and even with this hermetic seal, there is a trace of opening and closing. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened/closed, the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified, or the main control board 4100 is replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even so, it is possible to visually confirm it from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the misconduct.

The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-back direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like are exposed to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the main control input circuit 4100f exposed from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and hermetically sealed seal are cleverly worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 can be confirmed by other than visual inspection, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance can be obtained. You can do it.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, and the display portion 1181 and the front component member 1110 are arranged so as to be visible from the player side on the front face of the front component member 1110. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

On the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 106(A), a game state that changes depending on a game ball driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in front view. A game state indicator 1183 for one LED and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game state indicator 1183 for displaying the number of holdings of the game balls to the first starting opening 2101. First special symbol memory display 1184 for, and the lottery result of the first special symbol which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and is selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 (first Special lottery result) 1st special symbol indicator 1185 which consists of one 7 segment LED for displaying as 1st special symbol, 1st special symbol indicator 1185 is arranged diagonally right above, to 2nd starting mouth 2102 Second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball as the second special symbol, A second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of holdings regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102, which is composed of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the two special symbol display 1186, ing. The lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game balls into the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 is different from the big hit lottery found in the conventional pachinko machine, and is a prerequisite for executing the big hit game. It is a lottery for deciding whether or not to operate the condition device. Therefore, even if the lottery is won, the condition device only operates, and the jackpot game is not executed only by this as in the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, in the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, the number of reservations relating to the passage of the gate unit 2301 by the game ball is arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially above the inner peripheral rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display device 1186. A normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying, and a normal lottery result selected by a game ball that is arranged below the normal symbol storage display passing through the gate portion 2301 is displayed as a normal symbol. Ordinary symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for, and diagonally upper right side of the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit (condition device operates The round display 1190 including two LEDs for displaying the number of times (the number of rounds) the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 is repeated.

The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red, green, or orange color LED that can change its emission color. Depending on the combination, it is possible to display various game states (for example, probability variation state, time reduction state, probability variation short time state, jackpot game state, etc.).

Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2101. In this case, the start number of the variable display is displayed as a hold number (stored number) of the first special symbol that has been held (stored). This first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of a predetermined LED, and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, lighting of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b. -The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b. Lights together, when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102. In this case, the start of variable display is displayed as a hold number (memorized number) of the second special symbol that has been held (stored). This second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b consisting of a predetermined LED, lighting of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b. -The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a, 1187b. Lights up together, when the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Furthermore, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED is stopped for a predetermined period of time according to the special lottery result, and then stopped, and the light-emitting pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED causes The special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

Further, the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red/green/orange color LED that is capable of changing its luminescent color, and is a combination of luminescent color to be emitted and lighting/blinking. As a result, it is possible to display the normal lottery result that is drawn by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2301. The display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189, like the special symbol, is changed and displayed for a predetermined time, and then is stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180, when the normal symbol can not be displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display 1189, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the start of the variable display is suspended. The number of stored (memorized) ordinary symbols is displayed. This normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom depending on the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved symbols of normal symbols. Incidentally, in this example, up to four variable display of the normal symbols are reserved (stored).

Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with round indicator lamps 1190a and 1190b made of predetermined LEDs, and by turning on these indicator lamps, the number of rounds in the "big hit" game can be displayed. It is like this.

As shown in FIG. 106(A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. Moreover, the game state display 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol storage The display device 1188, the normal pattern display device 1189, and the round display device 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 147). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, the function The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so the player or game The position of the display portion 1181 can be recognized by a clerk in the hall without any confusion.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. 106(B). In this example, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 configured by 7-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Moreover, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each configured by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

In addition to being able to achieve the same effect as the above with this function display unit 1180, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 are configured by eight LED groups, so 7 Compared to the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming uncomfortable during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game. The game can be made more entertaining by devoting attention to the movable effect and effect image.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150, and is a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. Has been formed. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8-10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1211 that are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and that are formed as circular holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 that are disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. Equipped with. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 each having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and the lower side thereof. The engagement step portion 1213 is notched to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212. It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, which will be described in detail later. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see FIG. 119 and the like).

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board described above (in this example, approximately 20 mm) and made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1220 holds the panel plate 1210 detachably and has a holding step portion 1221 that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and inside the holding step portion 1221 is approximately the same size as the game area 1100. A through hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction is mainly provided.

The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be on the same plane as. The front step inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be filled in the clearance.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with respect to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with engagement claws 1224 and engagement pieces 1225 that engage with the engagement step 1213 at positions corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends from the front surface of the holding step 1221 to the front. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is arranged on the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed between the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 and the panel. A predetermined amount of space is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 toward the upper side (center side) in a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount in the front side so as to leave an outer peripheral edge below and slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 has a recessed shape above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height in a state in which the rear surface side outer peripheral portion projects rearward, and the recessed amount ( Depth) is a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 141 etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 that is attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable that the distance is between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010c can be prevented from projecting rearward of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be prevented from protruding from the main frame 3. (Pachinko machine 1) can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing predetermined screws in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning projection formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning projection that protrudes forward from a front flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c of the back box 3010 (shown in the figure). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) as viewed from the rear.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a large diameter inner hole and a small diameter inner hole are mixed, and the mounting hole having an appropriate diameter is attached according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixedly mounted. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height, and within the range. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is designed to be a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball emitted from the ball striking device 650. However, the guide is smooth. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a thinned-out portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, support them, and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-shaped rib is formed.

The panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning device such as an obstacle nail implanting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 in the obstacle nail implanting device. It is possible to set it in the state of being. In addition, in the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and a bottom end penetrating leftward in the front-rear direction in the front-rear direction and extending downward. Is opened to the front passage 1112 of the front component 1110, and the ball passage notch 1123 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122, and the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1232 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front and a lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 108 ). The member 1110 is provided with a notch portion 1236 that is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 and that is cut out so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is provided on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board placing portion 606 of the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to fit with the positioning protrusion 607 provided, and the outboard discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, whereby the game board 4 relatively moves in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is becoming regulated.

In the gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225 and the engaging step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel plate 1210, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 on the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail arranging device without modifying the arranging device, thereby increasing the cost for arranging the obstacle nail G. It can be suppressed.

Although not shown in the figure, the game panel 1200 of this example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. In addition, the front unit 2000 can be attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel plate 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Further, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200 even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and it is a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 is visible to the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 in which the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes and the like change depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 compatible with various models can be provided by only replacing the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in advance in a predetermined arrangement, the mounting positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, it is possible to make the panel holder 1220 a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of previous component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a different form from the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. The gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 shown in FIGS. 110 and 112 have the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220, which are different from those of the embodiments shown in FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example in FIGS. 107 to 109 except that the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The front constituent member 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the above-mentioned front constituent member 1110 in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different and is not provided with a function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other configurations are similar to those of the previous component member 1110, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using this front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). Prepared for 2000).

As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending inward in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the out-port guide surface 1115 as a base point up to the stop portions 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a gentle arcuate shape is formed between the stopper portion 1114 and the right-hand certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged immediately below the stopper portion 1114, and the lower end of the arcuate portion is connected to the outlet port. The portion up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in a linear shape that is inclined so as to decrease toward the out-port guide surface 1115.

The front component member 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 as compared with the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the player can be more enjoyed by the wide game region 1100. You can do it.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board accommodated.

First, as shown in FIG. 112, the crime prevention structure on the pivotal support side of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a side surface on the pivotal support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcement unit 150 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 formed of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the side-face crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy), and its vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 are combined. The side-face crime prevention plate 950 includes a plate-shaped side piece 952a that extends in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end that extends from the front end of the side-side piece 952a to a substantially right-angled inner side (open side). The piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of space behind the front end piece 952b, and a piece extending substantially inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side surface piece 952a. The height of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the like can be favorably supported.

On the other hand, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by using spot welding, rivets or the like, as described above, using a plurality of elongated metal plates. The shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft supporting side is provided with a shaft supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opening to the outside (shaft supporting side). In the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is made stronger by the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only to the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft supporting side is provided. If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950 and the middle piece 952c. A rear side piece of the U-shaped protruding piece 166 formed in the substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is adapted to be inserted (intruded), and the front end piece 952b is pivotally supported. It is configured to be sandwiched by the side U-shaped protrusions 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotal-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the shaft supporting side of the body from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened and the main body frame. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 from the door 3.

Moreover, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being easily distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends rearward of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is temporarily assumed. Even if is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150), and an illegal act is performed. Can be surely prevented. As shown in FIG. 112, the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the side crime prevention plate 950 so as to cover the outside of the side crime prevention plate 950, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It is able to fully counter the vandalism of. In addition, generally, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it becomes almost impossible to intrude an unauthorized tool to the rear side of the rear end of the middle piece 952c, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 113, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 that houses the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full-tank branching unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 can be replaced by the game board 4. It can be seen from the rear side of the body frame 3 without removing the body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found and it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device and enhance the deterrence against the illegal activity. ing.

Further, from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and therefore the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. Even if tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, waste cloth for cleaning, dust and dirt remain between the main frame 3 and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is detached from the outside It is possible to easily find out from the above, and it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the game board as seen obliquely from the upper right front, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board as seen obliquely from the upper left front, and FIG. [Fig. 3] is a perspective view of the game board as seen diagonally from the lower left front. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and seen from the oblique rear. It is a figure.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and when a player operates the handle device 500, a game ball (also simply referred to as a “sphere”) as a game medium is generated. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that defines and forms the inner periphery of the game region 1100 to be driven, and a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game region 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A so as to close the game region 1100. A plate-shaped game panel 1200 having a plurality of openings 1215 (see FIG. 119 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 is provided.

The game panel 1200 of this example has a transparent panel plate 1210 which is plate-like and has a smaller outer shape than the front component member 1110 and which can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110A. A frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110A. The opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in the transparent panel plate 1210.

In addition, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000. And a function display unit 1180 arranged at a position visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and visible from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko machine 1. , A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a display screen (display area) that is visibly attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 from the player side and can display a predetermined effect image, and a lower portion of the back unit 3000 is covered from the rear side. The game panel 1200 is provided with a substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface thereof, and a main control substrate box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160.

The table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example is an attacker unit 2100 which is arranged in the lower part of the game area 1100 so as to extend in a right direction when viewed from the front just above the outlet 1151, and a game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. The front side unit 2200 arranged along the inner periphery of the, the gate unit 2300 arranged at a position slightly higher than the center in the vertical direction near the left end in the front view in the game area 1100, and the outline of the game area 1100. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged in the central portion.

Further, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and the rear wall 3010a has an opening penetrating in the front-back direction in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces. A back box 3010 in which 3010b is formed, a back front decoration unit 3100 arranged near the front end in the back box 3010, a back production unit 3200 arranged in the back box 3010 above the opening 3010b, and a back box. A lower back production unit 3400 arranged below the opening 3010b in 3010, and a lower back right arranged between the lower back production unit 3400 and the front decoration unit 3100 in a lower right corner of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The rendering unit 3600 is mainly provided. The front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 188) having a peripheral control section 4140 and a liquid crystal control section 4150, which will be described in detail later. A box 1910 is provided.

In the game board 4 of the present embodiment, a game area 1100 is divided into left and right by a center role object 2500 attached to a game panel 1200, and a right outer periphery of the center role object 2500 and an outer periphery of the game area 1100. An area having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between (the inner circumference of the front constituent member 1110A), the outer circumference on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (the front constituent member 1110A). The inner circumference of the game ball is a wide area where the game ball can roll sufficiently, and a plurality of obstacle nails (in front of the panel board 1210 in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100). (Not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (it is hit with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined strength), the game ball is upstream of the hitting portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A. From the side, it is sent to the receiving space 2530 through the receiving/entry passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500, and is basically guided to the right route in the receiving space 2530 by the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550. Then, after rolling on the right side route in this way, from the discharge port 2534 discharged from the discharge port 2534 and guided by the guide passage 2540 to the upstream side of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 into the game area 1100. It is designed to be recirculated and released.

However, as will be described later, the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550 performs a periodical operation so that a specific timing for failing to guide the game ball to the right route in the receiving space 2530 periodically comes. .. Then, as will also be described later, when the game ball rolls on the left side route in the receiving space 2530 in this way, game control different from the case of rolling the right side route on the receiving space 2530 is executed. ing. In addition, the game ball that has been rolled on the right route is discharged from the discharge port 2534 and then guided by the guide passage 2540 to be discharged from the discharge port 2541 which is opened on the upstream side of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. It is returned and released into the game area 1100. The game ball that rolls on the left side route is recirculated and discharged into the game area 1100 from the left gate passing ball discharge passage 3650 described later. Therefore, according to such a receiving unit 2550, as long as the game ball passes through the receiving space 2530, regardless of the rolling route inside the receiving space 2530, there is a high probability of receiving the large winning opening 2103 in the open state ( You will be able to win.

Further, in the game board 4 of the present example, when a game ball is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is struck by a plurality of obstacle nails that are planted, and the gate unit 2300, the front side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2100. Is guided to the direction, or is discharged to the position right above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 via the stage 2510 by entering the warp inlet 2504 on the way, and the gate portion 2301, the general winning openings 2104, 2201, It is possible to win the starting openings 2101 and 2102, the special winning opening 2103, and the like, so that the player can enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by the movement of the game ball.

That is, in the game area on the right side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 1100, the movement of the game ball in the receiving space 2530 and the easy winning of the special winning opening 2103 without contacting the obstacle nails are possible. While it can be entertained, in the game area on the left side of the center role object 2500, by bouncing it with an obstacle nail, it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball with a sense of dynamism, and to the player, the taste and mood. , It is possible to drive the game ball so that it can pass through the route of your choice according to your skill, etc., and you can prevent the game ball's drive operation and movement from becoming monotonous and keep you from getting bored. It is like this.

[2-1. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. 121 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from the rear.

The table unit 2000 on the game board 4 is arranged at the lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 so as to extend from right above the outlet 1151 to the right, and is supported on the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210). And, a front side unit 2200 arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and extending in an arc shape substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and above the left end of the front side unit 2200 near the left end in the front view in the game area 1100. A gate unit 2300 arranged at a position slightly higher than the center in the up-down direction, and a frame-like shape supported by a game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 1100 to the right of the game area. The center accessory 2500 is provided.

The attacker unit 2100 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail later, but depending on the result of the special lottery, the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102 in which the predetermined special lottery result is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball. It has a large winning opening 2103 that can accept game balls and a general winning opening 2104 that can always accept game balls. In this example, the second starting opening 2102 is arranged immediately below the first starting opening 2101, and the second starting opening 2102 on the lower side is normally incapable of receiving a game ball, and the gate unit in the gate unit 2300. It is a variable winning opening that allows the game balls to be accepted in accordance with the result of the normal lottery that is drawn when the game balls pass in 2301. Further, the special winning opening 2103 is arranged on the right side of the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 in a front view, and the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and the special winning opening 2103 are left and right with respect to each other. The central axes of the directions are arranged at different positions.

Further, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is provided with two general winning openings 2201 arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and on the upper left side of the general winning entrance 2201, and flows down from above. It is provided with shelves 2202 and 2203 for guiding the game ball to the right.

The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 above the front side unit 2200, and is attached to the front surface of the transparent panel plate 1210. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2301 having a size through which only one game ball can pass, and a gate sensor 2302 for detecting passage of the game ball is provided in the gate portion 2301.

Further, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a large opening 1215 formed substantially in the center of the panel plate 1210, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side. Is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be visually recognized from the player side. In this center accessory 2500, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 that abuts the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 are prevented from entering the frame. A peripheral wall portion 2503, a warp inlet 2504 opening at a predetermined position of the peripheral wall portion 2503, a warp outlet 2505 for discharging a game ball entering the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and a game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction. And a stage 2510 for discharging and returning to the inside of the game area 1100. The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged immediately above the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100, and the game balls returned from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 have a high probability of being attacked. The first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 of the unit 2100 can be received.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a receiving unit 2550 formed to receive all the game balls that have flowed down along the peripheral wall portion 2503 in the upper part on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. ..

In this receiving unit 2550, a receiving space 2530 in which a game ball is received, a movable valve 2551 that basically guides the game ball to the right route in the receiving space 2530, and in the receiving space 2530 by the movable valve 2551. Gate 2575 (right gate 2575R) through which the game ball guided to the right side route can move, and the movable ball 2551 fails to guide to the right side route, causing the game ball to roll on the left side route in the receiving space 2530. Route detection sensor 2580 (2580L, which can pass through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L) and those gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) that are allowed to pass when 2580R).

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot game is not started only by winning the jackpot, and the jackpot game is started in order to start the jackpot game. To one of the two gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) in the receiving space 2530 under control during the period when the detection by the detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) is enabled. At least the passage of gaming balls is required. Further, when passing the left gate 2575L, passing of the game ball to the big hit mode determination gate 3660 (see FIG. 181) is further required for the big hit game to be started.

Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the game ball is simply shot toward the game area 1100 by the above-described movement of the movable valve 2551, the gate Of the 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R), even though the probability that the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R is higher than that of the left gate 2575L, those gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) Depending on which one the game ball has passed through, the jackpot winning process described below will be different so that the jackpot winning process will proceed.

However, as described above, the movable valve 2551 according to the present embodiment is basically prepared as a guide for the game ball to the right route (right gate 2575R) in the receiving space 2530. , Performing a periodic operation so that a specific timing at which a game ball is highly likely to be guided to the left side route (left gate 2575L) rather than the right side route (right gate 2575R) in the receiving space 2530 comes regularly It has become a thing. Therefore, if the timing of launching the game ball is adjusted in relation to the specific timing that is regularly visited, the probability that the game ball is guided to the left route (left gate 2575L) within the receiving space 2530 is within a certain range. It can be adjusted within this point, but this point will also be described later.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, a guide passage 2540 for guiding the game ball, which has passed through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) of the receiving unit 2550, to the center in the left-right direction at a position lower than the stage 2510. The game ball guided by the guide passage 2540 is provided with a discharge port 2541 for returning and discharging the game ball into the game area 1100 above the special winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100. With such a configuration, the game ball that has passed through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) in the receiving space 2530 can be accepted with a high probability into the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. ..

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126. 123 is a perspective view of the attacker unit seen from the front, FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the attacker unit seen from the rear, and FIG. 125 is a perspective view of the attacker unit seen from the lower back. Further, FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit partially disassembled and seen from the rear.

The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 formed in the lower left-right center of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and then the game panel. It is fixed to the front surface of 1200 (panel plate 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of inlets (winning holes) in which the game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the first starting port 2101, which is disposed immediately above the out port 1151 in the game panel 1200 and is capable of always receiving a game ball, is usually disposed between the first starting port 2101 and the out port 1151. The second starting port 2102 that cannot accept the game ball, and the second starting port 2102 and the first starting port 2101 are arranged at the intermediate height between the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 on the right side in front view. Normally, it is possible to accept a game ball that is placed in a horizontally long rectangular-shaped special winning opening 2103, which is normally unacceptable, and directly above the special winning opening 2103 and between the special winning opening 2103 and the second starting opening 2102. It is provided with a general winning opening 2104.

The first starting port 2101 of this attacker unit 2100 is open toward the upper side so that game balls can be always accepted (winning). On the other hand, the second starting port 2102 arranged immediately below the first starting port 2101 is formed by a pair of blade-shaped movable pieces 2105 arranged in a substantially upright state on both left and right sides of the second starting port 2102 as shown in the figure. It is in a closed state between the first starting port 2101 and, in the illustrated state (normal state), the game ball cannot be received in the second starting port 2102.

The pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second starting port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 are rotatably supported at the lower end side, and the upper end side is rotated in a direction away from each other to expand, The game ball can be received in the second starting port 2102. That is, the second starting port 2102 is a variable winning port formed by the pair of movable pieces 2105. The second starting opening 2102 is configured such that the pair of movable pieces 2105 opens and closes in accordance with the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball passing through the gate portion of the gate unit 2300 and detected by the gate sensor. It has become.

Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the openings of the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. As shown in the figure, the special winning opening 2103 is normally closed by an opening/closing member 2106 having a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is opened/closed by rotating the opening/closing member 2106. The opening/closing member 2106 that opens and closes the special winning opening 2103 is rotatably supported about a substantially lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the special winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball. At the same time, when the upper side is rotated so as to move to the front side, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be received. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening formed by the opening/closing member 2106.

Furthermore, the two general winning openings 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 are located directly above the center of the special winning opening 2103 in the left-right direction, and between the big winning opening 2103 and the second starting opening 2102 are substantially the same height as the second starting opening 2102. And are arranged in a state in which the upper side is open.

The attacker unit 2100 has a width (width) in which the first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the game balls can be received one by one. ing. In addition, the second starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in a direction in which they are separated from each other and widened to three times the outer shape of the game ball. ~5 times wider. Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening/closing member 2106 is in an open state, which is 5 to 8 times the width of the outer shape of the game ball. That is, in the state where the game balls can be received, the game balls are formed to be easily received in the order of the first starting opening 2101, the general winning opening 2104, the second starting opening 2102, and the special winning opening 2103.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 of the present example has a base plate 2110 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 so as to close the opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and a base plate 2110 having a flat front end, and a base plate 2110. A first receiving member 2111 attached at a position where the first starting port 2101 is arranged and forming the first starting port 2101 and having an open upper side, and a position where the first receiving member 2111 on the base plate 2110 is attached (first starting member). A second receiving member 2112 which is attached to the lower side of the (portion 2101) and rotatably supports a pair of movable pieces 2105, forms a second starting port 2102, and has an open upper side and rear side, and a base plate 2110. And a general receiving member 2113 which is attached to a position where the general winning opening 2104 is arranged, forms the general winning opening 2104, and has an open upper side.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 is supported on the starting plate solenoid 2114, which covers the starting plate solenoid 2114 and the starting plate solenoid 2114, which drives the opening and closing of the pair of movable pieces 2105 arranged on the rear side of the base plate 2110 to open and close the second starting plate 2102. It includes a solenoid cover 2115 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110, and a starting opening decoration substrate 2116 sandwiched between the solenoid cover 2115 and the base plate 2110 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, the attacker unit 2100 is rotatably supported by an opening/closing member 2106 that is attached to the rear side of the special winning opening 2103 of the base plate 2110 and that opens and closes the special winning opening 2103, and can be divided into upper and lower parts. A unit case 2120, an attacker solenoid 2121 supported in the unit case 2120 for opening and closing the opening/closing member 2106, a count sensor 2122 for detecting a game ball received in the special winning opening 2103, and an upper part of the unit case 2120 The general winning a prize sensor 2123 which is supported on the above and is arranged right above the special winning a prize 2103 to detect the game ball received in the general winning a prize 2104, and the unit case 2120 is covered from the rear side and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110. A unit cover 2124, a special winning opening decoration substrate 2125 attached to the rear side of the unit cover 2124 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear side of the unit cover 2124 arranged behind the special winning opening decoration substrate 2125. And an attacker unit relay board 2126 to be attached.

The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape whose front surface extends in the left-right direction, and has a shallow relief-like decoration on the surface. This base plate 2110 has an opening 2110a formed at a position corresponding to the second starting port 2102 and penetrating in the front-rear direction through which a game ball can pass (see FIG. 123). In addition, the base plate 2110 has a gutter portion 2110b extending rearward at a position corresponding to the first starting opening 2101, and the game ball received by the first receiving member 2111 as the first starting opening 2101. Can be delivered to the first passage 3122a of the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, via the guide passage 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115 after being guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1210. ing.

As shown in the figure, the second receiving member 2112 of the attacker unit 2100 has a light-transmitting front surface and is decorated with a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in detail, the second receiving member 2112 includes a pair of shaft portions extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at intervals wider than the left and right widths of the openings 2110a in the base plate 2110. The movable portion 2105 can be pivotally supported by the shaft portion.

In addition, the general receiving member 2113 of the attacker unit 2100 includes a gutter portion 2113a that guides the received game ball toward the rear side of the panel plate 1210.

Although not shown, the starter solenoid 2114 of the attacker unit 2100 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and is biased in a protruding direction by a coil spring, and is below the first starter 2101. A plunger is supported by a base plate 2110 and a solenoid cover 2115 at a position rearward of the second starting port 2102 so as to project forward. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the starting opening solenoid 2114 is energized, the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2114 retracts against the urging force of the coil spring, and a pair of movable pieces is inserted through the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends of 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other, and the second starting port 2102 is opened.

Further, the solenoid cover 2115 of the attacker unit 2100 has a guide path 2115a on the upper surface, the front end side of which is connected to the rear end of the gutter portion 2110b of the base plate and which guides the game ball from the gutter portion 2110b to the right in a front view. ing. The guide path 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115 is received by the first receiving member 2111, is received by the first starting port 2101, and is guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1210 by the gutter portion 2110b of the base plate 2110. When viewed from the front, it can be guided to the right and passed to the first passage 3122a in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. Further, the solenoid cover 2115 is provided with a discharge port 2115b that opens rearward below a portion that supports the starting port solenoid 2114. This discharge port 2115b is in communication with the second start port 2102, and the game ball received in the second start port 2102 is discharged from the discharge port 2115b to the second passage 3122b in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. It can be handed over to.

As shown in FIG. 125, the unit case 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 has a large winning/discharging port 2120a for discharging the game balls received in the special winning port 2103 downward below the panel plate 1210, and a big winning. It is provided with a general discharge port 2120b for discharging the game balls received in the general winning port 2104 arranged immediately above the port 2103 to the lower side behind the panel plate 1210. Further, although not shown, the unit case 2120 has a first passage for guiding the game ball received in the special winning opening 2103 to the rear side of the game panel 1200 and discharging it from the large winning and discharging opening 2120a. It has a second passage for discharging the game ball, which is received by the general winning hole 2104 immediately above the big winning hole 2103 and guided by the ball receiving portion 2124a of the unit cover 2124, from the general discharging port 2120b. As shown in FIG. 126, the unit case 2120 supports the general winning opening sensor 2123 at a position directly below the ball receiving portion 2124a in the unit cover 2124.

Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2121 of the attacker unit 2100 has a plunger that can be moved forward and backward by energization and is biased in a projecting direction by a coil spring, like the starting opening solenoid 2114. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the attacker solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2121 retracts, and the upper end of the opening/closing member 2106 moves relatively forward through the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. As described above, the special winning opening 2103 is opened.

As shown in the figure, the unit cover 2124 of the attacker unit 2100 is received by the general winning opening 2104 and is moved backward by the gutter 2113a immediately after the gutter portion 2113a of the general receiving member 2113 attached immediately above the big winning opening 2103. It is provided with a ball receiving portion 2124a for receiving the guided game ball and guiding it downward.

The starting opening decoration board 2116 of the attacker unit 2100 can lighten and decorate the second starting opening 2102 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Further, the special winning opening decoration substrate 2125 of the attacker unit can light up and decorate the special winning opening 2103 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light. Further, the attacker unit relay board 2126 includes a start opening solenoid 2114, an attacker solenoid 2121, a count sensor 2122, a general winning opening sensor 2123, a panel relay board 3040 (main control board 4100), a starting opening decoration board 2116 and a large winning opening decoration. This is for relaying the connection between the board 2125 and the lamp driving board 3041.

The attacker unit 2100 of this example is in a state in which the first starting opening 2101 can always receive a game ball. On the other hand, in the second starting opening 2102, a pair of movable doors are driven by energizing the starting opening solenoid 2114 according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2301 in the gate unit 2300 described later. The piece 2105 is opened so that it can be received. In addition, in the special winning opening 2103, depending on the special lottery result that is selected by the game balls being received (starting winning) in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (for example, the special lottery result is a “big hit”). When the attacker solenoid 2121 is energized, the opening/closing member 2106 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern so that it can be received.

In this attacker unit 2100, the game balls received in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 are the first passage 3122a and the second passage of the lower unit base 3122 in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. After being received by the 3122b, detected by the first starting port sensor 3131 and the second starting port sensor 3132, it is discharged downward.

In addition, in the attacker unit 2100, the game balls received in the special winning opening 2103 and the general winning opening 2104 immediately above are detected by the count sensor 2122 and the general winning opening sensor 2123 in the unit case 2120, and then the unit case 2120. It is adapted to be discharged downward from the large-inlet/outlet 2120a and the general outlet 2120b on the lower surface.

In the attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2121 is arranged such that the plunger reciprocating direction is the left-right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2121 is arranged at a position as close to the opening/closing member 2106 as possible. Therefore, the size of the attacker unit 2100 in the front-rear direction can be shortened by 5 to 30% as compared with the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured wider.

[2-3. Front side unit]
Subsequently, the table side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 127. 127(a) is a perspective view of the front side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 127(b) is a perspective view of the front side unit as seen from the rear. The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center of the game area 1100 of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 in the left-right direction, and at a position lower than the center of the up-down direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 so as to contact with.

As shown in the figure, the front side unit 2200 of this example is formed in an arc shape along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 as viewed from the front, and two general winning openings 2201 arranged from the center in the left-right direction to the right side. , Two shelves 2202 and 2203 that are arranged on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and are inclined so that the right end side is low when viewed from the front, and a plate shape that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 and closes the opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210. The base 2210 and a trough portion 2211 extending rearward from the rear surface of the base 2210 where the general winning opening 2201 is arranged are provided.

As shown in the figure, the front side unit 2200 is provided with two general winning openings 2201 and shelves 2202 and 2203 on the front surface of the base 2210, and is entirely transparent.

Further, the front side unit 2200, by the two shelves 2202, 2203, the game ball that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 1100 to the center side in the left-right direction in the front view of the game area 1100. It can be guided. In addition, the front side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 to the rear side of the panel plate 1210 by the gutter portion 2211, and the lower unit base in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. It can be delivered to the general passage 3122d of 3122.

[2-4. Gate unit]
Next, the gate unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The gate unit 2300 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1215 formed at a position slightly left from the vertical center on the left side of the horizontal center of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200. Then, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210).

The gate unit 2300 has a gate portion 2301 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a gate sensor 2302 arranged in the gate portion 2301 can detect a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2301. You can do it.

In addition, the gate unit 2300 of this example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction than a conventional gate, and a portion of the gaming panel 1200 on the rear side of the front surface of the panel plate 1210 is the panel plate 1210. It fits within the thickness of the. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2302 extends from the rear surface of the panel plate 1210.

In the gate unit 2300, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the gate sensor 2302 can detect the passage of the game ball, and when the gate sensor 2302 detects the passage of the game ball, it is normal. The lottery result is drawn, and the starting opening solenoid 2114 is driven according to the drawn ordinary drawing result to rotate the pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting opening 2102, and the second starting opening 2102 receives the predetermined time. It has become possible.

[2-5. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 140. 128 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the rear. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the center role object disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the center role thing disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the center accessory receiving unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the center accessory receiving unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the receiving unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the receiving unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 136 is an enlarged front view showing the movement of the receiving unit in the center accessory, and is a view showing a mode in which the game ball is guided to the left route. FIG. 137 is an enlarged front view showing the movement of the receiving unit in the center accessory, and is a view showing a mode in which the game ball is guided to the right route. FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram showing driving of the receiving unit, and FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram showing driving of the movable decorative body of the receiving unit. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the flow of game balls in the receiving unit of the center accessory.

The center accessory 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into an opening 1215 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of a transparent plate-shaped panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and then the panel plate 1210. 114 and the like, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like, a liquid crystal display device 1900 that is arranged in the rear side and penetrates in the front-rear direction in a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 1100 becomes visible. The large window portion 2501 is provided.

This center accessory 2500 has a plate-shaped flange portion 2502 that abuts the front surface of the game panel 1200 on the outer periphery of the window portion 2501, and bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 in the middle of the game area 1100 with a substantial center in the left-right direction as a boundary. The peripheral wall portion 2503 for guiding the flowing down game balls to the left and right and for preventing the game balls from entering the frame is provided. Further, the center character 2500 is opened at the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 located on the front side of the panel plate 1210, and a warp entrance 2504 (FIGS. 116 and 117) into which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter. ), and the warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and the first start port in the attacker unit 2100 after rolling the game ball that is discharged from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction. The stage 2510 is provided at the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501 for discharging/refluxing into the game area 1100 on the upper side of 2101.

The stage 2510 in this center accessory 2500 is supplied with the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 and is also capable of discharging the supplied game ball forward from a predetermined position, and a first stage 2511. The second stage 2512 arranged on the front side of the first stage 2511 and capable of discharging the supplied game ball forward from a predetermined position and the second stage 2512 arranged on the front side of the second stage 2512. From the third stage 2513 and the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511, the left and right sides of the second stage 2512 between the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511. Is provided with the game ball from the third stage 2513 and is capable of discharging the supplied game ball downward, and four fourth stages 2514, which are arranged below the fourth stage 2514. A fifth stage 2515 is provided, which supplies game balls and discharges the game balls forward from a predetermined position to recirculate the game balls into the game area 1100.

In addition, the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is opened at a predetermined position on the first stage 2511 to allow the game ball to enter, and the first chance entrance 2516 is opened at a predetermined position on the second stage 2512 to enter the game ball. The enabled second chance entrance 2517 and the game balls that have entered the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 are recirculated and discharged into the game area 1100, and are opened immediately above the first start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. And a chance exit 2518.

The first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that the left and right ends are the highest, and is formed so that the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction is high, and is a smooth and flat W shape as a whole. The game balls are formed in a wavy shape, and the game balls are discharged forward from the lowest portion on both sides of the raised portion at the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction. Also, the second stage 2512 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the left and right parts of the first stage 2511 that are the lowest and emits the game balls forward, and is gently curved so that the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction becomes low. It is formed in a shape, and the game ball is discharged forward from a predetermined width at the center in the left-right direction.

The third stage 2513 of the stage 2510 has a length in the left-right direction that is substantially the same as that of the first stage 2511, and is formed in a curved shape so that the left and right ends are the highest, and then the left and right sides of the game area 1100. It is formed in a smooth and flat W-shaped wavy shape so that the center in the direction becomes higher, and the lowest parts on the left and right sides of the left part of the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction are the second stage. It is formed so as to be located on the outer side in the left-right direction with respect to 2512. In the third stage 2513, the game balls are discharged backward from the lowest position.

Further, as shown in the figure, the fourth stage 2514 of the stage 2510 is independently arranged on both the left and right sides of the second stage 2512, and is gently tilted so that the side away from the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction becomes lower. In addition, the lowest hole is provided with a drop hole 2514a that opens downward and allows the game ball to pass through. The fourth stage 2514 is designed so that the supplied game balls are discharged downward through the drop holes 2514a.

In addition, the fifth stage 2515 of the stage 2510 has a length in the left-right direction that extends over the drop holes 2514a of the fourth stage 2514 that are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction, and has a curved shape such that the left and right ends are the highest. On the left and right sides of the raised part of the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction, the wavy shape is formed as a whole so that the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction becomes higher. The game ball is designed to be discharged forward (in the game area 1100) from the lowest part of the.

In addition, the first chance entrance 2516 in the stage 2510 is arranged so that the rear half of the front-rear direction is applied to a raised portion in the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 in the first stage 2511. Further, the second chance entrance 2517 is arranged at the lower center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction in the second stage 2512 so as to open to the rear side in the front-rear direction. The first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 are in communication with each other on the lower side of the stage 2510, and are directed from directly under the raised portion in the left-right center of the game area 1100 on the fifth stage 2515 to the front. The game ball is discharged into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2518 opened by the above.

On the stage 2510 of the center character 2500, the game ball supplied through the warp entrance 2504 enters either the first chance entrance 2516 or the second chance entrance 2517 and is discharged from the chance exit 2518 into the game area 1100. Then, since the chance exit 2518 is arranged directly above the first starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, the game ball is accepted to the first starting opening 2101 (the second starting opening 2102 in the open state) with a high probability. (To win).

Although not shown in detail, a groove narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the inner bottom surface of the chance outlet 2518, and the game ball is rectified by this groove. The behavior of the game ball released from the chance exit 2518 can be stabilized by releasing it into the game area 1100.

In this center accessory 2500, substantially the entire stage 2510 is formed of a transparent member, and a sufficient number of game balls for rolling the stages 2511, 2512, 2513, 2514, 2515 formed in a plurality of stages from the player side. You can see it.

Further, as shown in the figure, the third stage 2513 of the center character 2500 has a length in the left-right direction that extends from the left end of the center character 2500 to approximately the same position as the right end of the first stage 2511, and the game. The game ball abuts the obstacle nail that is projected forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1210 of the panel 1200 and is planted in the lower region of the center character 2500 in the game region 1100, and jumps greatly upward. However, it can come in contact with the lower surface side of the third stage 2513 and be repelled downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball jumped by the obstacle nail from entering the window portion 2501 (inside the frame) of the center accessory 2500 and a member for preventing the game ball from entering the window portion 2501. Is arranged below the stage 2510 so that the inside of the stage 2510 and the inside of the window portion 2501 can be easily seen.

Further, the center role object 2500 of this example is a plate-shaped flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and projects forward from the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 2502 and is driven into the game area 1100. Further, there is further provided a transparent frame-shaped center base 2520 having a peripheral wall portion 2503 capable of preventing a game ball from entering the window portion 2501 (inside the frame). The center base 2520 has a rear extending wall 2521 extending rearward from a rear surface on the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 2502. When the center base 2520 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210, the rear extending wall 2521 is a panel. It is adapted to be inserted into the opening 1215 of the plate 1210.

The center base 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a space forming recess 2522, which is open at the front side for forming a receiving space 2530 described later, at a position above the center in the vertical direction in the front view and at the right end. The center accessory 2500 includes a transparent plate-shaped receiving space cover 2525 that closes the open front end side of the space forming recess 2522 in the center base 2520. The receiving space cover 2525 and the space forming recess 2522 receive the space. A space 2530 is formed.

Further, the center accessory 2500 of the present example is arranged at the right end position above the center in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction can enter. At the same time, the game ball that has entered is received from the receiving space 2530 and a receiving space 2530 of a predetermined size that can be released to the outside of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side in the substantially vertical center of the front view and on the right side in front view. A guide passage 2540 that guides and guides the game ball flowing down along the peripheral wall portion 2503 to the upstream side of the special winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball in the receiving space 2530 is basically the right route. It is possible to detect the game ball guided to the right route (right gate 2575L) in the receiving space 2530 by the receiving unit 2550 provided so as to be guided to (right gate 2575R) and the receiving unit 2550 (movable valve 2551). Route detection sensor 2580 (2580R) and receiving unit 2550 (movable valve 2551) to the right route (right gate 2575R) in the receiving space 2530, the game ball that failed to be guided to the left route (left) in the receiving space 2530. It is provided with a route detection sensor 2580 (2580L) which can be detected by the gate 2575L).

Further, the center accessory 2500 is arranged above the receiving space 2530, the upper end side is opened at a predetermined position on the upper right side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 2503, and the lower end side is opened at the upper end of the receiving space 2530 and goes downward. Further, a receiving/entry passage 2545 formed to have a narrower width is further provided, and the game ball enters the receiving space 2530 through the receiving/entry passage 2545.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes ball route suggesting members 2590 which are arranged on both left and right sides of the receiving space 2530 and are formed in a downward arrow shape. This sphere route suggesting member 2590 partially has a light-transmitting property, and can be illuminated and decorated by a decorative substrate arranged on the rear side. By emitting light in accordance with the above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the route along which the game balls in the receiving space 2530 roll.

As described above, the receiving space 2530 in the center accessory 2500 is formed by the space forming recess 2522 whose front side is open in the center base 2520 and the receiving space cover 2525 which closes the front end of the space forming recess 2522. The transparent center base 2520 and the receiving space cover 2525 allow the rear side to be visually recognized well.

The receiving space 2530 includes an upper space 2531 that bulges upward in a semicircular shape, and a lower space 2532 that is arranged below the upper space 2531 and bulges wider in the left-right direction than the upper space 2531. .. In the receiving space 2530, the lower end of the receiving entrance passage 2545 is opened at the center of the upper space 2531 in the left-right direction. Further, in the receiving space 2530, the bottom portion 2533 of the lower space 2532 is inclined so that the right side when viewed from the front is lowered, and the discharge port 2534 opening to the peripheral wall portion 2503 is formed at the right end of the bottom portion 2533 of the lower space 2532. ing.

Further, in the receiving space 2530, the route detection sensors 2580 are arranged in the lower space 2532 while being separated from each other in the left-right direction. Specifically, the two route detection sensors 2580 are distributed in the upper space 2531 to the left and right by the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550 and hang down (on the inner periphery of the upper space 2531 and the cylindrical portion 2551a of the movable valve 2551). They are respectively arranged on an axis that is perpendicular to the circumference passing through the center of the outer circumference.

Further, in the receiving space 2530, a circular opening 2535 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed on the rear wall that defines the rear end of the receiving space 2530 along the inner shape of the upper space 2531 formed in a semicircular shape. ing. The opening 2535 is configured such that a game ball cannot be passed by a disc-shaped rear wall portion 2551c of a movable valve 2551 in a receiving unit 2550, which will be described later.

The guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500 is discharged from the outlet 2534 of the receiving space 2530 to the outer peripheral side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and flows down between the inner periphery of the game area 1100 and the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503. Is guided to the center side in the left-right direction when viewed from the front at a position lower than the stage 2510, and from the outlet 2541 (see FIG. 117) opened upstream of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 to the special winning opening 2103. It can be released to

Note that the flow velocity of the game ball is attenuated by coming into contact with the game ball in the passage between the outlet 2541 of the receiving space 2530 and the guide passage 2540 on the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500. A plurality of ridges 2506 are provided.

Further, as shown in the figure, the receiving/entry passage 2545 in the center accessory 2500 is formed so as to become narrower as it goes downward, and the width of the lower end side is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. The game balls can be sent in a row to the receiving space 2530 below. This receiving approach passage 2545 is formed such that the upper end side of the side wall on the left side in front view which forms the passage is formed continuously from the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2503 downward, while the upper end of the side wall on the right side in front view is a game. It is formed so as to extend to the stop portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A that defines the inner circumference of the region 1100. As a result, all the game balls hit between the upper inner circumference of the game area 1100 and the outer circumference of the right peripheral wall portion 2503 from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the center in the role object 2500 are received in the receiving/entry passage 2545. It is designed to be sent to the receiving space 2530.

The receiving unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500 is provided so that when the game ball is simply launched toward the game area 1100, the game ball is more easily guided to the right route than the left route in the receiving space 2530. Despite this, when a game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 at a specific timing that periodically visits, the cycle is such that the game ball is more likely to be guided to the left route than the right route in the receiving space 2530. A movable valve 2551 that performs a proper operation (here, rotation between two positions), a movable shaft 2552 that extends rearward from the center of rotation of the movable valve 2551 and rotates integrally with the movable valve 2551. A locking member 2553 fixed to the rear end of the shaft 2552 and having a locking piece 2553a at a position eccentric from the shaft center, and rotatably supporting the movable shaft 2552 between the locking member 2553 and the movable valve 2551. A unit base 2554 arranged on the rear side of the receiving space 2530 and a rear side of the unit base 2554 and a lower side of the movable shaft 2552 are slidably supported in a predetermined slide range in the left-right direction, and are substantially centered in the slide range. A locking piece 2555a arranged at a position directly below the movable shaft 2552 when slid, and a slider 2555 having a groove 2555b extending vertically from one end side, a locking piece 2555a of the slider 2555 and a locking member. A connecting spring 2556 which is locked so as to exert an urging force in the direction in which both ends approach each other across the locking piece 2553a of 2553, and a transmission which extends in the front-back direction by sliding in the groove 2555b of the slider 2555. A link member 2557 that has a pin 2557a and is rotatably supported at a position eccentric from the shaft center of the transmission pin 2557a, and the link member 2557 is rotationally driven so that the transmission pin 2557a revolves to the rear surface of the unit base 2554. A receiving drive motor 2558 attached.

As shown in the figure, the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550 has a cylindrical portion 2551a extending in the front-rear direction, a valve portion 2551b protruding radially from the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion 2551a, and a diameter substantially the same as the tip of the valve portion 2551b. And a transparent disc-shaped rear wall portion 2551c attached to the rear side of the cylindrical portion 2551a and the valve portion 2551b. This movable valve 2551 is configured such that the game ball can be rolled in a predetermined direction by the valve portion 2551b, and the game ball cannot pass through the opening 2535 of the receiving space 2530 by the rear wall portion 2551c. It can be closed.

The locking member 2553 of the receiving unit 2550 is formed such that the locking piece 2553a projects rearward from a position eccentric to the axis of the movable shaft 2552. Further, the locking member 2553 is provided with a stopper piece 2553b protruding in a radial direction from a position where the locking piece 2553a is rotated about the axis about 90 degrees with respect to the eccentric direction. In the assembled state, the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 has its tip positioned inside the rotation restricting portion 2554c formed in the U-shape of the unit base 2554. By making contact with the circumferential end portion, the range of rotation of the movable shaft 2552 (movable valve 2551) can be regulated. The stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 is formed so as to become thinner toward the tip as shown in the figure.

The movable valve 2551 and the locking member 2553 of the receiving unit 2550 are such that the position of the locking piece 2553a of the locking member 2553 droops substantially vertically when the valve portion 2551b of the movable valve 2551 rises substantially vertically. The movable shaft 2552 is fixed to the front end and the rear end of the movable shaft 2552 in a non-rotatable state.

The unit base 2554 of the receiving unit 2550 has a cylindrical cylindrical shaft portion 2554a that extends in the front-rear direction in which the movable shaft 2552 is inserted, and a cylindrical shaft portion 2554a that is formed below the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. And a slit 2554b for sliding the slider 2555 in the left-right direction. In the unit base 2554, bearing bushes 2559 are inserted into both ends of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a, and the movable shaft 2552 can be rotatably supported via the bearing bushes 2559. .. Further, two slits 2554b of the unit base 2554 are formed at the same height and separated in the left-right direction.

Further, the unit base 2554 is arranged at a position distant from the axis of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a (movable shaft 2552) in the radial direction by a predetermined amount, extends rearward, and is formed in a substantially U-shape with the axis side open. The rotation restricting portion 2554c is provided (see FIG. 138 and the like). When the receiving unit 2550 is assembled, the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 is inserted and arranged inside the rotation restricting portion 2554c which is formed in a U shape, and the rotation restricting portion 2554c is movable. The stopper piece 2553b comes into contact with the end portion in the circumferential direction around the axis of the shaft 2552 so that the rotation range of the locking member 2553 (movable valve 2551) can be regulated via the stopper piece 2553b. It has become.

Further, the unit base 2554 is provided with a cylindrical support cylinder portion 2554d that extends forward from the cylinder shaft portion 2554a and is shorter than the cylinder shaft portion 2554a. The support cylinder portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 is for rotatably supporting a support pin 2566 described later by bearing bushes 2559 inserted at both ends. The unit base 2554 of the receiving unit 2550 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2520.

The slider 2555 of the receiving unit 2550 includes a strip-shaped main body portion 2555c extending from the vertical center of a groove 2555b extending in the vertical direction to one side in the left-right direction (left side in front view). A locking piece 2555a extends rearward from the position. Further, the slider 2555 includes a cylindrical protrusion 2555d that protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body portion 2555c extending in the left-right direction and is slidably inserted into the two slits 2554b of the unit base 2554. By inserting the two protrusions 2555d into the two slits 2554b of the unit base 2554, the slider 2555 is supported slidably in the left-right direction within a predetermined sliding range guided by the slits 2554b. ing.

The two protrusions 2555d of the slider 2555 penetrate the slit 2554b and extend to the front surface side of the unit base 2554, and connect the tips of the protrusions 2555d extending to the front surface of the unit base 2554. By attaching the receiving plate 2560 as described above, the receiving plate 2560 is prevented from coming off from the slit 2554b.

The slider 2555 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 2555e extending downward from the lower surface between the locking piece 2555a and the groove 2555b in the main body 2555c, and a groove 2555b sandwiching the locking piece 2555a in the main body 2555c. Has a rack gear 2555f formed on the upper surface on the opposite side. The detection piece 2555e of the slider 2555 is adapted to be detected by the movable valve position detection sensor 2561 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2554. When the detection piece 2555e is detected, the detection piece 2555e is detected via the slide position of the slider 2555. The movable direction of the game ball by the movable valve 2551 can be detected. The rack gear 2555f of the slider 2555 is adapted to mesh with a first gear portion 2562a of a first transmission gear 2562 which will be described later, and transmits the movement of the slider 2555 to the movable upper decorative body 2565 and the movable lower decorative body 2567. It can be moved.

The receiving unit 2550 is rotatably supported at a position above the slider 2555 on the rear side of the unit base 2554, and has a fan-shaped first gear portion 2562a and a first gear portion 2562a which mesh with the rack gear 2555f of the slider 2555. On the rear side of the unit base 2554 which meshes with a first transmission gear 2562 having a spur gear-shaped second gear portion 2562b that is integrally rotatable with a smaller diameter than the second transmission portion 2562b of the first transmission gear 2562. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 2563 that is rotatably supported, a driven gear portion 2564a that meshes with the second transmission gear 2563, and a driven gear portion 2564a are formed on the outer periphery and the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a of the unit base 2554 is formed. A cylindrical insertion portion 2564b that is rotatably inserted into the outer periphery, an operating piece 2564c that extends in a plate shape from the insertion portion 2564b to the upper side in the radial direction, and a distal end of the operating piece 2564c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the radial direction. And a driven transmission member 2564 having two attachment portions 2564e extending downward in the radial direction from the insertion portion 2564b.

In addition, the receiving unit 2550 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2564d of the driven transmission member 2564 and is slidably extended to the rear, and the sliding pin 2565a is disposed at a different position above the sliding pin 2565a and extends rearward. A movable upper decoration 2565 which has a projecting shaft fixing portion 2565b and is arranged between the movable valve 2551 and the unit base 2554 and three-dimensionally imitates a part of a predetermined character, and the axial fixing of the movable upper decoration 2565. The tip side is fixed to the portion 2565b, the support pin 2566 is inserted into the support cylindrical portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 and is rotatably supported via the bearing bush 2559, and is disposed below the movable upper decoration body 2565. In addition, an attachment portion 2564e of the driven transmission member 2564 is attached to the rear side, and a movable lower decoration body 2567 that three-dimensionally imitates a portion different from the movable upper decoration body 2565 in a predetermined character is provided.

Further, the receiving unit 2550 has a plurality of openings 2568a through which the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a of the unit base 2554, the support cylindrical portion 2554d, etc. can pass, and the outer shape is a three-dimensional predetermined shape and part of which has translucency. Between the rear decorative body 2568 and the unit base 2554, and the rear decorative body 2568 that is formed as described above and is attached to the front side of the unit base 2554 behind the movable upper decorative body 2565 and the movable lower decorative body 2567. A decoration substrate 2569 that is arranged and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to decorate the back decoration body 2568 with light emission, a reception drive motor 2558 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2554, a movable valve position detection sensor 2561, and a route detection sensor. 2580 and a relay board 2570 that relays the connection between the panel relay board 3040.

The first transmission gear 2562 and the second transmission gear 2563 of the receiving unit 2550 are rotatably supported by a cylindrical shaft portion extending rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2554, and the first transmission gear 2562 of The second gear portion 2562b and the second transmission gear 2563 are housed in a concave portion that is recessed forward from the rear surface side of the unit base 2554. An opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in a recess for accommodating the second transmission gear 2563 and the like in the unit base 2554, and a part of the second transmission gear 2563 is formed in the front side of the unit base 2554 through the opening. It is designed to be exposed. The second transmission gear 2563 is adapted to mesh with a driven gear portion 2564a of a driven transmission member 2564 rotatably supported by the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a at a portion exposed to the front surface side of the unit base 2554.

In the receiving unit 2550, the movable upper decoration body 2565 is three-dimensionally modeled after the head of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the movable lower decoration body 2567 is a movable upper decoration body. It is three-dimensionally modeled like the arm of the same character as 2565. As shown in the figure, the movable lower decoration 2567 is formed with a broom on the arm. Further, the back decoration 2568 of the receiving unit 2550 has a relief-like portion on the front side except the head and arms of the same character as the movable upper decoration 2565 and the movable lower decoration 2567. As a result, when the receiving unit 2550 is assembled and viewed from the front, the movable upper decorative body 2565, the movable lower decorative body 2567, and the rear decorative body 2568 form a full body image of a predetermined character with a broom. The whole body image of a predetermined character can be viewed from the player side through the transparent center base 2520 and the receiving space cover 2525.

Next, the movement of the receiving unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. First, the movement of the movable valve 2551 arranged in the receiving space 2530 will be described. When the receiving drive motor 2558 is driven to rotate the link member 2557, the transmission pin 2557a of the link member 2557 revolves around the rotation axis of the receiving drive motor 2558 with a predetermined radius. The transmission pin 2557a of the link member 2557 is slidably inserted into a vertically extending groove 2555b of a slider 2555 that is slidably supported in the left-right direction, and the transmission pin 2557a revolves to revolve. Since the vertical and horizontal relative positions of the 2557a change, the transmission pin 2557a revolves so that the transmission pin 2557a slides in the groove 2555b of the slider 2555 in the vertical direction, and at the same time, the slider 2555 is guided to the slit 2554b of the unit base 2554. It will be slid to the left and right.

When the slider 2555 slides in the left/right direction, the locking piece 2555a of the slider 2555 also slides in the left/right direction, and slides in the left/right direction within the same range as the revolution diameter of the transmission pin 2557a. .. The locking piece 2555a of the slider 2555 is formed such that the approximate center of the horizontal sliding range of the locking piece 2555a is located on a vertical line passing through the axial center of the movable shaft 2552. By sliding to, the locking piece 2555a moves leftward or rightward beyond a vertical line passing through the axis of the movable shaft 2552.

In this receiving unit 2550, the lower end side of the connecting spring 2556 is locked to the locking piece 2555a of the slider 2555, and the upper end of the connecting spring 2556 is engaged with the locking member 2553 fixed to the rear end of the movable shaft 2552. When the slider 2555 (locking piece 2555a) is locked in the stop piece 2553a and slides in the left-right direction, the locking piece 2553a of the locking member 2553 is pulled in the sliding direction of the slider 2555 via the connecting spring 2556. The locking member 2553 (movable shaft 2552) is rotated. Then, the movable valve 2551 fixed to the front end of the movable shaft 2552 is also rotated by the driving of the receiving drive motor 2558.

In the receiving unit 2550, since the locking member 2553 and the slider 2555 are elastically connected by the connecting spring 2556, the game ball that enters the receiving space 2530 while the movable valve 2551 is rotating is the receiving space 2530. Even if it is attempted to be sandwiched between the inner wall and the valve portion 2551b of the movable valve 2551, expansion and contraction of the connecting spring 2556 allows the valve portion 2551b to rotate in a direction away from the game ball. Therefore, even when the movable valve 2551 is rotating and the game ball cannot enter the receiving space 2530 by the valve portion 2551b, the biasing force of the connecting spring 2556 is generated by the momentum of the game ball depending on the timing at which the game ball flows down. In addition to being able to push the valve portion 2551b against and to allow the game ball to enter the receiving space 2530, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught at the entrance of the receiving space 2530, resulting in ball clogging. It is possible to prevent it.

In this example, when the slider 2555 is slid to the left in rear view, the movable shaft 2552 (movable valve 2551) rotates counterclockwise in rear view (see FIG. 138(a)). In the receiving space 2530, the game ball can be rolled to the left in the front view by the movable valve 2551 (see FIG. 136). On the other hand, when the slider 2555 is slid to the right in the rear view, the movable shaft 2552 (movable valve 2551) rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view (see FIG. 138(b)), and within the receiving space 2530. The game ball can be rolled to the right in the front view by the movable valve 2551 (see FIG. 137). Further, in this example, when the slider 2555 slides to the right slide end in rear view, the detection piece 2555e of the slider 2555 is detected by the movable valve position detection sensor 2561.

By the way, the locking member 2553 fixed to the rear end of the movable shaft 2552 is provided with a stopper piece 2553b capable of contacting a rotation restricting portion 2554c formed on the rear surface of the unit base 2554. The piece 2553b comes into contact with the circumferential end of the rotation restricting portion 2554c formed in a substantially U-shape so that the rotation range of the movable shaft 2552 (movable valve 2551) can be restricted. .. As a result, even if the game ball comes into contact with the valve portion 2551b of the movable valve 2551, the valve portion 2551b can be prevented from rotating downward, and the movable valve 2551 surely rolls the game ball in a predetermined direction. It can be moved. Further, as shown in the figure, the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 is formed so as to become thinner toward the tip, and since it can exert an elastic force when it comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 2554c, The impact generated when the game ball abuts the valve portion 2551b of the movable valve 2551 can be alleviated by the elastic force of the stopper piece 2553b, and the valve portion 2551b and the like can be prevented from being damaged by the impact. It has become.

Next, the movement of the movable upper decorative body 2565 and the movable lower decorative body 2567 arranged on the rear side of the receiving space 2530 will be described. As described above, the receiving unit 2550 can slide the slider 2555 in the left-right direction by rotating the receiving drive motor 2558. In the receiving unit 2550 of this example, the slider 2555 is provided with a rack gear 2555f on the tip side of the locking piece 2555a, and a first gear portion 2562a meshed with the rack gear 2555f by sliding the slider 2555 in the left-right direction. The transmission gear 2562 is adapted to rotate.

When the first transmission gear 2562 rotates, the second transmission gear 2563 meshed with the second gear portion 2562b of the first transmission gear 2562 rotates in the opposite direction, and further, the driven gear meshed with the second transmission gear 25563. The driven transmission member 2564 having the portion 2564a rotates in the same direction as the first transmission gear 2562. A movable lower decoration 2567 is attached to the front surface of the driven transmission member 2564 so that the movable lower decoration 2567 can rotate in the same direction as the driven transmission member 2564 and the first transmission gear 2562. ..

On the other hand, a movable upper decoration rotatably supported by a support cylindrical portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 through a support pin 2566 in a transmission slit 2564d of a long hole extending in the radial direction in the driven transmission member 2564. A sliding pin 2565a that extends long rearward in the body 2565 is slidably inserted. The sliding pin 2565a of the movable upper decoration body 2565 is disposed between the rotation axis of the driven transmission member 2564 and the rotation axis of the movable upper decoration body 2565, and the driven transmission member 2564 transmits the transmission slit 2564d. When it is rotated along with, the movable upper decorative body 2565 is rotated in the opposite direction to the driven transmission member 2564 via the support pin 2566 inserted in the transmission slit 2564d.

Therefore, when the receiving drive motor 2558 of the receiving unit 2550 is rotationally driven to slide the slider 2555 in the left-right direction, the movable upper decorative body 2565 and the movable lower decorative body 2567 can be rotated in mutually different directions. Is becoming As a result, when viewed from the front, the predetermined character can show the player a motion (moving effect) such as waving a broom while tilting his head.

In addition, in this example, when the slider 2555 is slid to the left in the rear view, the movable upper decoration body 2565 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view and the movable lower decoration body 2567 moves in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view. It rotates in the direction (see FIG. 139(a)). Further, when the slider 2555 is slid to the right in the rear view, the movable upper decoration 2565 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view and the movable lower decoration 2567 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view. (See FIG. 139(b)).

Further, the receiving unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is in a state where the movable valve 2551 rolls the game ball to the left in a front view, and the movable upper decoration body 2565 is substantially straight up. At the same time, the movable lower decoration 2567 is in a state in which its broom is positioned behind the left route detection sensor 2580L (see FIG. 136). On the other hand, in the state where the movable valve 2551 rolls the game ball to the right when viewed from the front, the movable upper decorative body 2565 is tilted to the right and the movable lower decorative body 2567 has its broom on the right side. The route detection sensor 2580R is located behind (see FIG. 137). As a result, not only the direction of the rotational position of the valve portion 2551b of the movable valve 2551 but also the direction in which the game ball rolls by the broom of the movable lower decoration 2567 arranged on the rear side of the receiving space 2530 In addition to being able to recognize it, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the rolling destination of the game ball was determined by the broom of the movable lower decorative body 2567. ..

Next, the movement of the game ball by the receiving unit 2550 in the receiving space 2530 of the center accessory 2500 will be described. The game ball is entered in the game area 1100 so as to enter the receiving space 2530 between the upper right side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner circumference of the game area 1100. It can be made to enter through the receiving entrance passage 2545 by hitting. A rotatable movable valve 2551 having a valve portion 2551b is arranged above the receiving space 2530 where the lower end of the receiving entrance passage 2545 opens. This movable valve 2551 is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, about 17 seconds) in a mode (a mode shown in FIG. 137) in which the game ball is guided to the right route in the receiving space 2530, and is rotated when this predetermined time elapses. However, the game ball is guided to the left route in the receiving space 2530 (a mode shown in FIG. 136) for a short time (about 3 seconds), and when this short time elapses, the receiving space 2530 is restarted. Rotate so that the game ball is guided to the right side route. The movable valve 2551 repeats such an operation in the same pattern. Here, when the game balls are continuously fired, the number of game balls fired per minute is about 100, so the movable valve 2551 guides the game ball to the right route in the receiving space 2530. If the game is stopped for 17 seconds in this mode, 28 to 29 game balls can be shot during this period. Further, when the movable valve 2551 is stopped for 3 seconds in a mode in which the game ball is guided to the left route in the receiving space 2530, about 4 to 5 game balls can be shot during this period. Therefore, when the game ball is simply shot without aiming at the left side route or the right side route, the game ball is guided to the right side route with a higher possibility than the left side route. On the other hand, when the player shoots the game ball aiming at the timing of the movable valve 2551 being stopped for 3 seconds in the manner that the game ball is guided to the left route in the receiving space 2530, the game ball is the right route. The game ball will be guided to the left route with a higher possibility.

When the valve portion 2551b of the movable valve 2551 rises substantially vertically (see FIG. 114, etc.), the center accessory 2500 is in a state where the valve portion 2551b is located at the lower end of the receiving/introducing passage 2545, and the receiving/incoming The game ball cannot enter the receiving space 2530 from the passage 2545. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the movable valve 2551 in this state, it cannot enter the receiving space 2530, and is temporarily stopped at the lower end of the receiving/entry passage 2545.

The game ball that is to be rolled on either the left side route or the right side route in the receiving space 2530 by the valve portion 2551b of the movable valve 2551 is a gate 2575 (left gate) provided in each of those routes. 2575L, right gate 2575R), it is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, 2580R, it is detected which route (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) the game ball is rolling. You can do it.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 140 and the like, the two route detection sensors 2580 are arranged substantially at the center in the up-down direction of the lower space 2532 in the receiving space 2530 and apart from the center in the left-right direction. Therefore, a space through which the game ball can pass is formed between the two route detection sensors 2580 and outside the two route detection sensors 2580 in the left-right direction. As a result, when the game ball cannot pass through the route detection sensor 2580 for some reason, the game ball can be passed down the side of the route detection sensor 2580 to the bottom portion 2533 and discharged from the discharge port 2534. It is possible to prevent the game ball from staying in the space 2530 and causing ball clogging.

In this example, which of the two gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) arranged on the left and right is passed by the game ball is detected, and as described later, the jackpot described later according to the destination. I try to make the shapes different. For example, when detected by the route detection sensor 2580R, it is determined to be a jackpot game mode (9 rounds) in which a certain amount (amount of prize balls obtainable in 9 rounds) can be expected to be paid out. When it is detected, the jackpot game mode (3 rounds, 6 rounds) in which only a prize ball amount below a certain amount (a prize ball amount less than the prize ball amount that can be obtained in 9 rounds) is paid out, and above a certain amount The amount of prize balls (the amount of prize balls that exceeds the amount of prize balls that can be obtained in 9 rounds) is determined by a lottery as one of the jackpot game modes (12 rounds, 15 rounds). In this way, by measuring the driving timing of the game ball in accordance with the movement of the movable valve 2551 which operates cyclically, it is possible to cause the desired route detection sensor 2580 to play the game so that the game ball is detected. You can do it. However, as will be described later in detail, even if the player shoots a game ball aiming at the timing when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (detected by the route detection sensor 2580L), the game ball will hit the left gate 2575L. If even one ball passes through the right gate 2575R before passing, even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L after that, the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580L is invalidated ( Similarly, if even one ball passes the left gate 2575L before the game ball passes the right gate 2575R, even if the game ball passes the right gate 2575R after that, the game by the route detection sensor 2580R Sphere detection will be disabled). Therefore, if the player shoots the game ball aiming at the game ball passing through the left gate 2575L, the possibility that the game ball will pass through the left gate 2575L becomes higher than that when the player does not aim, but even a little. If the timing is wrong, the game ball may pass through the right gate 2575R without necessarily passing through the left gate 2575L.

Here, the mode of the jackpot game in which the amount of prize balls exceeding a certain amount can be paid out is a certain amount (for example, when a jackpot game of 9 rounds is executed, like a jackpot game of 15 rounds described later). It corresponds to a mode of a jackpot game in which prize balls exceeding the amount of winning prize balls are paid out. That is, in a pachinko gaming machine, the average value (average profit) of the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game based on the prescribed probability such as the probability of winning in the jackpot lottery or the probability of continuing the high probability state. Or the amount of prize balls to be paid out in a jackpot game executed based on one initial jackpot (that is, the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one or a plurality of jackpot games executed until the continuation of the high probability state ends. The average value of) is set. The aspect of the jackpot game in which the fixed amount of prize balls is paid out corresponds to the aspect of the jackpot game in which the player can be expected to be given the average profit calculated based on the specified probability.

Further, in this example, since the discharge port 2534 for discharging the game ball from the receiving space 2530 is arranged in the lower right corner of the receiving space 2530 in a front view, it is possible to roll to the left by the movable valve 2551. The game sphere that has become a roll and the game sphere that has rolled to the right have different times to stay in the receiving space 2530. Therefore, in the two game balls that are continuously driven into the game area 1100, the game ball that is driven first comes to roll to the left by the movable valve 2551 and the game ball that is driven later is moved to the right by the movable valve 2551. When two game balls are hit at such a timing as to roll in the direction, the game ball hit later in the receiving space 2530 catches up with the game ball hit first, and the two game balls are substantially aligned. In this state, it can be discharged from the discharge port 2534 (see FIG. 140). As a result, the game balls discharged side by side from the receiving space 2530 are discharged in a state of being lined up on the upstream side of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. The balls can be accepted, and more game balls can be accepted into the special winning opening 2103.

Specifically, for example, in a jackpot game in which the special winning opening 2103 can be accepted, opening and closing of the special winning opening 2103 is performed depending on the elapsed time of the open state or the number of accepted game balls, When a predetermined number of game balls are received within the time, the special winning opening 2103 is closed. In this special winning opening 2103, there is a time lag between when the game ball passes through the opening of the special winning opening 2103 and when it is detected by the count sensor 2122, so a short time before the special winning opening 2103 is closed. If it is possible to enter the game balls into the special winning opening 2103, it is possible to win more than a predetermined number of game balls, but the rolling of the normal game balls does not reduce the interval between the game balls so much. It was difficult to enter multiple game balls. However, as described above, since the game balls can be discharged to the special winning opening 2103 side in a substantially aligned state by the receiving space 2530 and the movable valve 2551, two game balls are played at the moment when the special winning opening 2103 is closed. It is possible to enter the special winning opening 2103, and it is possible to win more game balls than a predetermined number.

Although detailed description of the center accessory 2500 is omitted, a decoration member that is formed in a predetermined shape at a proper position to decorate the center accessory 2500 and a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are three-dimensional. In addition to being equipped with a character body imitating the above, a decorative member and a decorative substrate having a plurality of LEDs are provided on the rear side of the character body, so that the decorative member can be appropriately illuminated and decorated. There is. The center accessory 2500 has an opaque decoration member for decorating the rear side of the stage 2510, and the under side effect unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the player side in a normal state. There is no such thing.

Further, the center accessory 2500 of this example has a shape in which the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side of the substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component member 1110A). In the state of being attached to the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed along the outer periphery of the right peripheral wall portion 2503 in the center accessory 2500. It is possible to easily hit the game ball into the receiving space 2530 through the receiving/entry passage 2545 by right-handing, and the game ball is received with a high probability in the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. It is designed to be used. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1210, an area having a predetermined width is formed on the left outer circumference of the center accessory 2500 with the inner circumference of the game area 1100. ..

[2-6. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. Further, FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into the main constituent members and seen from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into the main constituent members and seen from the rear. is there.

The back unit 3000 of this example is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) and the front side is opened, and the rear wall 3010a has an opening 3010b penetrating in the front-rear direction facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The formed back box 3010, the back front decoration unit 3100 arranged near the front end in the back box 3010, the back production unit 3200 arranged above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 The lower back production unit 3400 arranged below the opening 3010b, and the lower right back production unit arranged between the lower back production unit 3400 and the front front decoration unit 3100 at the lower right corner of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. 3600 is mainly provided.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a decorative seal 3030 attached to the lower edge of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and the front surface of both left and right edges, and a back surface of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010b. A panel relay board 3040 attached to the lower right corner of the view, a lamp drive board 3041 attached to the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 on the left side in rear view of the opening 3010b, and a lamp drive board 3041 that covers the lamp drive board 3041 from the rear side of the back box 3010. A substrate cover 3042 attached to the rear surface and a motor drive substrate 3045 (see FIG. 188) rotatably supported around an axis extending in the left-right direction at positions on both sides of the lower side of the opening 3010b in the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 (see FIG. 188). ) Is housed in a horizontally long motor drive board box 3043, and a shield plate 3044 made of a metal plate is attached to the upper rear side of the back box 3010.

The panel relay board 3040 in the back unit 3000 is a connection between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, and a general winning hole sensor 2123, a count sensor 2122, a gate sensor 2302 provided on the main control board 4100 and the game board 4, It is for relaying the connection with the starting port solenoid 2114, the attacker solenoid 2121 and the like.

The lamp drive board 3041 in the back unit 3000 is based on a control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and each of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430 provided on the door frame 5. , 432, etc., and the light emission of the LEDs mounted on the respective decorative boards 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546 etc. provided on the game board 4. Is for controlling.

In addition, the motor drive board 3045 in the back unit 3000 is based on a control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 and each drive motor provided in the game board 4. 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 and the like, and controls the drive of each solenoid and the like.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape with its front side opened, and a rear wall 3010a having a substantially rectangular opening 3010b penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 3010b of the back box 3010 is formed smaller than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when viewed from the front. The back box 3010 is formed with a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c extending outward from the outer periphery of the front end, and the fixing portion 3010c is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220). .. Although detailed description is omitted, in the back box 3010, mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the units 3100, 3200, 3400, 3600, boards, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d that is recessed toward the front in the same size as the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the outer periphery of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a, and a rear view of the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. The liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e formed on the left side and into which the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted, and the liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e are formed on the opposite side (right side in rear view) of the liquid crystal inserting portion 3010d, and the locking mechanism 3050 is formed. And a lock mechanism mounting portion 3010f to which is mounted. In this back box 3010, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d from the rear side, and the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a inside the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d is a flat surface. The front surface of the display device 1900 abuts.

The back unit 3000 also includes a lock mechanism 3050 on the back surface of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 for removably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900. The lock mechanism 3050 of this example is configured to be slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the lock mechanism attachment portion 3010f of the back box 3010. When the lock mechanism 3050 is slid upward, the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is moved backward. When an insertion opening that can be inserted from the side is opened, and the locking piece 3090 is slid upward after inserting the fixing piece 1902 from the insertion opening, the rear end of the insertion opening is closed and the fixing piece 1902 does not come off. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked.

[2-7. Back front decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. FIG. 145(a) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 145(b) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit of the back unit as seen from the rear. Also, FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back front decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the back front decoration unit disassembled and seen from the back.

In the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 of this example, a predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is formed on the front side, and the entire shape in front view is formed in a substantially L shape. The front end portion of the back box 3010 is attached along the left side and the lower side in front view. This back front decoration unit 3100 can be seen from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and mainly decorates the rear side of the area in the game area 1100 where obstacle nails are planted. doing.

This back front decoration unit 3100 is arranged on the left side of the front view opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and extends in the up-down direction. A lower front front decoration unit 3120 arranged on the lower side and extending in the left-right direction, and a function display unit 1180 attached to the lower front surface of the rear front left decoration unit 3110 are provided. The back front left decoration unit 3110 and the back front lower decoration unit 3120 are logo lens members formed so that a predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is three-dimensionally formed and partially translucent. 3111 and 3121, and a left unit base 3112 and a lower unit base 3122 that support the rear side of the logo lens members 3111 and 3121 and are attached to the back box 3010.

The back front left decoration unit 3110 is arranged between the upper part of the logo lens member 3121 and the left unit base 3112, and the back front upper left decoration board 3113 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and the back front upper left decoration board 3113 below. The front front left middle decoration board 3114 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, which is disposed between the logo lens member 3121 and the left unit base 3112, and the logo lens member 3121 below the back front left middle decoration board 3114. And a left front base substrate 3112 and a front left decoration substrate 3115 on the front surface of which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The back-front left decoration unit 3110 appropriately emits light from the LEDs mounted on the back-front left upper decoration board 3113, the back-front left middle decoration board 3114, and the back-front left decoration board 3115 to cause the logo lens member 3121 to emit light. It can be done.

The lower back front decoration unit 3120 is arranged between the logo lens member 3121 and the lower unit base 3122 on the left side from substantially the center in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front front lower left decoration board 3123 and a logo. A back front lower right decorative substrate 3124 is provided between the lens member 3121 and the lower unit base 3122 on the right side from substantially the center in the left-right direction, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. In this lower back front decoration unit 3120, the LEDs mounted on the lower front back left decoration board 3123 and the lower right back decoration board 3124 are made to emit light appropriately, so that the logo lens member 3121 can be illuminated and decorated. ing.

The lower unit base 3122 of the lower front lower decoration unit 3120 receives, on the front surface side, the game ball that is received by the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 and is induced and discharged from the guide path 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115. And a first passage 3122a that guides downward, a second passage 3122b that receives the game ball discharged from the discharge port 2115b of the solenoid cover 2115 that is received by the second starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 and guides downward, Ball receiving portion 3122c that receives the game balls that are received in the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and that is released from the gutter portion 2113a of the general receiving member 2113, and the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200 that is received in the gutter portion 2211. It is provided with a general passage 3122d that receives the game balls emitted from the and guides them downward.

In addition, the lower front lower decoration unit 3120 detects a game ball rolling in the first passage 3122a to detect acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2101, and a second start port sensor 3131. A second starting port sensor 3132 that detects acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2102 by detecting the game ball rolling in the passage 3122b, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 3122c, and a general passage. The general winning a prize sensor 3233 which detects acceptance of the game sphere into general winning a prize mouth 2104,2201 by detecting the game sphere which rolls inside 3122d, is provided. The game sphere received by the ball receiving portion 3122c and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3133 is discharged downward through the general winning opening sensor 3133.

Further, the back front lower decoration unit 3120 is further provided with a magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the lower unit base 3122 at a position corresponding to the rear side of the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 and capable of detecting magnetism. The magnetic detection sensor 3134 can detect magnetism acting near the attacker unit 2100, and can detect fraudulent activity using a magnet or the like. In this example, the magnetic detection sensor 3134 is also provided at a position on the upper rear side of the function display unit 1180 in the back front left decoration unit 3110, and the magnetic detection sensor 3134 is provided to the gate unit 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and the center accessory 2500. The magnetism acting near the warp entrance 2504 can be detected to prevent fraudulent activity.

Also, the back front lower decoration unit 3120 is attached to the front side of the lower unit base 3122, and properly closes the front sides of the first passage 3122a, the second passage 3122b, and the general passage 3122d to prevent the game ball from falling off. A passage cover 3125 is provided.

The function display unit 1180 in the back front decoration unit 3100 has a shallow box-shaped function display front cover whose outer shape is formed in a shape imitating a building and which has a plurality of through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction and whose rear side is open. A function display board 1191 that is inserted into the function display front cover from the rear side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a function display rear cover that covers the rear surface of the function display board 1191 and is attached to the back side of the function display front cover, Equipped with. Each LED mounted on the function display board 1191 faces the player side through each through hole of the function display front cover 3141.

Each LED mounted on the front surface of the function display board 1191 in the function display unit 1180 has a gaming state indicator 1183, a first special symbol memory display 1184, a first special symbol display 1185, and a second special, as described above. The symbol display device 1186, the second special symbol memory display device 1187, the normal symbol memory display device 1188, the normal symbol display device 1189, and the round display device 1190.

Specifically, the game status indicator 1183 is composed of one LED, and is for displaying a game status that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 1100. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 is made up of two LEDs and is for displaying the number of holdings regarding the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101. The first special symbol display 1185 is composed of eight LEDs, and is for displaying the first special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2101 as the first special symbol. Further, the second special symbol display device 1186 is made up of eight LEDs and is for displaying the second special lottery result selected by the receipt of the game balls into the second starting opening 2102 as the second special symbol. The second special symbol memory display 1187 is made up of two LEDs, and is for displaying the number of holdings regarding the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102.

Furthermore, the normal symbol storage display 1188 is made up of four LEDs and is for displaying the number of reservations regarding the passage of the gate portion 2301 by the game ball. Further, the normal symbol display device 1189 is made up of one LED, and is for displaying the ordinary lottery result selected by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2301 as a normal symbol. Further, the round indicator 1190 is composed of two LEDs and is for displaying the number of times (the number of rounds) the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit". Is.

[2-8. Back production unit]
Next, the back production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 162. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled into main units and seen from the front, and FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the rear production unit disassembled into main units and seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the back center unit of the back production unit seen from the front, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the back center unit of the back production unit seen from the rear, and FIG. 154 is a back view. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the upper center unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper center unit as seen from the rear of the military officer Ishite. In addition, FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram showing the attachment and detachment of the second lifting decorative body in the back upper center unit. Further, FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the back side unit of the back effect unit disassembled as seen from the front, and FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the back side unit of the back effect unit disassembled as seen from the rear. It is a figure. 159 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back center unit in the back production unit, FIG. 160 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back center unit following FIG. 159, and FIG. 161 is for FIG. 161. It is a front view explaining movement of the back upper center unit following. Further, FIG. 162 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back upper side unit in the back upper effect unit.

The back production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is mounted above the opening 3010b between the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010. The back production unit 3200 includes a back center unit 3210 arranged substantially at the center in the left-right direction, a back side unit 3300 arranged on both left and right sides of the back center unit 3210, a back center unit 3210, and a back center unit 3210. And a back lens member 3202 attached so as to project forward from the front surface of the back upper side unit 3300.

Further, although the back side effect unit 3200 will be described later in detail, the back side center unit 3210 can be slid (moved up and down) to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and can display a predetermined effect image. A liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided.

First, the back center unit 3210 in the back production unit 3200 will be described. The back upper center unit 3210 of the present example is supported by a back upper center base 3212 attached at a predetermined position in the back box 3010 and a front side of the back upper center base 3212 so as to be separated in the left-right direction and extend in the up-down direction. A pair of cylindrical first shafts 3214, a plate-shaped main body 3216a supported by the pair of first shafts 3214 so as to be able to move up and down, mounting portions 3216b extending forward from the left and right ends of the main body 3216a, and a rear surface. And a first slide base 3216 having rack gears 3216c extending in the vertical direction at both left and right ends of the.

Further, the back upper center unit 3210 is attached to the attachment portion 3216b of the first slide base 3216, and a first elevating decorative body 3218 that three-dimensionally imitates a part of the face (above the upper jaw) of a predetermined character, A pair of pinion gears 3220 arranged on the rear side of the back upper center base 3212 and meshing with a rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216 and supported on the rear side of the back upper center base 3212 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. , A pair of transmission gears 3222 that mesh with the respective pinion gears 3220, a coupling shaft 3224 that couples the respective transmission gears 3222 so that they can rotate integrally, and a drive gear 3226 that meshes with one of the transmission gears 3222 (right side in front view). , A back first drive motor 3228 that rotationally drives the drive gear 3226.

The back upper center unit 3210 also includes a center cover 3230 attached to the rear side of the back upper center base 3212. The center cover 3230 rotatably supports a pair of pinion gears 3220 and a connecting shaft 3224. Further, a back upper first drive motor 3228 is attached to the rear surface of the back upper center cover 3230 via a motor bracket 3232.

In addition, the back upper center unit 3210 has a back upper second drive motor 3234 attached to the rear surface of the center cover 3230 so that the rotary shaft projects toward the front surface of the center cover 3230, and a back upper second drive motor 3234. A fixed drive gear 3236, a driven gear portion 3238a that meshes with the drive gear 3236, and a transmission gear portion 3238b that rotates integrally with the driven gear portion 3238a and that has a larger diameter than the driven gear portion 3238a and has gear teeth arranged in an outer periphery. , And a first connecting pin 3238c projecting forward from a position slightly inside the transmission gear portion 3238b, and between the center cover 3230 and the back center center 3212, the center cover 3230 extends around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A first gear member 3238, which is rotatably supported, and an operating gear portion that meshes with a transmission gear portion 3238b of the first gear member 3238 and has the same diameter as the transmission gear portion 3238b and has a plurality of gear teeth arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. 3240a, a second gear rotatably supported by the center cover 3230, having a second connecting pin 3240b projecting forward from a position having the same radius as the revolution radius of the first connecting pin 3238c slightly inside the operating gear portion 3240a. And a member 3240.

The first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 of the back upper center unit 3210 are rotatably supported at substantially the same height, and the transmission gear is located at a position substantially centrally in the left-right direction of the back upper center unit 3210. The portion 3238b and the operating gear portion 3240a are arranged and supported by the center cover 3230 so as to mesh with each other. Further, in the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240, the respective first connecting pins 3238c and the second connecting pins 3240b are vertical passing through the centers of the rotation centers of the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240. The transmission gear portion 3238b and the operation gear portion 3240a are meshed with each other so as to be symmetrical with respect to the line.

Further, in the back center unit 3210, the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b of the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 are slidably inserted and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction. A drive slide 3242 which has a pair of slits 3242a and is slidably supported in the vertical direction between the back center base 3212 and the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240, and the left and right ends of the drive slide 3242. And a slide support member 3244 that cooperates with the upper back center base 3212 to slidably support each.

Further, the back upper center unit 3210 is spaced apart in the left-right direction and extends in the up-down direction at a position on the front surface of the back upper center unit 3210 and on the front side of the first slide base 3216 supported by the first shaft 3214 so as to be able to move up and down. Pair of second shafts 3246 supported in such a manner, a plate-shaped second slide base 3248 supported by the pair of second shafts 3246 so as to be movable up and down, and detachably supported on the front side of the second slide base 3248. A second elevating/decorating body 3250, which is disposed on the rear side of the first elevating/decorating decorative body 3218 and three-dimensionally imitates a different part (lower jaw) of the face of the same character as the first elevating/lowering decorative body 3218, A second liquid crystal display device 3252 attached to the decorative body 3250 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image toward the front side, and a back center decoration member that is attached to the center of the upper front surface of the back center base 3212 and imitates a rotating light. 3254 and a shaft retainer 3256 that is attached to the upper front surface of the back upper center base 3212 and supports the upper ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246.

Further, the back center unit 3210 has a plurality of gear teeth arranged in a row on the outer circumference of the fan-shaped front end, meshes with the driven gear portion 3238a of the first gear member 3238, and is rotatable at a predetermined position on the front surface of the center cover 3230. The assist gear 3258 is supported, and the assist spring 3260 that urges the assist gear 3258 to rotate in the direction in which the drive slide 3242 moves upward via the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240. ..

The back upper center base 3212 in the back upper center unit 3210 has a shaft holding portion 3212a that holds the lower ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246 on the front side, and the upper ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246 that press the shaft. It is arranged at a position corresponding to the shaft support portion 3212b, which is supported in cooperation with the 3256 and to which the shaft retainer 3256 is attached, and the rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216, which is supported by the first shaft 3214 so as to be able to move up and down. It has an opening 3212c penetrating therethrough and a notch 3212d that is arranged in the center in the left-right direction and is notched upward from the lower end in a rectangular shape.

The rack center 3212c of the rear center base 3212 is configured such that the rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216 faces rearward from the opening 3212c, and the pinion gear 3220 meshes with the rack gear 3216c through the opening 3212c. Further, the back center base 3212 is configured such that a second slide base 3248 disposed on the front side and supported by a second shaft 3246 so as to be able to move up and down is attached to a drive slide 3242 disposed on the rear side through the cutout portion 3212d. ing.

The first slide base 3216 in the back center unit 3210 includes a main body 3216a, a mounting portion 3216b, and a rack gear 3216c, and a detection piece 3216d extending upward from the upper end of the main body 3216a. The detection piece 3216d of the first slide base 3216 is detected by the first lift detection sensor 3262 attached to the upper back center base 3212, and thus the lift position of the first slide base 3216 (first lift decoration 3218). (Elevated position) can be detected.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first elevating decorative body 3218 in the back center unit 3210 is formed such that the member forming the front side has a light-transmitting property, and a plurality of LEDs are provided inside the front. A mounted back-top middle front decorative board is provided. Accordingly, the first elevating decorative body can be made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs of the back upper middle front decorative substrate to emit light.

Further, the drive slide 3242 of the back upper center unit 3210 includes a detection piece 3242b extending upward from a predetermined position on the upper side, and the detection piece 3242b is attached to a predetermined position of the back upper center base 3212. By being detected by the elevation detection sensor 3264, the elevation position (elevation position) of the drive slide 3242 (second elevation decoration 3250) can be detected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 156, the second slide base 3248 in the back center unit 3210 has a plate-shaped fixing piece 3248a that extends outward from the left and right ends in the left-right direction and is spaced apart in the up-down direction. A fixing hole 3248b that is formed in the lower center of the direction and penetrates in the up-down direction, and a locking hole 3248c that is disposed adjacent to the fixing hole 3248b and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. The second slide base 3248 is configured such that four fixing pieces 3248a are inserted into fixing grooves 3250a formed on the rear surface of the second elevating decoration 3250, respectively, and the second ascending and descending holes are fixed in the fixing holes 3248b. The fixing claw 3250b of the decorative body 3250 is inserted from the upper side, and the second lifting decorative body 3250 can be suspended and supported by the fixing piece 3248a and the fixing hole 3248b. Further, the second slide base 3248 is configured such that the locking claw 3250c of the second elevating decorative body 3250 is elastically inserted into the locking hole 3248c. In the back upper center unit 3210, the locking claw 3250c is inserted into the locking hole 3248c, so that the second elevating decorative body 3250 is prevented from moving upward relative to the second slide base 3248. The second slide base 3248 and the second elevating/decorating decorative body 3250 are inseparable from each other (locked state).

Further, as shown in the figure, the second elevating decorative body 3250 of the upper back center unit 3210 has a shape in a front view that imitates the mouth of a predetermined character, and the second liquid crystal so as to face the mouth. A display device 3252 is attached. In addition, the second lifting decoration 3250 has a fixing groove 3250a into which a fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 can be inserted and a fixing claw 3250b which can be inserted into a fixing hole 3248b of the second slide base 3248 from above on the rear surface side. And a locking claw 3250c that is elastically insertably locked from the rear side into the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248. The fixing groove 3250a of the second elevating decorative body 3250 is formed in a substantially L-shaped groove in a side view, which rises upward from the bottom of the opening opened rearward, and is fixed in the fixing groove 3250a. When the fixed piece 3248a is relatively moved upward after the piece 3248a is inserted, the fixed piece 3248a is prevented from coming out backward. When the fixing piece 3248a is prevented from coming out backward from the fixing groove 3250a, the locking claw 3250c is elastically inserted into the locking hole 3248c, and the locking claw 3248c is inserted into the locking hole 3248c. By inserting 3250c, the second slide base 3248 is prevented from moving downward relative to the second elevating decorative body 3250. As a result, the second slide base 3248 and the second lifting decoration 3250 can be inseparable from each other (locked state), and the locking by the locking claw 3250c is released to release the second lifting decoration. When the second slide base is moved downward relative to 3250, the fixing piece 3248a comes out from the fixing groove 3250a rearward, so that the second elevating decorative body 3250 and the second slide base 3248 are separated from each other. be able to. That is, the second elevating decorative body 3250 can be detachably supported on the second slide base 3248.

Further, although not shown, the second elevating decorative body 3250 is provided with a back-up center-rear decoration substrate having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, outside the second liquid crystal display device 3252 inside thereof. The upper and lower rear decorative substrates allow the second elevating decorative body 3250 to emit light.

The back center decoration member 3254 in the back center unit 3210 has a shape in front view that is similar to a rotating lamp. Although not shown in detail, the back center decoration member 3254 has a translucent surface member formed in a shape imitating a rotating lamp and a rear opening of the surface member to close the back center base 3212. A base member to be attached, a reflector that is arranged between the base member and the surface member, is conically inclined so that it is located rearward as it goes downward, and the front surface is formed into a mirror surface, and is placed below the reflector. And a back-up middle-upper decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in an arc shape facing upward. The back center decoration member 3254 is configured such that the light from the LED mounted upward on the back middle top decoration substrate is reflected to the front side by the reflector. Further, the back center decoration member 3254 is capable of performing light emission decoration such that light is swirling in the surface member by sequentially emitting light from LEDs arranged in an arc shape. It is now possible to perform a light-emitting decoration similar to a rotating light.

Further, the back center unit 3210 is mounted on the back middle center side decoration board 3266 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the center cover 3230 at the upper left and right corners, and on the rear side of the center cover 3230. Back top first drive motor 3228, back top second drive motor 3234, back top middle side decoration board 3266, first back up and down decoration body 3218 back up middle front decoration board, and second up and down decoration body 3250 back up middle back A decorative board or the like, a back relay board 3268 for relaying the connection between the motor drive board and the lamp drive board, and a second liquid crystal relay board 3270 for relaying the connection between the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the peripheral control board 4010. And are equipped with.

Next, a back side unit 3300 in the back rendering unit 3200 will be described. The back upper side unit 3300 of this example is configured substantially symmetrically, and will be described with the same reference numerals. The upper back side unit 3300 is a shallow box-shaped open front side and is mounted in the rear case 3010, and a lower back side base 3302 is arranged so that the rotation shaft projects toward the front side of the lower back side base 3302. The rear upper side drive motor 3304 (3304L, 3304R) attached to the rear side, the spur gear-shaped drive gear 3306 fixed to the rotation shaft of the rear upper side drive motor 3304, and the large diameter gear meshing with the drive gear 3306. A driven gear portion 3308a, and a transmission gear member 3308 rotatably supported on the front side of the back side base 3302 having a transmission pin 3308b protruding forward from a position slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the driven gear portion 3308a. , Are provided.

Further, in the back upper side unit 3300, the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308 is slidably inserted, and the guide groove 3310a and the guide groove 3310a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the predetermined direction are formed and the guide groove is formed. A plate-shaped action piece 3310b extending in the direction in which 3310a extends and a drive link member 3310 having a disk-shaped base portion 3310c formed on one end side of the action piece 3310b, and fixed to the front surface of the base portion 3310c of the drive link member 3310. A cylindrical shaft portion 3312a, an arm portion 3312b three-dimensionally formed in a predetermined shape extending from the tip of the shaft portion 3312a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the shaft portion 3312a, and a connecting portion formed at the tip of the arm portion 3312b. A first movable decorative body 3312 having 3312c and a shaft portion 3312a of the first movable decorative body 3312 are rotatably supported and are arranged between the first movable decorative body 3312 and the drive link member 3310. And a decorative cover 3314 that covers the front surface of the.

Further, the back side unit 3300 has one end side rotatably supported at a predetermined position on the front surface of the decorative cover 3314 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and the other end side extending a predetermined amount in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A rod-shaped arm member 3316 and a base end thereof is rotatably supported on the other end side of the arm member 3316, and is rotatably connected to a connecting portion 3312c of the first movable decorative body 3312 at a portion on the way to the tip. A second movable decorative body 3318 having a three-dimensional outer shape and a rear upper side decorative substrate arranged between the decorative cover 3314 and the rear upper side base 3302 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. 3320 and a back upper side lower lower decorative substrate 3322.

The drive link member 3310 of the upper back side unit 3300 is rotatably supported by the decorative cover 3314 via the shaft portion 3312a of the first movable decorative body 3312. The drive link member 3310 includes a detection piece 3310d extending outward from a predetermined position of the action piece 3310b, and the detection piece 3310d is attached to the back side side base 3302. The rotational position of the first movable decorative body 3312 or the second movable decorative body 3318 can be detected through the drive link member 3310 by being detected by.

In the back upper side unit 3300, the first movable decoration body 3312 is formed in a shape that three-dimensionally imitates the forearm of a predetermined character, and the second movable decoration body 3318 functions as a nozzle of a household vacuum cleaner. A predetermined character's hand is formed in a portion that is imitated and is connected to the connecting portion 3312c of the first movable decorative body 3312, and the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3318 cause the nozzle of the cleaner to be formed. The arm with is formed. The arm member 3316 is formed in a shape simulating a hose of a vacuum cleaner.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the first movable decoration body 3312 of the back side unit 3300 has a back surface side first decoration in which a surface member has translucency and a plurality of LEDs are mounted inside. A substrate is provided so that the first movable decorative body 3312 can be appropriately illuminated and decorated. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the second movable decorative body 3318 is provided with a back side second decorative substrate in which a surface member has translucency and a plurality of LEDs are mounted inside. The second movable decoration 3318 can be appropriately light-emitted.

Next, the movement of the rear effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 159, in the normal state, the back production unit 3200 of the present example is in the raised position where the first lifting decoration 3218 and the second lifting decoration 3250 in the back center unit 3210 are respectively the rising ends. The first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3318, which are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the back side unit 3300, are located in the retracted position in which the arms are opened by separating from each other. ing. In this normal state, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 included in the second elevating/decorating body 3250 is partially visible from the lower side of the first elevating/decorating body 3218.

Further, more specifically, in this normal state, the rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216 of the back center unit 3210 is in mesh with the pinion gear 3220 near the lower end of the rack gear 3216c extending in the vertical direction. In addition, the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b of the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 in the upper back center unit 3210 are separated from the substantially rising end (top dead center) in the revolution trajectory. The respective positions are slightly rotated, and the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b are in contact with the outer ends of the slits 3242a in the drive slide 3242, respectively. Accordingly, a downward force is applied to the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b via the second slide base 3248 and the drive slide 3242 by the load of the second elevating decorative body 3250 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Thus, even if the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b try to rotate in the direction away from each other, the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b are in contact with the outer end of the slit 3242a. Since the one connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b cannot move in the direction away from each other, the state in which the revolution of the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b is stopped is maintained, and the second drive on the back side is performed. The motor 3234 is designed not to be loaded.

On the other hand, in the normal state in the back side unit 3300, the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308 that rotates the drive link member 3310 extends in the direction perpendicular to the axis line of the guide groove 3310a and rotates the transmission gear member 3308. It is located closer to the center of rotation of the drive link member 3310 than the axis passing through the shaft center and is in contact with the proximal end of the guide groove 3310a. As a result, the load acting on the connecting portion 3312c side of the first movable decorative body 3312 causes a force that relatively moves the connecting portion 3312c downward, acting on the first movable decorative body 3312. Even if the action piece 3310b of the 3310 acts to rotate the transmission gear member 3308 toward the center of rotation, and the force acts to revolve the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308, Since the pin 3308b is in contact with the proximal end of the guide groove 3310a, the transmission pin 3308b cannot revolve, and the drive link member 3310 (first movable decorative body 3312) is prevented from rotating. The normal condition is maintained. As a result, in a normal state, no load is applied to the back side drive motor 3304.

From this normal state, when the second upper drive motor 3234 of the lower center unit 3210 rotationally drives the first gear member 3238 to rotate clockwise in a front view, the first gear member 3238 is rotated. The first connecting pin 3238c starts revolving in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second connecting pin 3240b of the second gear member 3240 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. As the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b revolve, their relative positions change with each other, so that the first sliding pin 3238c slides in the slit 3242a of the driving slide 3242 and, at the same time, the vertical position of the driving slide 3242 changes. It will change. In this example, the drive slide 3242 (second elevating decorative body 3250) slightly moves up from the raised position until the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b reach the top dead center, and when the drive slide 3242 crosses the top dead center. The drive slide 3242 will be lowered.

Then, when the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b reach the bottom dead center, the drive slide 3242 (second elevating decorative body 3250) is located at the lowest lowered position, and the second drive motor 3234 on the back side is moved. Stop the rotation drive of. When the second elevating/decorating body 3250 is located at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. Is opened wide, and the entire second liquid crystal display device 3252 is visible to the player through the mouth.

When the drive gear 3226 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction by the back upper first drive motor 3228 in a state where the second lift decorative body 3250 of the back upper center unit 3210 is located at the lowered position, a front view meshed with the drive gear 3226. The transmission gear 3222 on the right side rotates, the transmission gear 3222 on the opposite side also simultaneously rotates in the same direction via the coupling shaft 3224, and the pinion gears 3220 meshed with the respective transmission gears 3222 rotate and the respective pinion gears 3220. The first slide base 3216 (first elevating decorative body 3218) slides downward from the raised position by the rack gear 3216c that meshes with. In the first slide base 3216, the rack gears 3216c that are separated from each other in the left and right are simultaneously driven to move up and down, so that the first slide base 3216 can slide smoothly without rattling.

Then, when the first slide base 3216 reaches the lower end, the back first drive motor 3228 is stopped, and the first elevating decorative body 3218 is in the lowered position. In this state, the relative positional relationship between the first elevating decorative body 3218 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 is substantially the same as the normal state, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 faces the mouth a little. Becomes On the other hand, on the upper side of the first elevating decorative body 3218, as shown in FIG. 161, the back center decorative member 3254 becomes visible from the player side, and in this state, the back center decorative member 3254 is back. By appropriately illuminating the LED on the middle upper decorative substrate, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect such as a rotating lamp.

In addition, in order to return to the normal state (state of the ascending position), the first lifting decorative body 3218 and the second lifting decorative body 3250 can be returned to the rising position by performing the driving reverse to the above. it can. Further, in this example, due to its structure, the second elevating decorative body 3250 cannot be in the descending position while the second elevating decorative body 3250 is in the ascending position.

On the other hand, in the back side unit 3300 of the back production unit 3200, as shown in FIG. 162(a), in the normal state, the tip ends of the left and right first movable decorative bodies 3312 (the side of the connecting portion 3312c) are located. It is in a state where they are distant from each other, and it is in a state where a predetermined character holds the cleaner (nozzle thereof) in both hands and spreads his arms. In this normal state, the back side driving motor 3304 of the back side unit 3300 is driven to drive the drive gear 3306 in an appropriate direction (the left side in the front view is clockwise, the right side in the front view is counterclockwise). When driven to rotate, the transmission gear member 3308 that meshes with the drive gear 3306 rotates, and the transmission pin 3308b revolves around a predetermined radius.

When the transmission pin 3308b revolves, the relative position of the transmission pin 3308b moves, so that the transmission pin 3308b slides in the guide groove 3310a of the drive link member 3310 and is simultaneously pushed by the transmission pin 3308b. The drive link member 3310 rotates so that its tip end side moves downward, and the first movable decorative body 3312 rotates together with the drive link member 3310.

In this back side unit 3300, the first movable decorative body 3312, the second movable decorative body 3318, and the arm member 3316 form a parallel link. When the first movable decorative body 3312 is rotated so that the arm member 3316 rotates in the same manner as the first movable decorative body 3312, the second movable decorative body 3318 changes its direction. The position moves as it is. As a result, the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3318 on the left and right of the second movable decorative body 3318 shown in FIG. 162(b) approach each other from the retracted position shown in FIG. 162(a). The state of appearance appears.

In order to return the first movable decorative body 3312, the second movable decorative body 3318, and the like to the normal state (the state of the retracted position), the first movable decorative body 3312 and The second movable decorative body 3318 and the like can be returned to a normal state.

As described above, according to the back production unit 3200 of this example, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided in addition to the normal liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to present the player with an effect that is completely different from the display effect up to now, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the small second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front of the large liquid crystal display device 1900, collaboration between the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be enjoyed. It is possible to increase the interest of the player.

In the back center unit 3210, the second elevating decorative body 3250 supporting the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is detachably supported on the second slide base 3248 which is vertically driven. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) can be easily separated from the back upper center unit 3210 and replaced. It is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the pachinko machine 1 and increase the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1, and when the pachinko machine 1 is discarded, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed, improving the recyclability and improving the environment. It can be used as a pachinko machine 1.

[2-9. Underside production unit]
Next, the lower back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 180. FIG. 163 is a perspective view of the under side effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 164 is a perspective view of the under side effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. Also, FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. 167 is a perspective view of the back lower front unit of the back lower production unit seen from the front, FIG. 168 is a perspective view of the back lower front unit of the lower back production unit seen from the rear, and FIG. 169 is a back. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the lower front unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 171 is a front view showing the back side production unit in a normal state, and FIG. 172 is a front view showing a state where the back side front slider of the back side front unit in the back side production unit is partially raised. FIG. 173 is a front view showing a state where the back lower front slider of the back lower front unit is raised to the rising end. Also, FIG. 174 is a front view showing a state in which the rear-under-the-middle-decoration body in the under-the-scene production unit is raised to the appearance position, and FIG. It is a front view which shows the made state. Further, FIG. 176 is a front view showing a state in which the back lower front slider of the back lower front unit is raised to the rising end and the back lower rear middle decorative body is raised to the appearance position, and FIG. 177 is a back lower production unit. FIG. 178 is a front view showing a state in which the back side rear decorative body is rotated to the appearance position, and FIG. 178 is a front view showing a state in which the back side rear middle decorative body is raised to the appearance position in the state of FIG. 177; FIG. 179 is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front slider is raised to the rising end in the state of FIG. 178. Further, FIG. 180 is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front slider is raised to the rising end in the state of FIG. 177.

The lower back production unit 3400 in the rear unit 3000 of this example is mounted below the opening 3010b between the rear front decoration unit 3100 and the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010.

The underside effect unit 3400 is attached to the inside of the underside box 3010 and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front and extends in the left-right direction. The underside unit base 3402 penetrates the underside unit base 3402 and has a rotation axis to the rear side. A lower back rear side drive motor 3404 attached to a predetermined position (lower right corner in front view) on the lower front of the lower back unit base 3402 so as to project, and a spur gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower back rear side drive motor 3404. -Shaped drive gear 3406, a small-diameter first gear portion 3408a that meshes with the drive gear 3406, and a second gear portion 3408b integrally formed on the rear surface of the first gear portion 3408a and having a diameter larger than that of the first gear portion 3408a. And an intermediate gear 3408 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the lower back unit base 3402.

In addition, the under side effect unit 3400 has a transmission gear portion 3410a that meshes with the second gear portion 3408b of the intermediate gear 3408, and a first cam pin 3410b protruding rearward from a position slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the transmission gear portion 3410a. A first cam gear 3410 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the lower back unit base 3402, a driven gear portion 3412a that meshes with the transmission gear portion 3410a of the first cam gear 3410 and has the same diameter as the transmission gear portion 3410a, and a driven gear. The second cam pin 3412b, which is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the portion 3412a and has the same radius as the revolution radius of the first cam pin 3410b, projects rearward and has the same height as the first cam gear 3410 on the rear surface of the lower unit base 3402. And a second cam gear 3412 that is rotatably supported. The first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 are supported on the rear surface side of the lower back unit base 3402 such that the centers of the axes connecting the respective rotation centers are located substantially at the center of the lower back unit base 3402 in the left-right direction. Has been done.

In addition, the back side production unit 3400 is provided with a long hole-shaped slit 3414a and a slit 3414a which are slidably inserted into the first cam pin 3410b of the first cam gear 3410 and extend in a predetermined direction. A first link member having a strip-shaped action piece 3414b that extends to one side and a tubular shaft portion 3414c that is formed on the proximal end side that extends long from the slit 3414a of the action piece 3414b and that extends in the front-rear direction. 3414 and the second cam pin 3412b of the second cam gear 3412 are slidably inserted to form elongated slits 3416a and slits 3416a that extend in a predetermined direction and extend to one side in the extending direction of the slit 3416a. A strip-shaped action piece 3416b, and a second link member 3416 having a tubular shaft portion 3416c extending in the front-rear direction and formed on the base end side extending long from the slit 3416a of the action piece 3416b. There is. The first link member 3414 includes a detection piece 3414d that extends in a plate shape from the shaft portion 3414c in the direction perpendicular to the axis.

Further, the underside effect unit 3400 includes a pair of underside rear side decorations 3420 (3420L, 3420R) rotatably supported around an axial center extending in the front-rear direction near the left and right corners of the upper front side of the underside unit base. ) Is provided. The pair of lower back rear side decorations 3420 extend in a substantially arc shape along a surface extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, and are formed in a substantially symmetrical shape. More specifically, the back lower rear side decoration 3420 includes a support pin 3422 extending in the front-rear direction that is rotatably supported at a predetermined position of the back lower unit base 3402, and a support pin 3422 from the front end side of the support pin 3422. A decorative body main body 3424 having a translucent shape and formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape along a surface extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a rear side of the decorative body main body 3424. It is provided with a lens sheet (not shown) capable of diffusing light, and a lower back rear side decorative substrate 3426 arranged on the rear side of the lens sheet and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The pair of underside rear side decorations 3420 are arranged such that the support pins 3422 are substantially left-right symmetric with respect to a perpendicular line passing through the centers of axes connecting the rotation centers of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412. While being rotatably supported by the lower unit base 3402, a shaft portion of the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 is provided at the rear end of the support pin 3422 that extends rearward through the lower lower unit base 3402. 3414c and 3416c are respectively fixed. That is, the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are rotatably supported by the back lower unit base 3402 via the support pins 3422 of the back lower rear side decoration body 3420. Further, when the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are rotated (rotated), the lower back rear side decoration body 3420 is also rotated. The support pin 3422 of the back lower rear side decoration body 3420 is rotatably supported by the lower back unit base 3402 via a bush 3428.

In addition, the back lower production unit 3400 is a plate-shaped protection plate 3430 which is attached to the left and right upper corners of the front of the back lower unit base 3402 and in which a part of the rear surface of the back lower rear side decoration body 3420 is slidable. A lower back rear side rotation detection sensor 3432 attached to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the lower back unit base 3402 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414 is provided. In this example, by detecting the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414 by the back lower back side rotation detection sensor 3432, the turning position of the back lower rear side decoration body 3420 can be detected. There is.

Further, the under-rear effect production unit 3400 supports the under-rear back middle decoration body 3450 which is arranged at the substantially center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the under-rear unit base 3402, and supports the under-rear back middle decoration body 3450 slidably in the vertical direction. The tip is connected to a pair of guide shafts 3470 that are spaced apart in the left-right direction at the center of the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402, and to the lower front portion of the lower back intermediate decoration body 3450 supported by the pair of guide shafts 3470. In addition, the base end extends to the outside of the pair of guide shafts 3470 in the left and right direction (left side in front view), and a spur gear-shaped gear part integrally formed on the base end side of the arm 3472a. 3472b and a plate-shaped detection piece 3472c extending outward from the gear portion 3472b, and an elevating arm member rotatably supported on the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 about the axis of the gear portion 3472b. 3472, a drive gear 3474 that is arranged on the rear side of the lower back unit base 3402 that meshes with the gear portion 3472b of the elevating arm member 3472, and the drive gear 3474 is fixed to the rotation shaft and the rotation shaft is the lower back unit base 3402. And a rear lower rear middle drive motor 3476 attached to the front side of the lower rear unit base 3402 so as to extend through the rear side and extend rearward.

Also, the underside effect unit 3400 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the underside unit base 3402, and a shaft retainer 3478 that holds the lower end of the guide shaft 3470 in cooperation with the underside unit base 3402, and the underside of the underside unit base 3402. , Which is attached to a predetermined position of the lifting arm member 3472 and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3472c of the lifting arm member 3472, meshes with the rear lower middle lifting detection sensor 3480 and the gear portion 3472b of the lifting arm member 3472, and rotates to the front surface of the lower unit base 3402. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 3482 that is movably supported, an assist gear 3484 that is formed in a fan shape that meshes with the intermediate gear 3482, and that is rotatably supported on the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402, and that moves up and down the assist gear 3484. An assist spring 3486 that urges the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the arm member 3472 to rotate in the direction of moving upward is provided.

Further, the underside effect unit 3400 is attached to the rear side of the underside unit base 3402, and is provided with the underside rear side drive motor 3404, the underside rear side rotation detection sensor 3432, the underside pointer drive motor 3460, and the underside back middle. Connection between the drive motor 3476, the under-rear-rear-mid-elevation detection sensor 3480, the under-rear-front drive motor 3508, and the under-rear front up-and-down detection sensor 3544 and the motor drive board 3045, the under-rear back side decoration board 3426, the under-rear back middle A decorative substrate 3456, a front lower back side decorative substrate 3536, and a rear lower relay substrate 3488 for relaying the connection between the front lower front decorative substrate 3546 and the lamp driving substrate 3041 are provided.

The back lower back middle decoration 3450 in the back lower production unit 3400 includes a horizontally long rectangular base 3452a supported by a pair of guide shafts 3470 so as to be vertically movable, and a supporting portion extending vertically upward from the upper side of the base 3452a. A plate-shaped slider base 3452 having 3452b, a translucent ornament body 3454 attached to the front surface of the supporting portion 3452b of the slider base 3452 and having a three-dimensional outer shape, and a translucent ornament body 3454. And a supporting portion 3452b of the slider base 3452 and a sheet lens (not shown) capable of diffusing light, and a plurality of sheet lenses disposed on the front surface between the sheet lens and the supporting portion 3452b of the slider base 3452. And a back under-rear decoration substrate 3456 on which LEDs are mounted.

In addition, the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 is arranged on the front surface of the decorative body main body 3454 and has a base end rotatably supported at the center of the decorative body main body 3454 and an outer shape formed in an arrow shape, and a pointer member 3458, A lower back pointer drive motor 3460 that is attached to a predetermined position of the slider base 3452 by rotating the pointer member 3458 around its base end. Although not shown in detail, the lower back pointer drive motor 3460 is arranged such that its rotary shaft extends in the left-right direction, and a worm gear is fixed to the rotary shaft, and further meshes with the worm gear. Rotational drive is transmitted through a plurality of gears such as spur gears to rotate the pointer member 3458.

In addition, the back lower rear middle decoration 3450 has a guide hole 3452c extending in the left-right direction in which the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the elevating arm member 3472 can be slidably held in the base portion 3452a of the slider base 3452. Equipped with. By inserting the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the elevating arm member 3472 into the guide hole 3452c of the slider base 3452, the slider base 3452 and the elevating arm member 3472 are connected.

The lower back production unit 3400 is arranged on the front side of the lower back rear side decoration body 3420, the lower back middle decoration body 3450, the elevating arm member 3472, the drive gear 3474, and the like, and is attached to the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402. The lower back front unit 3500 is further provided. The lower back front unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402, and is arranged at the center of the left-right direction, which penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a pair of slits 3502a which extend in the up-down direction, and the front upper end of the center in the left-right direction. A back lower front base 3502 having an abutting portion 3502b and a front lower back base 3502 are disposed and supported by a pair of slits 3502a so as to be slidable in the vertical direction and have an outer shape formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape. , A back lower front slider 3504 having a rack gear 3504a formed on both left and right side surfaces to extend in the vertical direction, and a guide hole 3504b penetrating in the front and rear direction at the center of the left and right direction and extending in the vertical direction, and a back lower front slider 3504. And a back lower front middle decoration body 3506 having a translucency, which is attached to the front surface of the upper part of the machine and has a three-dimensional appearance of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1.

The lower back front slider 3504 of the lower back front unit 3500 includes a locking portion 3504c that projects forward from the upper end in the center in the left and right direction on the front surface, and extends outward in the left and right direction from the rear ends of the rack gears 3504a at the left and right ends and extends in the up and down direction. Guide piece 3504d, a detection piece 3504e extending further leftward and rightward from the lower end of one (right side in front) guide piece 3504d, and a cylindrical guide boss inserted into the slit 3502a of the lower back front base 3502. 3504f. Further, in the back lower front slider 3504, a plurality of through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in a portion to which the front lower back middle decoration 3506 is attached. The back lower front slider 3504 is slidably supported by the slit 3502a by inserting the guide boss 3504f into the slit 3502a of the lower back front base 3502 via the bush 3507.

In addition, the back lower front unit 3500 is attached such that a rotation shaft penetrates the back lower front base 3502 and projects forward near one end (right side in front view) on the rear surface of the back lower front base 3502. Front lower back drive motor 3508, drive gear 3510 in the form of a spur gear fixed to the rotation shaft of front lower back drive motor 3508, and is rotatably supported on the front surface of front lower back base 3502 by meshing with drive gear 3510. The intermediate gear 3512 meshes with the rack gear 3504a on one side (right side in front view) of the back lower front slider 3504 slidably supported by the intermediate gear 3512 and the back lower front base 3502, and can rotate to the front of the back lower front base 3502. And an operating gear 3514 supported by.

Further, the back lower front unit 3500 meshes with the other rack gear 3504a of the back lower front slider 3504 slidably supported by the back lower front base 3502 and is rotatably supported on the front surface of the back lower front base 3502. -Shaped driven gear 3516, a transmission gear 3518 that meshes with the driven gear 3516 and is rotatably supported on the front surface of the back lower front base 3502, and a transmission gear 3518 that meshes with the transmission gear 3518 and is formed in a fan shape. An assist gear 3520 rotatably supported on the front surface and an assist spring 3522 that urges the assist gear 3520 to rotate in the direction in which the back lower front slider 3504 slides upward are provided. Although not shown in detail, the transmission gear 3518 has a large-diameter first gear portion that meshes with the driven gear 3516, and a small-diameter second gear portion that integrally rotates with the first gear portion and meshes with the assist gear 3520. It has and.

In addition, the back lower front unit 3500 is supported by a guide hole 3504b on the front surface of the back lower front slider 3504 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and is arranged at the upper ends on the left and right sides with the center in the left and right direction interposed therebetween and extends in the left and right direction. The elongated hole 3524a, the locking portion 3524b formed at a predetermined position on the rear surface, and the lower end of the rear surface can penetrate through the guide hole 3504b of the lower back front slider 3504 to project rearward and contact the lower back front base 3502. A vertically long movable slider 3524 having a protrusion 3524c capable of contacting the contact portion 3502b from below and a lower end of the movable slider 3524 are locked by a locking portion 3524b of the movable slider 3524 and a back lower front slider 3504 is locked. The drive spring 3526 has an upper end locked to the portion 3504c and biases the movable slider 3524 toward the upper side of the back lower front slider 3504.

Further, the back lower front unit 3500 is arranged between the back lower front middle decoration 3506 and the back lower front slider 3504 on both sides of the movable slider 3524, and is slidable into one guide hole 3504b of the movable slider 3524. It has a sliding pin 3532 to be inserted, is rotatably supported by the back lower front slider 3504 at a position outside the sliding pin 3532 in the left and right direction, and the tip side thereof is outward in the left and right direction from the back lower front slider 3504. It is provided with a pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 each having an extended appearance formed in a blade shape. This back lower front side decorative body is provided with a sliding pin 3532 on the base end side and has a translucent decorative main body 3534 having a feather-like appearance, and a decorative main body 3534 arranged on the rear side to transmit light. It is provided with a diffusible sheet lens (not shown) and a back lower front side decorative substrate 3536 arranged on the rear side of the sheet lens and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

Further, the back lower front unit 3500 includes a guide roller 3540 which is contactable with the left and right guide pieces 3504d of the back lower front slider 3504 and rotatably supported at a predetermined position above the front surface of the back lower front base 3502, and a guide roller 3540. A roller retainer 3542 for preventing the 3540 from coming off the back lower front base 3502, and a back lower front lift detection sensor which is attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower back front base 3502 and can detect the detection piece 3504e of the back lower front slider 3504. 3544 and a lower back front middle decoration substrate 3546 mounted on the upper rear surface of the lower back front slider 3504 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The LEDs of the back lower front middle decoration substrate 3546 are provided at positions corresponding to the through holes of the back lower front slider 3504, and the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 arranged on the front side through the through holes can be illuminated and decorated. You can do it. Note that reference numeral 3548 in the figure is a cable retainer for retaining a flexible flat cable (FFC) that connects the back lower front middle decorative substrate 3546 and the back lower relay substrate 3488.

Next, the movement of the under side effect unit 3400 of this example will be described. In the normal state, in the back side production unit 3400, as shown in FIG. 171, a pair of back side rear side decorations 3420 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend in an arc shape are arranged so that their respective tips are separated from each other. It is in a rotated state. In this state, the back lower back side decorations 3420 are positioned on the left and right outside of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in the retracted position), and the left and right back lower back side decorations 3420 respectively serve as the center. It is hidden behind the object 2500 and the front decoration unit 3100 and is almost invisible to the player.

In addition, the back under-rear decoration 3450 in the under-representation effect unit 3400 descends downward and is hidden behind the under-rear front unit 3500 (the state of the retracted position). In this state, the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 1900 is positioned below the front surface of the device 1900 and is almost invisible to the player.

Furthermore, the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 and the pair of back lower front side decoration bodies 3530 of the back lower front unit 3500 in the back lower production unit 3400 are located at the descending ends respectively, and a pair of front lower back side decorations 3530 is in a state in which its tip end side is lower than its base end side. In this state, both the lower back front middle decoration body 3506 and the pair of lower back front side decoration bodies 3530 are positioned below the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (retracted position state). It is almost invisible to the workers.

More specifically, in the normal state of the back lower production unit 3400, the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 that rotate the left and right back lower rear side decorations 3420 respectively with respect to the rotation axis. The action pieces 3414b and 3416b are in the pivoting positions so as to extend obliquely upward. In this state, the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412, which are inserted into the slits 3414a and 3416a of the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416, respectively, have their revolution loci. The first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b are in contact with the ends of the slits 3414a and 3416a on the tip end side, as well as being located at the top dead center.

In this normal state, even if the force for rotating the first link member 3414 or the second link member 3416 due to the weight of the back side rear decorative body 3420 acts on the first cam pin 3410b or the second cam pin 3412b, Since the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b are designed to revolve toward the tip ends of the slits 3414a and 3416a, the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b are attached to the tip ends of the slits 3414a and 3416a. The first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b are prevented from revolving because they are in contact with the side end portions. As a result, the back lower back side decoration 3420 can be maintained in a normal state without imposing a load on the back lower rear side drive motor 3404. Note that in a normal state, the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414 is in a state detected by the back lower rear side rotation detection sensor 3432.

In addition, in the case of the back middle back decorative body 3450 in the normal state, the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the elevating arm member 3472 slidably connected to the guide hole 3452c of the slider base 3452 in the back middle rear decorative body 3450. However, it is in a state of extending diagonally below the center of rotation. In this example, in this state, the urging force of the assist spring 3486 acts on the elevating arm member 3472 in the direction in which the tip side of the arm portion 3472a rises. Note that, in a normal state, the detection piece 3472c of the elevating arm member 3472 is in a state in which it is detected by the rear lower back middle elevating detection sensor 3480.

Further, in the under-bottom front unit 3500 in the normal state, the under-bottom front slider 3504 is positioned at the lower end, and the movable slider 3524 supported by the under-bottom front slider 3504 so as to be able to move up and down is driven by the drive spring 3526. It is located at a position relatively elevated with respect to the lower back front slider 3504 by the urging force. In this state, the pair of long holes 3524a of the movable slider 3524 are located above the center of rotation of the back lower front side decoration body 3530, and the back lower front side decoration body 3530 inserted into the long holes 3524a slides. By the pin 3532, the front end side of the back lower front side decorative body 3530 is in a state of being lowered downward.

From this normal state, when the drive gear 3510 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction (clockwise in a front view) by the drive drive motor 3508 of the drive drive unit 3500 of the drive drive unit 3500, the rotation is performed via the intermediate gear 3512. The rack lower gear 3504 a transmitted to the gear 3514 and meshed with the operating gear 3514 causes the lower back front slider 3504 to slide upward. Even if the back lower front slider 3504 rises, the positional relationship between the back lower front slider 3504 and the movable slider 3524 does not change, so that the front end side of the pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 is lowered like the normal state. In this state, the whole is moved up together with the lower back front slider 3504 (see FIG. 172).

Then, when the back lower front slider 3504 rises to some extent, the projection 3524c of the movable slider 3524 supported by the back lower front slider 3504 contacts the contact portion 3502b of the back lower front base 3502, and the moving slider 3524 is prevented from rising. Will be done. When the movable slider 3524 is prevented from rising by the abutting portion 3502b of the back lower front base 3502, the back lower front drive motor 3508 is driven so as to further raise the back lower front slider 3504. The slider 3504 further rises against the biasing force of the drive spring 3526. As a result, the vertical relative positions of the back lower front slider 3504 and the movable slider 3524 are changed, and the elongated hole 3524a of the movable slider 3524 moves so as to move below the rotation center of the back lower front side decorative body 3530. By doing so, the back lower front side decorative body 3530 rotates in the direction in which the tip side thereof rises (see FIG. 173).

When the under-bottom front slider 3504 of the under-bottom front unit 3500 rises to the rising end, as shown in FIG. 173, the pair of under-bottom front side decorations 3530 rotate to positions where the front ends thereof extend obliquely upward. The predetermined character imitated by the front back middle decoration 3506 is in a state where its wings are spread. In this state, the front lower back middle decoration 3506 and the pair of front lower back side decorations 3530 are in a state of moving from the lower side to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (state of appearance position), which is sufficiently visible to the player. become able to. It should be noted that by performing the reverse drive to the above, it is possible to return the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 and the pair of back lower front side decoration bodies 3530 to the normal state.

On the other hand, when the drive gear 3474 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise in a front view) from the normal state by the drive motor 3476 under the back side, the lifting arm member 3472b is engaged by the gear portion 3472b meshed with the drive gear 3474. However, the arm portion 3472a is rotated so that the tip side of the arm portion 3472a rises, and is pushed by the tip of the arm portion 3472a so that the back lower rear middle decoration body 3450 can be raised. Then, in a state in which the back under-rear middle decoration 3450 is located at the rising end, a state in which the ornament main body 3454 of the under-rear middle decoration 3450 is located from the lower side to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the appearance position State) and becomes visible to the player (see FIG. 174).

In this rear-bottom rear middle decorative body 3450, when the back-lower pointer driving motor 3460 is driven to rotate in an appropriate direction while being raised to the rising end (state at the appearance position), it is placed in front of the main body 3454 of the decorative body. The arrow-shaped pointer member 3458 can be rotated like a clock hand (see FIG. 175). It should be noted that by performing the driving in the reverse manner to the above, it is possible to return the lower back middle decoration 3450 to the normal state.

If the back lower front slider 3504 of the back lower front unit 3500 is raised to the rising end (appearing position) with the back lower rear middle decoration 3450 raised to the rising end (state at the appearing position), A back lower front middle decoration 3506 and a pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 are located on the front side of the rear middle decoration 3450, and are arranged to hide the back lower rear middle decoration 3450 ( See Figure 176).

Further, when the drive gear 3406 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise in front view) from the normal state by the back lower rear side drive motor 3404, the first cam gear 3410 moves in the same direction via the intermediate gear 3408. Simultaneously with the rotation, the second cam gear 3412 rotates in the opposite direction. In the present example, the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 rotate so that the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 respectively revolve in the direction of moving away from each other. ..

Then, as the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 respectively rotate, the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b located at the top dead center revolve toward the bottom dead center. While the one cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b slide in the slits 3414a and 3416a, the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are pushed by the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b, and the action piece 3414b respectively. , 3416b are rotated in the descending direction, and the left and right underside rear side decorative bodies 3420 are rotated in the same directions as the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416, respectively.

Then, the rotation of the back lower rear side drive motor 3404 is stopped so that the tips of the left and right back lower rear side decorations 3420 come into contact with each other, thereby forming a pair of back lower rear side decorations formed in a substantially arc shape. The body 3420 is in a state of being united in an annular shape (see FIG. 177). In this state, the pair of underside rear side decorations 3420 are in a state of moving from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the front side (state of appearance position), and can be sufficiently viewed by the player. It should be noted that by performing the driving in the reverse manner to the above, it is possible to return the underside rear side decoration body 3420 to the normal state.

In the back side production unit 3400 of this example, the left and right back side rear decoration bodies 3420 are rotated to be positioned at the appearance positions that form an annular shape, and the back bottom rear middle decoration body 3450 is raised to the appearance position. When it is located at, the inside of the pair of back underside rear side decorations 3420 is filled with the inside underside back decoration 3450, and a state where a large-sized decoration appears appears. (See Figure 178). As a result, the player can be greatly surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is to be noted that the back lower back middle decoration 3450 may be raised to the appearance position first, and then the back lower rear side decoration 3420 may be rotated to the appearance position later. It is possible to perform a movable effect in which the ornamental body is successively enlarged.

Also, with the pair of back lower back side decorations 3420 and back lower back middle decorations 3450 positioned at the appearance positions, the back lower front slider 3504 is raised to the front side thereof, The ornamental body 3506 and the front lower back side ornamental body 3530 may be made to appear, and the annular back lower rear side ornamental body 3420 which is located on the rear side of the back lower front middle ornamental body 3506 and the back lower front side ornamental body 3530. Thus, the back lower front middle decoration 3506 and the back lower front side decoration 3530 can be made to stand out (see FIG. 179). In this case, the back-bottom rear middle decorative body 3450 may be in a lowered retracted position which is a normal state (see FIG. 180).

As described above, according to the back production unit 3400 of this example, a variety of movable productions can be performed, the player can be entertained, and it is possible to make the player less tired and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It has become possible to suppress.

[2-10. Jackpot mode decision production unit]
Next, the lower back right rendering unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 181 to 185. FIG. 181 is a front view of the back lower right effect unit, and FIG. 182 is a front view of the jackpot mode determination effect device which constitutes the back lower right effect unit. In addition, FIG. 183 is a plan view of the jackpot mode determination effect producing device, and FIG. 184 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Further, FIG. 185 is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 182, showing the flow of the game balls.

The back lower right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 of this embodiment is attached from the lower right corner to the right side of the opening 3010b in a front view in the back box 3010. This back lower right effect unit 3600 is provided with a jackpot mode determination effect device 3610 to which the game ball that has passed through the left gate 2575L is guided. The jackpot mode determination effect production device 3610 is a device for determining which of the three rounds, six rounds, twelve rounds and fifteen rounds of big hit games to be executed, and displaying the determined moment as an effect image. It functions, and the left gate passage sphere passage 3620, the clune 3630, the stage 3640 formed between the left gate passage sphere passage 3620 and the clune 3630, the left gate passage sphere discharge passage 3650, and the big hit mode determination. A gate 3660, a jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, and a mini liquid crystal display 3670 are provided. The clune 3630 and the stage 3640 are housed in a case body 3615, and the case body 3615, the left gate passage sphere passage 3620, the clune 3630, the stage 3640, and the left gate passage sphere discharge passage 3650 are all made of transparent resin. Has been done.

The left gate passage ball passage 3620 is a passage through which the game ball that has passed the left gate 2575L can roll, and a depth direction passage 3621 that guides the game ball that has passed the left gate 2575L to the rear side from the player, and a depth. It has a height direction passage 3622 that communicates with the direction passage 3621 and guides the game ball rolling in the depth passage 3621 downward. The game ball guided to the height direction passage 3622 is discharged to the stage 3640. The game ball released to the stage 3640 immediately or after rolling on the stage 3640 to the left or right falls to the clune 3630. Only one hole 3632 is formed in the clune 3630, and a game ball can be rolled around the hole 3632. A weir plate 3634 is erected between the stage 3640 and the hole 3632 so that the game balls that have fallen from the clune 3630 do not immediately fall from the hole 3632.

The game ball that has fallen from the stage 3640 to the clune 3630 rolls around the hole 3632, and is dropped from the hole 3632 when the rolling momentum disappears. Immediately below the hole 3632, a big hit mode determination gate 3660 and a big hit mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 that detects that a game ball has passed through the big hit mode determination gate 3660 are provided. The jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 is activated based on the fact that the game ball has passed the left gate 2575L. Then, when the big hit mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 is enabled and the game ball is detected by the big hit mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, among the big hit games of 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 rounds. Which will be executed is determined. The jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 is not activated, such as when the condition device is not operating or when the condition detecting device has operated but the route detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) has not yet detected the game ball. Sometimes, even if the game ball passes through the jackpot mode determination gate 3660, the determination of the mode of the jackpot game (decision of which of the three rounds, six rounds, twelve rounds and fifteen rounds of jackpot games to be executed) Not done

The mini liquid crystal display 3670 is arranged near the lower part of the clune 3630 so that the effect image displayed in the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670 and the manner in which the game ball drops the clune 3630 can be seen at the same time. ing. Although not shown, a mini liquid crystal display control device for controlling the display effect displayed in the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670 is disposed behind the mini liquid crystal display 3670. As will be described later in detail, in the mini liquid crystal display 3670, based on the fact that the game ball passes through the left gate 2575 and is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, it is expected that a 15-round jackpot game will be executed. Display effect is performed. Then, based on the fact that the game ball passes through the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 and is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, any one of the jackpot games of three rounds, six rounds, twelve rounds and fifteen rounds is executed. It is decided whether to be done.

In this way, when the game ball hit toward the game area 1100 is guided to the left side route (route toward the left gate 2575L), the game ball passes through the left gate passing ball passage 3620, the clune 3630 and the stage 3640. After rolling, the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 is passed and detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, and finally the jackpot game to be executed is determined. Therefore, the left gate passage ball passage 3620, the clune 3630, and the stage 3640 are until the game ball guided to the left route passes the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 in order to secure the execution time of the display effect on the mini liquid crystal display 3670. Function as a delaying means for delaying the time.

However, if it takes time for the game ball guided to the left route to pass the jackpot mode determination gate 3660, between the time the game ball passes the left gate 2575L and the jackpot mode determination gate 3660, Another game ball may be guided to the right route (route to the right gate 2575R). Therefore, as will be described later in detail, when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580R is invalidated even if the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R. .. As a result, another game ball is guided to the right route and passes through the right gate 2575R between the time when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L and the time when it passes through the jackpot mode determination gate 3660. It is possible to prevent the game from being decided.

[2-11. Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing pieces 1902. It is like this.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adapted to be inserted from the rear side into a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and is projected from the right side in front view. One fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the left side of the back box 3010 in rear view, and the other fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the lock mechanism 3050. By sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward to close the insertion opening, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 118 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that accommodates a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 188), and a lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. It has become.

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-luminance white LED as a backlight.

[2-12. Movable performance on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187. FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the rear effect unit. In addition, FIG. 187 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the underside effect unit. As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, in the game board 4 of this example, in a normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side through the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. It is like this.

In the normal state of the game board 4, the first elevating decorative body 3218 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 in the rear upper production unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 arranged on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are on the player side. It can be seen from. In the normal state, the underside effect unit 3200 is arranged such that the lower part of the second elevating decorative body 3250 slightly overlaps with the upper part of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this normal state, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 included in the second elevating/decorating body 3250 is partially visible from the lower side of the first elevating/decorating body 3218.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like, in a normal state, the pair of underside rear side decorations 3420 in the underside effect unit 3400 of the underside unit 3000 are on the left and right outside of the liquid crystal display device 1900. 3100 and the reception unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 and the rear lower right production unit 3600 are respectively located on the rear side and are invisible from the player side. In a normal state, the back lower back middle decoration 3450, the back lower front middle decoration 3506, and the back lower front side decoration 3530 in the back lower effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are lower than the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is located at the rear side of the decorative member that decorates the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500, and is invisible from the player side.

When the game board 4 of the present example is moved from the normal state to the lowermost lowered position by driving the second upper drive motor 3234 of the lower production unit 3200, for example, FIG. As shown in, the second elevating decoration 3250 is located on the upper front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the entire display screen of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is on the player side below the first elevating decoration 3218. Can be seen from. In this state, the head of a predetermined character composed of the first elevating and lowering ornament 3218 and the second elevating and lowering ornament 3250 has its mouth wide open, and the second liquid crystal display is displayed from within the mouth. The entire device 3252 is made visible to the player.

Further, from the normal state, by driving the back lower back side drive motor 3404, the back lower rear middle drive motor 3476, and the back lower front drive motor 3508 in the back lower production unit 3400, a pair of back lower rear side decorations 3420, When the back lower back middle decoration 3450, the back lower front middle decoration 3506, and the back lower front side decoration 3530 are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, they are formed in a substantially arc shape on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The pair of back lower back side decorations 3420 are in a state of being united in a ring shape, and the inside of the pair of back lower rear side decorations 3420 is buried by the raised back lower middle decoration 3450. In addition, a pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 are obliquely upward from the left and right sides of the back lower front middle decoration 3506 in front of the pair of back lower rear decorations 3420 and the back lower middle decoration 3450. It is located in a state in which it extends to (see FIG. 187). As a result, a predetermined character having a large semicircular background member as its back is in a state where its wings are spread on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the drawing, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of main boards 4000 is configured to include a main control board 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls a payout of game balls and the like. A group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 188, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. .. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. The functions of are also built in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first starting opening sensor 3131 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting opening 2101, and a second starting opening sensor for detecting the game ball received in the second starting opening 2102. 3132 and the detection signal from the general winning a prize sensor 3133 which detects the game ball received in the general winning a prize port 2201 are respectively inputted through the main control I/O port 4100b, the gate sensor 2302, the general winning a prize sensor 2123. Detection signals from the count sensor 2122, the route detection sensor 2580, and the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000 are transmitted via the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I/O port 4100b. Is input.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the start port solenoid 2114 and the attacker solenoid are connected via the panel relay board 3040. A drive signal is output to 2121 and an acceptance drive motor 2558, or a first special symbol display device 1185 and a second special symbol display device via the main control I/O port 4100b, the panel relay substrate 3040, and the function display substrate 1191. 1186, a first special symbol memory display 1184, a second special symbol memory display 1187, a normal symbol display 1189, a normal symbol memory display 1188, a game state display 1183, and outputs a drive signal to the round display 1190 To do.

In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 3131, the second starting port sensor 3132, the gate sensor 2302, and the count sensor 2122. As the general winning opening sensors 2123 and 3133, contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2301, so the first starting port sensor 3131, the second starting port sensor 3132, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2302 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3131, the second starting port sensor 3132, and the gate sensor 2302. Further, when a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 2122 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 2122 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2104, 2201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently does not frequently be detected by the general winning opening sensors 2123, 3133. Therefore, the general winning opening sensors 2123 and 3133 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various kinds of information (game information) related to games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I/O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control section 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Described) BC0 (see Exhibit 169). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 188, as shown in FIG. 188, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of the game balls and the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to the payout and the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 for the ball feeding. A firing control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720. , A tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 188, as shown in FIG. 188, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various kinds of control related to payout in the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor in which a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like are incorporated. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I/O port 4111b serving as an I/O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter, referred to as “external WDT 4111c”) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. ), and a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Are provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), and for preventing fraud. Functions are also built in.

The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 4100 and various kinds of commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port 4111b, or the main control board. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 is input through the payout control I/O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, and the out-of-ball switch 750 is input. The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 may be input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted through the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first the payout control input circuit. 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the game balls stored is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I/O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 with an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on the 4130 is output to the error LED indicator 4130 via the payout control I/O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is issued via the payout control I/O port 4111b. The serial number is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator 4130 is a segment indicator and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board), and when the number “1” is displayed, it means “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotor 748 is provided at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740. And the game ball are engaged with each other near the entrance thereof and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, it means that "count switch error" (specifically Indicates that there is a problem in the counting sensor 751 based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that "retry error" (specifically, The fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value is notified, and when the number "6" is displayed, it means "full tank" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). That the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR unconnected" ( The fact that the electrical connection has been cut off from any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock" (specifically Indicates that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

A ball lending request signal for a game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and a return request signal for a prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent to the ball lending unit board 366, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via the. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and this signal is issued to the payout control I/O. It is adapted to be received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to the CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the board 874, the main relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the remaining number display 365c.

[3-2B. Firing controller]
As shown in FIG. 188, the firing control unit 4120, which controls the firing by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches for firing are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b so that 100 gaming balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle body 504, and a detection signal from a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. Is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and then the main relay terminal plate 880, and then to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. Further, when the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the handle body 504 is first a handle device relay board 192, and then a main side relay terminal board 880. Is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via.

Based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d outputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength that matches the rotational position of the handle body 504, and a launch reference pulse. Is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e is triggered by the input of the ball-sending reference pulse to supply a constant current to the ball-sending solenoid 585 through the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192. By the output, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 301 of the dish unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current By stopping the output of, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see Exhibit 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. .. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 188, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[3-3A. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 188, the peripheral control unit 4140 which performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 4010, the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. The motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in FIG. Door side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3045 and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, and provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like, and door-side drive light-emission data from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the peripheral panel Control data (display command) indicating a screen transmitted to the door frame base substrate 194 via the relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is displayed on the liquid crystal. In addition to transmitting from the control unit serial I/O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c.

Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are the door frame base board. It is inputted to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the peripheral relay terminal board 882, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. The lower speaker 821 is controlled so that music and sound effects suitable for various performances are played, and the door frame 5 is connected via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. The control is performed so that music and sound effects suitable for various effects are played from the provided speakers 130, 222, 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “WDT with built-in peripheral control”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, the peripheral control unit 4140 also has an external watchdog timer (not shown) (hereinafter, “peripheral control external unit”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a jointly uses the peripheral control internal WDT and the peripheral control external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input/output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the peripheral data MPU4140a outputs to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command. , A plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display command are used, and in this embodiment, a bit rate of 250 kbps is set.

The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. 5 output to the LED of each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., or a lighting signal or flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting flashing command. The decorative boards 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546 and the like provided on the game board 4 output to the LEDs. In addition, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the dial drive motor provided in the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 etc. which were provided in the game board 4, each solenoid, etc.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, or receives a signal from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It may be input via a lamp drive board 3041 or a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via 882, or the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. that match various effects flow. In the present example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. To send an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal including a lower speaker 391 described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal) to the lower speaker 821 for low sound. Thus, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect).

[Abnormal noise prevention measures]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various acoustic equipment, LEDs, sensors, and other equipment that requires power, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes a side speaker 130, upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and a lower speaker 821 (FIG. 67) in a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is connected to the bass speaker) (FIG. 89) and is also connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4, and amplifies the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs it to each speaker. It is equipped with an amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit).

Further, on the door frame base substrate 194, wirings that connect various audio equipments, LEDs, sensors, and the like to the payout control substrate 4110, the peripheral control substrate 4010, and the like are collectively bundled and extended rearward. It is adapted to be connected to the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the body frame 3 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with a door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIG. 23).

In addition, at a position (rear side) where the door frame base substrate cover 195 is disposed, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and the game area 1100 despite being shot by the hitting ball launching device 650. A foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) that guides a game ball (foul ball) that has not arrived to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in proximity (FIG. 23).

In the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, the game balls (metal) pass at a high speed while coming into contact with the wall surface of the passage, so that electrostatic charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate of this portion, which may reach 10 kV or more. There is (at most 3 to 4 kV even when pain is felt due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metal, the electric charge accumulated in the resin only escapes around the ground even if it is grounded, and most of it remains.

Then, due to the electrostatic induction by this electric charge, a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 that is close to the electric charge may malfunction. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal from the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified and exceeds the appropriate amplification width (when an excessive AC voltage is generated). Occur. In that case, for example, a cracked sound such as a crackling sound is generated from the speaker, a sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a large unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound is generated), and the sound becomes unpleasant to the player. It will be felt. Moreover, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, it is usually not on the output side.

Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is hard to hear, the output tends to be set to be large.

The embodiment described below detects whether or not the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-mentioned abnormal audio signal, and if the abnormal audio signal is detected, The present invention relates to an invention relating to an abnormal sound signal blocking board (described later) that blocks an abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, and the like, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, these various commands are output. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 188).

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and a lower portion provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the door frame base board 194, and the like. The speaker 821 and the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 are controlled so that music and sound effects according to various effects are played (see FIGS. 188 and 190).

[Abnormal voice signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking board will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 and 191. FIG. 190 is a block diagram of the door frame base board 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 191 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884.

As shown in FIG. 190, the door frame base board 194 arranged on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 arranged on the main body frame 3 are connected by a wiring 196, and the periphery of the door frame base board 194 A +24V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal plate 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 through the wiring 196. It is supposed to be transmitted.

As shown in FIG. 190, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal 882 is provided. The board 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 are connected by the speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by the lower speaker harness 819.

In FIG. 191, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, the +24V voltage, the woofer + signal and the woofer which are the sound signals for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194. -The signal is relayed and transmitted to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

In addition, a configuration in which a woofer+ signal and a woofer signal that are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 are output from the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 to the lower speaker 821 and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Has been done. In this way, the audio signal output from the door frame base board 194 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884.

By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 in the main body frame 3 is less likely to be affected by electrostatic noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 is arranged at a place far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. As described above, by disposing the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 at a position where it is unlikely to be affected by the static electricity noise, it is possible to stably prevent the abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

[Circuit of abnormal sound signal blocking board]
The abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 detects whether or not the sound signal supplied to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal sound signal. The audio signal is cut off so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

As shown in FIG. 191, the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 outputs from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 that detects that the sound signal is an abnormal sound signal and outputs an abnormal sound detection signal. An abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 that cuts off the supply of the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when receiving the outputted abnormality detection signal is provided.

The +24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the +24V supply line 886 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884. The ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884.

A woofer+signal, which is a sound signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884, one of which is input to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the woofer+signal line 888 and the other is It is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

A woofer signal, which is a sound signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and one of them is relayed in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the woofer signal line 889. However, it is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal voice signal detection circuit]
The abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifying bridge circuit in which four diodes SD1 to SD4 are connected in a bridge type, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in the present embodiment, arranged in a subsequent stage of the rectifying bridge circuit). It is mainly configured by an infrared LED having a capacitance of 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the woofer + signal of the other of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. .. The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the woofer signal of the other of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifying bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to the + voltage line 890 that supplies the positive voltage rectified by the rectification bridge circuit to the latter stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the latter stage of the rectification bridge. The 0V line 891 that supplies 0V whose voltage is substantially 0V by cutting the minus part by the circuit is connected.

Then, in the latter stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the − terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (the waveform of the + voltage in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as the connection point) are electrolyzed via the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak, and during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

One end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the +voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 after the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the +voltage line 890. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, and is also connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the ripple of the +voltage waveform is removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

The collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the +voltage line 890 at the stage subsequent to the connection point of the capacitor SC2 on the +voltage line 890, and the smoothed woofer signal after rectification, that is, the +voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point of the resistors SR2 and SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7, which appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1, is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

On the other hand, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the +voltage line 890 at the subsequent stage of the connection point of the +voltage line 890 with the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on when the transistor STR2 is turned on.

[Abnormal voice signal interruption circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the other is connected to the 8th terminal (coil+input) of the relay SRL1. Has been done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

The base terminal of the transistor STR3 for relay operation is connected to the connection point of the resistors SR8 and SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

Further, the fourth terminal (the other of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer+signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 serves as an external output of the woofer+signal and is connected to the lower speaker harness 819. Through an external lower speaker 821.

Further, a varistor SZNR1 for inductive current bypass by self-induction is connected in parallel between the 8th terminal (coil+input) of the relay SRL1 and the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1, and the 5th of the relay SRL1 is connected. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the B contacts).

Since the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter from the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 to the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895. It is like this.

Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal voice signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885, in the case of a woofer+ signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conducted, In FIG. 191, current flows from the top to the bottom through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the +voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak.

When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

Then, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, and the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

In the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and a current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 191, from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, and the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

Thus, when a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 are also kept in the off state, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 is not practically turned on.

<Abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state, so that the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state. Further, the relay SRL1 is in a non-operating state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, and the B contact between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is inoperative (the contact is in a closed state) and the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal are inoperative. It is the A contact (the state where the contact is open). Therefore, the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer+signal of the woofer+signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal is input for a certain period of time] [Operation when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed DC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal sound signal (for example, a constant voltage of +24V, +18V, +1.5V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, the diode SD2 and the diode SD2 and the diode are provided in the rectification bridge circuit of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885. SD3 becomes conductive, and a charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 191, so that the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is continuously charged.

When an abnormal sound signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, the increase in the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to the increase in the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 with the passage of time is not applied. This approaches the constant voltage, and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, a current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistors SR2 and SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR2 and SR4) , A resistor SR5, a Zener diode SZD1, a resistor SR6, and a resistor SR7, a current flows, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. This turns on the transistor STR2.

When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is lowered to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 turns on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 turns on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the resistors SR8 and SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the first terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the first terminal and the second terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in an excited state, and the B contact between the terminals 5 and 6 of the relay SRL1 is in the operating state (contact is open), and the connection between the terminals 3 and 4 is in the operating state. It becomes the A contact (the state where the contact is closed). Therefore, the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are switched to the cutoff state, and the output of the woofer+signal of the woofer+signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer+signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

Moreover, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to a conducting state, the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 becomes the ground. It is pulled down and the transistor STR3 is turned off.

On the other hand, the first terminal of the relay that is connected in parallel to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows in the route of the eighth terminal, the first terminal, the third terminal, the fourth terminal, and the ground line 887. A transition to a flowing conductive state is maintained, and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 of the woofer+ signal remains blocked.

In this way, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs the abnormal detection signal (photo coupler). Turns on). When the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 receives the abnormal sound detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photo coupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. Shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of the fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the energized state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the woofer+ signal is kept cut off from the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1, Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority being to prevent speaker damage. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal voice signal can be grasped by the staff or the output stop state of the voice is confirmed, the operating state of the relay SRL1 is canceled by re-turning on the power of the gaming machine. It is possible to return to a normal initial state.

[Operation when abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when an excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width is input due to the audio signal being extremely amplified, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 become conductive, the charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 191, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain. To be done.

Further, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and the charging current flows from the top to the bottom of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

In this case, the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal audio signal. A charging current flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rapidly through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

Therefore, the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 rapidly increases. Due to this rapid increase in electric charge, the voltage of the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operations when the abnormal sound signal by the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, it will be briefly described.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and the transistor STR3 is turned on, so that the relay SRL1 operates and the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are cut off. Then, the output of the woofer+signal on the woofer+signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer+signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the abnormal sound from being generated due to the abnormal audio signal of the excessive AC voltage which is extremely amplified and exceeds the proper amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making an unpleasant sound.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 188, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. 188, a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above, and a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the above, and a character RAM 4150e for transferring and copying various data stored in this character ROM 4150d.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the first. The drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150d in time series when transferring various data to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays the sprite data on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Drawing data is generated and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, it outputs a running signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP4150c adopts a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the left-right direction is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when various people are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device are set such that these sprites are set in a position on the screen or in a vertical relationship when the sprites are overlapped with each other (hereinafter, referred to as "order of sprite superposition"). 3252.

The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, one character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used for expression. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, more characters can be used for expression. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 have main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from the left to the right when viewed from the front thereof, and the main scanning intersecting the one direction. The sub-scanning is performed by repeatedly performing the main scanning in the direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the liquid crystal display device 1900 moves from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. And sequentially output to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, the next line is drawn. Based on the drawing data for one minute, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line as main scanning from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[3-5. Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 202. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the starting mouth winning process. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process.

Further, FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination processing, which is one of the jackpot game preparation processing. FIG. 202 is an example of a table used for the jackpot game mode determination process when the jackpot flag is ON. FIG. 203 is an example of a table used for the jackpot game mode determination process when the game ball passes through the right gate at the time of winning the normal type jackpot. FIG. 204 is an example of a table used for the jackpot game mode determination process when the game ball passes through the left gate during the normal type jackpot win. The timer interrupt process is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

[About main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 192, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is the set value at the time of power failure), and if it is normal. If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU are set (normal initial settings), according to the backup data stored in the RAM. , Interrupt timing, etc.).

When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. If the RAM clear switch 624a for instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is on, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, when backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 is activated to the peripheral control unit 4140 when the normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress status of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is cut off. The backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, the power-on process is executed.

When this power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for games. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, Supply to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the power supply board stops supplying the power supply voltage to the main control board 4100. Sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects the power failure advance notice signal in step S2, the power failure occurrence process is executed (step S4).

This processing at the time of power failure occurs, when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) as backup data in order to start from. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not an interrupt processing but a branch processing executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal detection. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[About processing when power is cut off]
Next, as shown in FIG. 193, the power failure occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure advance notice signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU 4100a first makes an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained when the power is restored.

Then, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the processing at the time of power failure occurred in the backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). Upon completion of the above processing, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In addition, in this process, when the power supply interruption process is started due to the power supply voltage becoming unstable due to a power failure for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”), Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset unless the watchdog timer is updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is regularly updated while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even if the power-off occurrence process is entered due to the instantaneous power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on, after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[About timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during execution of the main processing, and as shown in FIG. The control MPU 4100a executes the process of saving the registers (step S10), and then executes the processes of step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signals of the above-described switches (gate switch, starting port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number updating process 2 may be updated in the random number updating process 1. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of gaming balls is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the special control processing of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol display devices 1185 and 1186 based on the progress state of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, by the attacker solenoid 2121). The opening/closing member 2106 which opens and closes the special winning opening 2103 is controlled to execute a process of changing the open/closed state of the special winning opening 2103. In the normal control processing of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress state of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, the pair of movable pieces 2105 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2102 by the starting opening solenoid 2344) is controlled. Then, the process of changing the open/closed state of the second starting port 2102 is executed.

In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), a drive signal is output to a special figure starting memory display (not shown). Processing, and so on. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to the peripheral control unit 4140 is also performed. When the processing from step S11 to step S17 is executed, the register return processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing ends.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used in the determination of whether to generate the jackpot gaming state (also called jackpot determination, jackpot lottery), the jackpot gaming state in the jackpot determination Random number for jackpot symbols used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be generated, whether high expectation production such as reach production is performed when it is determined that it is not a jackpot in the jackpot lottery (miss) Reach determination random number used for determination as to whether or not (reach determination), variable display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern (variation time etc.) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 1185, 1186 (Random time random numbers), a round determination random number used to determine the opening mode (number of rounds, etc.) of the special winning opening 2103 in the jackpot game (special bonus game), and a pair of movable movable second opening/closing ports 2102. There is a random number for normal win determination, which is used to determine whether to control the piece 2105 in the open state (normal lottery win determination).

In addition, the jackpot symbol random number is also used for a determination regarding a jackpot state type (whether or not the probability variation function or the time saving function is activated) performed when it is determined that the jackpot is won.

Of these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, whether or not to control the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the round determination random number, and the pair of movable pieces 2105 related to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, in the open state. Update the related random number per ordinary symbol. That is, the random numbers used for the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and the determination regarding whether to control the pair of movable pieces 2105 in the open state are updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to make the probability (probability of determining to generate the jackpot gaming state, probability of determining to control the pair of movable pieces 2105 to be in the open state) constant for each random number in a predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the jackpot gaming state is generated, and the reach determination random number not related to the ordinary lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

Although not shown in FIG. 194, in the timer interrupt process, the receiving unit 2550 (more specifically, the movable valve 2551 fixed to the front end of the movable shaft 2552) is rotated regardless of the game state. A drive control process for the acceptance drive motor 2558 is also performed.

[Special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

In this special control process, first, a first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed. In the first/second starting opening winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102. Then, after the first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed, a process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from among a plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the drawing. Will be done.

More specifically, when the first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is completed, it is first determined whether or not the process flag is 0 (step S120), and if the process flag is 0 ( The YES in step S120) and the fluctuation start process (step S130) are executed. In this variation start process (step S130), the process flag is updated to "1" after the setting for starting the variable display of the special symbol is made based on the result of the lottery for the big hit or the like. ..

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 or the second special symbol display device 1186 (first special symbol display device 1185 or second special symbol display device) In any of 1186, the processing flag is updated to "2" after the variation time from the start of variable display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display is determined).

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the special special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 is special. Stop the variable display of symbols. After that, when it is determined in the variation start process (step S130) that the jackpot is won, the process selection flag is updated to "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (miss), the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process (step S130).

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the jackpot game preparation process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game preparation process, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to perform the process of determining the aspect of the jackpot game and the determined jackpot game aspect (for example, the number of rounds. ) Is set, and the accessory continuous operation device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated, and the processing flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

If the process flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), the process flag is 4 and the jackpot game process (step S210) is executed. In this jackpot game process, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled based on the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607). When the jackpot game is over, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing for stopping the operation of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process (step S130).

In this way, the special control process ends when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, and step S210 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag.

[Regarding the first and second starting mouth prize processing]
Next, the first/second starting mouth winning process (process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. 196. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second starting mouth winning a prize process.

In the first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110), roughly, the process of determining whether a game ball has been won in the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102, and the winning On the condition that it is determined that there is, a process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 3132, it is determined that the game ball is won in the second starting opening 2102 (YES in step S201). The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of this step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, etc.) are acquired, and are provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a, first, as the second start pending storage process (step S203), various data obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 (random number for jackpot determination, jackpot symbol) Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as the hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

In the process of step 203, a winning notification command indicating that there is a winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 2102 (more accurately, the type of the special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like displays the hold display on the side of the second starting port 2102, it can be promptly updated through the control of the peripheral control unit 4140.

On the other hand, in the process of step S201, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 3132 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that the value is 4, then, as the process of step S205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first starting port sensor 3131. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 3131, it is determined that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 (YES in step S205), and Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery are obtained (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.), and the value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a, first, as the first start pending storage process (step S207), various data obtained by the game ball winning the first start opening 2101 (random number for jackpot determination, jackpot symbol random number) Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as the holding history update processing (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM.

Even in the process of step 207, a prize notification command indicating that there is a prize for the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (more accurately, the type of the special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, the peripheral control unit 4140 can control the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like to promptly update the pending display on the first starting opening 2101 side.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that there is no winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first/second starting mouth winning process is ended at this point.

Further, as will be described later, in the main control MPU4100a according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, it is a big hit together with a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, and the like. A random number for determining a game mode (for example, a random number for determining the number of rounds) is never acquired. Therefore, the big hit game mode determination random number is not obtained in this way, and the open mode at the special winning opening 2103 remains undecided (mid-stage stage of a series of lottery processing for executing the big hit game), and the special symbol The game will be progressed by determining the variation pattern and the stop pattern. Note that the jackpot game mode determination random number is obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) after the special symbol is stopped, and the jackpot described later is determined at that time. It will be provided to the jackpot game mode determination process under the form (see FIG. 201).

In this embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting opening 2102 (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting opening 2101 (steps S205 to S208) is executed. There is. However, instead of this, a mode in which the winning process for the second starting port 2102 is executed after the winning process for the first starting port 2101 is executed may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a may execute the leading determination process based on the obtained various random numbers, and may send a command indicating the result of the leading determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The preceding determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the jackpot lottery, the probability variation lottery, and the determination of the variable display pattern described below), and the lottery result is determined in advance. Is. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The leading determination table is the same table as the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the preceding judgment process, the random number and the preceding judgment table are compared to judge the lottery result (a big hit, a big hit type, a variation display pattern, etc.) when the lottery is performed using the random number. (In this way, the determination performed prior to the lottery is also referred to as “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect that reflects the received winning notification command (advance determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is "prefetching". Also referred to as "staging").

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the advance determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the advance determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start process.

In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the values of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol displays 1185 and 1186 (first starting memory). It is determined whether both the number and the second starting memory number are “0” (step S301). Here, with the value in the two reservation number counters corresponding to the special symbol display 1185, 1186, the storage area for the first starting memory and the second starting memory (disorder stored in the special symbol reservation storage means 4214, 4224) Therefore, if the values of the number-of-holds counter are all “0” in this step S301 (YES), the variation process of the first special symbol and the variation process of the second special symbol are performed. When it is determined that none of the starting conditions are satisfied, and the process flag is updated to "1" as the process of step S318, the fluctuation start process is ended.

On the other hand, if neither the first starting memory number nor the second starting memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), it is determined that the starting condition is satisfied, and execution of the jackpot lottery that is on hold. In order to update the order of the above, shift processing in the special symbol reservation storage means 4214, 4224 is performed (steps S302 to S310).

Incidentally, each of the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224 is provided with four storage areas. In each of these storage areas, a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing jackpot determination random numbers and a jackpot symbol random number storage for storing jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, and the like. Regions and are respectively provided.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately operates the random numbers stored in these storage means 4214 and 4224 as shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol changes. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, the game is played. There is no difference in the expected value of profits (number of award balls that can be acquired, etc.) given to players.

In the shift processing in the random number storage area (steps S302 to S310), the execution of the lottery for the first special symbol is always postponed, and the lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) based on the winning of the second starting opening 2102 is performed. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4214 and 4224 are operated so that they are all digested first.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 197, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol display device 1186 which is the side that is preferentially consumed. It is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-holds counter (second starting storage number) corresponding to is 0, that is, whether or not a random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol holding storage unit 4224. As a result, when it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 (NO in step S302), the random number related to the second special symbol is read out from the storage area and this is used. It is acquired (step S303). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers thus read out (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, random numbers for reach determination, random display pattern random numbers) are, of course, processing for the lottery for jackpots, as well as fluctuation patterns of special symbols (variation (Time, stop display mode, etc.), processing for setting the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing member 2106, processing for setting the game state, etc. The second starting game triggered by the winning of the ball can be progressed.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates various random numbers stored in each n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area in order to update the digestion order of the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, n- Each is shifted to the first storage area (step S304). As a result, at least the storage area becomes vacant, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the vacancy has occurred.

Then, after this, the main control MPU 4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" so that the game on the second special symbol side (second starting game) is shown to be in a state of progress (step S305). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations involved in the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, the number of reservations counter corresponding to the second special symbol is decremented by "1" (step S306). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 1187 so that the number of holdings for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side thus updated is also reflected in the lighting mode of the second special symbol storage display 1187. Is done. The special symbol variation flag set to "1" is reset after the variation start process is completed, for example, when the process flag is updated to "0".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 197, in the process of step S302, when it is determined that the random number is not stored in the storage area of the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 (YES in step S302), A random number related to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area of the one special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and is acquired (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers thus read are not only processing related to the jackpot lottery, but also processing related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, processing related to the setting of the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing member 2106, and the setting of the game state. By being subjected to the processing, etc., the first starting game triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 can be progressed.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates various random numbers stored in each n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area in order to update the digestion order related to the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side, n- Each is shifted to the first storage area (step S308). As a result, at least a storage area becomes vacant, and new starting information (holding) for the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the vacancy has occurred.

Then, after this, the main control MPU 4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "2" so that the game on the first special symbol side (first starting game) is shown to be in a state of progressing (step S309). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations required for the first special symbol lottery (variation), the number of reservations counter corresponding to the first special symbol is decremented by "1" (step S310). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 1184 so that the number of holdings for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol memory display 1184. Is done. Note that the special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this way is also reset after the variation start process is completed, for example, when the process flag is updated to "0".

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312), and if it is not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation function is not activated. Jackpot determination table, that is, a table in which the probability of being a jackpot is set to be low is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), a table at the time of probability fluctuation operation, that is, a probability of being a jackpot is selected. Select a table that is set high. In this example, the probability of being a big hit is set to 1/320 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, the normal time), and the probability of being a big hit is 10 when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, a high probability). It is set to /320.

In the process of step S313 or step S314, after any table is selected, the jackpot determination random number regarding any special symbol obtained in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is a random number (big hit value) corresponding to (step S315). Then, if the jackpot value (YES in step S315), based on the jackpot symbol random number relating to any of the special symbols, which is also acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307, the jackpot, the probability It is determined whether or not it is of a type (state type relating to a game state) that activates the variable function and the time saving function (step S316). As a result, the flag corresponding to the jackpot state type determined in the process of step S316 is turned on (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318. The jackpot symbol random number is, for example, a random number from 0 to 9, and when the jackpot symbol random number acquired from these is 7, for example, the jackpot flag of the specific type is turned on in step S317.

However, in the process of step S316, the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment leaves the lottery related to the mode (round number) of the jackpot game as a process that has not been performed yet. And as will be described later, in the same lottery, after the special symbol (identification symbol) is stopped and displayed, the game ball passes through the gate 2575 and at least until the jackpot game mode determination random number is acquired, the state is in an unexecuted state. By doing so, some of the lottery processing (eg, lottery related to the number of rounds) of the series of lottery processing (game lottery related to the progress of the game) related to the execution of the jackpot game has not been performed yet. While in the middle of the process, the special symbol starts changing and is stopped and displayed.

In such a configuration, a lottery process according to a mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) that may affect the profit itself that the player can enjoy until the special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the jackpot (special win). This is left unexecuted without being performed. That is, in this case, even if the special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the big hit, a series of lottery processes (game lottery related to the progress of the game) involved in the execution of the big hit game are not finished and the processing stage still in the middle (after winning) Since the execution mode of the game is not determined yet, it is maintained in a state in which the execution of the game cannot be performed after winning. Moreover, with regard to these mid-stage processing steps as the above-mentioned game lottery, since the game ball can be maintained until it is newly launched by the player and the game ball is accepted at the gate 2575, it is based on the winning of the jackpot. Even after the special symbol is stopped, until the jackpot game is started, the expected effect about the result of the above-mentioned game lottery is performed under the condition that the information cannot be exposed by, for example, the round display 1190. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the gaming interest until the jackpot game is actually executed.

On the other hand, if the acquired random number is a loss that is not the jackpot value (NO in step S315), the process proceeds to step S318, the process flag is updated to "1", and the fluctuation start process ends. When the processing flag is updated to [1] in step S318, the processing of step S301 is not performed unless the processing flag is updated to [0]. ..

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether the lottery is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, as described above as the jackpot symbol random number, for example, in a random number range of 0-9. A random number value to be generated is prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random number values is acquired as the value of the jackpot symbol random number. Then, the obtained random number value is provided to a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot state type that activates the probability varying function or the time saving function in the process of step S316.

However, in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607) to be described later, opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is repeated in a predetermined opening and closing pattern for a maximum of 15 rounds. (In the present embodiment, 9 round jackpot game repeated over 9 rounds, and 3 round jackpot game, 6 round jackpot game and 12 round jackpot game which repeats opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 over a non-maximum number of rounds in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. One of them will be decided.

The predetermined opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing member 2106 means that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) has elapsed after the opening/closing member 2106 was changed from the closed state to the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 9 seconds). This is a pattern in which the opening/closing member 2106 is returned to the closed state when any one of the conditions that the (individual) game balls win the special winning opening 2103 is satisfied. Therefore, the larger the number of rounds in which the opening/closing member 2106 is repeatedly executed in the predetermined opening/closing pattern, the more prize balls (about 1750 in this embodiment) as a benefit can be substantially acquired by the player. .. In the jackpot game mode determination process in the present embodiment, a lottery of the number of rounds that is repeatedly executed in the jackpot game is performed, but a plurality of prize balls that the player can obtain differ in some degree. It is not limited to this as long as it is determined to be one of the jackpot game modes. For example, instead of the jackpot game mode which is repeated over a plurality of rounds in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, the opening/closing member 2106 is opened once, but the opening/closing member 2106 is opened for a long time as a jackpot game mode. Good.

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the lottery (step S315) according to the winning of the jackpot will be described. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

As shown in FIG. 198, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the jackpot flag to “ON” as the process of step S401. Or not. As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is "ON" (YES in step S401), the jackpot variation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that the variation pattern when the jackpot is won is set. Perform (step S402).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not “ON” in the process of step S401, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is performed, as the process of step S403. As a result, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (YES in step S403), the reach-miss variation pattern setting process is performed so that the variation pattern of the reach effect is set although it is a loss (step S404). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S403 that the reach effect is not performed, as the process of step S405, the non-reach lose variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the lose effect is performed without the reach effect. I do.

The table set in the non-reach lost variation pattern table setting process is prepared in such a manner as to be associated with each of a plurality of game states, and for example, in the normal game state, the number of holdings is a predetermined value or more. At certain times, shortening fluctuations are being made.

Then, when the selection table relating to the variation pattern is set in any of the processes of step S402, step S404, and step S405, the main control MPU 4100a then performs the process of step S410 as the set selection table. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on. Next, as the processing of step S411, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol thus determined is set as an effect command, and the winning information command (such as a big win or the like) is set.

Furthermore, the value of the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When this special figure LED operation flag is set to ON, based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309, the first special symbol display device 1185 or the second special symbol The variable display concerning the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the display device 1186 is started. Then, after that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing ends.

By the way, the variation pattern set by the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 194 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. .. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140. Display effect will be performed.

[About changing process]
Next, the changing process (step S180) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process.

As shown in FIG. 199, in the changing process (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a first, as the process of step S501, changes time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 198). Will determine if the time is up. If the changing time set in the timer has not expired (NO in step S501), the changing process ends.

If the variable time set in the timer is up (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When this special figure LED operation flag is set to OFF, based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309, the first special symbol display device 1185 or the second special symbol The variable display (variation of the special symbol) related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the display device 1186 will be ended. Further, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performing the display effect for the jackpot lottery, in order to end the display effect, a confirmation stop command indicating that the effect result in the display effect should be fixedly displayed to the peripheral control unit 4140. Is set (step S503). The confirmation stop command is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the same display effect is definitely displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S504). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to "3" as the special symbol is in the processing stage in which the variation is stopped to indicate that the jackpot is won (step S505). Then, the changing process is ended. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is not ON and is a losing hit to the jackpot (NO in step S504), the processing flag is determined to be in the processing stage in which the special symbol is variably stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot is hit. Is updated to "0" (step S508), and the changing process is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbol will be performed on condition that it is held and consumed in the process of step S130.

[About the jackpot game preparation process]
Next, the jackpot game preparation process (step S200) executed when the process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process.

As shown in FIG. 200, in the jackpot game preparation process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first starts the operation of the condition device as one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game (step S604). .. When the time saving function is operating (YES in step S605), the operation of the time saving function is stopped based on the start of the operation of the condition device (step S606), and the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607) is performed. To do. When it is determined in step S605 that the time saving function is not operating (NO in step S605), step S606 is skipped and the process proceeds to the jackpot game mode determination process of step S607. Although not shown in FIG. 200, when the condition device operates, the route detection sensor 2580R and the route detection sensor 2580L are activated based on this.

The jackpot game mode determination process executed in step S608 is one process of the jackpot game preparation process, and the jackpot game mode determination process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination process, and FIG. 202 is an example of a table used in the jackpot game mode determination process.

As shown in FIG. 201, in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607), the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not there is a detection by the route detection sensor 2580R (step S6071). When the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R (YES in step S6071), it is not determined whether or not the route detection sensor 2580L detects the game ball even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L. That is, when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R while the condition device is operating (YES in step S6071), the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580L even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L. Will be invalidated. On the other hand, the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580R is invalidated when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, even if it is validated by the operation of the condition device. Specifically, when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L under the condition device being activated (YES in step S6075), even if the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R after that, the route detection sensor 2580R detects the game ball. The presence or absence of is never judged. That is, when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L while the condition device is operating (YES in step S6075), even if the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R, the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580R is performed. Will be invalidated.

In addition, when the passage of the game ball to the right gate 2575R is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R in step S6071 (YES in step S6071), the jackpot flag in the flag ON state, that is, the jackpot flag turned ON in step S317 is identified. It is determined whether or not the type is a jackpot flag (step S6072). Here, if the jackpot flag of the specific type is ON (YES in step S6072), the jackpot game mode is determined with reference to the right gate column of the table in FIG. 202 (step S6073). That is, the "15" round is decided as the jackpot gaming mode with the lottery probability of "100%". On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6072 that the specific type jackpot flag is not ON (that is, the normal type jackpot flag is ON) (NO in step S6072), the jackpot game mode is referred to with reference to the table in FIG. It is determined (step S6074). That is, the "9" round is decided as the jackpot gaming mode with the lottery probability of "100%".

If the route detection sensor 2580R has not detected the game ball in step S6071 (NO in step S6071), it is determined whether the route detection sensor 2580L has detected the game ball (step S6075). Then, when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L in step S6075 (YES in step S6075), whether the jackpot flag in the flag ON state, that is, the jackpot flag turned ON in step S317 is a jackpot flag of a specific type. It is determined whether or not (step S6076). Here, if the jackpot flag of the specific type is ON (YES in step S6076), the "15" round is determined as the jackpot game mode with reference to the left gate column of the table in FIG. 202 (step S6077). .. That is, the "15" round is decided as the jackpot gaming mode with the lottery probability of "100%". On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6076 that the specific type jackpot flag is not ON (that is, the normal type jackpot flag is ON) (NO in step S6076), the table of FIG. 204(a) is referred to. The lottery pattern is determined to be any one of the a pattern, the b pattern, and the c pattern (step S6078). Then, it is determined that the game ball has passed through the big hit mode determination gate 3660, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the big hit mode determination gate detection sensor (step S6079). When it is determined that the game ball is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor (YES in step S6079), the lottery pattern (determined in step 6078 (refer to the table in FIG. 204B) is determined. Based on any one of the a pattern, the b pattern, and the c pattern), it is determined to be a big hit game of any of the 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds, and 15 rounds (step S6080).

Explaining in detail the processing of step S6080 described above, when the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 is the a pattern, as shown in FIG. 204(b), there is a 25% probability of three-round jackpot game, There is a 25% chance of a 6-round jackpot game, a 25% chance of a 12-round jackpot game, and a 25% chance of a 15-round jackpot game. When the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 is the b pattern, there is a 40% probability of a 3-round jackpot game, a 30% probability of a 6-round jackpot game, and a 25% probability of a 12-round jackpot game. There is a 5% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot game. Further, when the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 is the c pattern, there is a 5% probability of a 3-round jackpot game, a 25% probability of a 6-round jackpot game, and a 30% probability of a 12-round jackpot game. There is a 40% chance of winning each of the 15 rounds of jackpot games.

However, as can be seen by referring to the table of FIG. 203, the table of FIG. 204(a) and the table of FIG. 204(b), when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R). When the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L), the mode of the jackpot game executed is different, but is paid out during the jackpot game. The expected value of the prize ball amount is the same (not necessarily limited to the same exact match, and includes equivalent ones as long as the game property is not impaired).

When the mode of the big hit game (the number of rounds in this example) is determined in step S6073, step S6074, step S6077 or step S6078, the process proceeds to step S6081 and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is started. Then, based on the fact that the accessory continuous operation device has operated, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S6082). If it is determined in step S6082 that the probability varying function is operating (YES in step S6082), the probability varying function is stopped in step S6083, and the process proceeds to step S6084. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6082 that the probability variation function is not operating (NO in step S6082), step S6032 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6084.

In step S6084, the main control MPU 4100a sets the operation mode of the special winning opening 2103 based on the jackpot game mode determined in the process of step S6073, step S6074, step S6077 or step S6080. With the operation mode of the special winning opening 2103, for example, in addition to the maximum number of rounds of the round game in which the big winning opening 2103 is repeatedly opened in the jackpot game, a game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 in each round game. The opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 in the jackpot game is set such as the upper limit number (for example, 9) and the opening/closing operation time limit of the opening/closing member 2106 in each round game (step S6084). Next, a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is started, a round information command indicating the determined number of rounds, the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is already being played, etc. are set. Yes (step S6085).

Note that, as will be described later, the jackpot start command and the round information command thus set are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 194, so that in the liquid crystal display device 1900, Through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side, the display effect during the jackpot game can be selectively executed as an effect associated with the determined number of rounds.

As described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment, even if the condition device is operating, the next process is performed unless the passage of the game ball to the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) is detected. The big hit game is not executed until the passage of the game ball to the gate 2575 (the left gate 2575L, the right gate 2575R) is detected without proceeding to.

In step S6086, the jackpot start interval effect command is set, then the jackpot start interval effect timer is set to, for example, 8 seconds (step S6087), and the jackpot game mode determination processing is ended. The jackpot start interval effect is a display effect that is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 from when the accessory continuous operation device is activated until the opening/closing of the opening/closing member 2106 is started. Is a display effect or the like indicating that is started.

When the jackpot game mode determination process of step S607 ends, the process proceeds to step S609, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start interval effect set in step S6087 is timed up, and if it is timed out (YES in step S609). Assuming that the jackpot start interval effect has ended, the processing flag is updated to "4" (step S610), and the changing processing is ended.

[About the jackpot game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S210) executed when the process flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process.

As shown in FIG. 205, in the big hit game process (step S210), the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the special winning opening 2103 is open as the process of step S801. If it is being opened (YES in step S801), then as the processing of step S802, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the special winning opening 2103 is set in the processing of step S803 (see FIG. 201). It is determined whether the open/close operation time limit has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening/closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S802), the opening/closing member 2106 is closed to close the special winning opening 2103 (step S804).

However, even when it is determined in the process of step S802 that the set opening/closing operation time limit has not yet elapsed (NO in step S802), the same operation is performed after the special winning opening 2103 is opened. When the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 2103 is equal to or more than the upper limit number (for example, 9) set in the process of step S803 (YES in step S803), the above step S804. Then, the special winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, when the set opening/closing operation time limit has not yet passed (NO in step S802), and the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 2103 has not reached the upper limit, either. (NO in step S803), with the special winning opening 2103 maintained in the open state, the big hit game process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S801 that the special winning opening 2103 is not open, the number of times the big winning opening 2103 is opened (the number of round games) by the opening/closing member 2106 is the above step S803 (FIG. 201). It is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds set in the processing of (see) has been reached (step S805). When it has not reached (NO in step S805), the opening/closing member 2106 is operated to open the special winning opening 2103 (step S806), and the big hit game process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of step S805, when it is determined that the round game has already been played for the maximum number of rounds, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, so that a big hit (a hit with the operation of the condition device) ), the operation of the opening/closing member 2106 (big hit game) performed on the condition that the player is elected to) is switched to a state in which it is impossible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processes of steps S807 to S812, so that, for example, in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 197), the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is provided separately from the jackpot flag. The jackpot game process is ended after the gaming state after the jackpot game is set based on the jackpot winning type stored as the execution trigger of the jackpot game. In addition, the winning type here refers to whether or not it is a winning type that activates the probability variation function and the time saving function.

In the process of step S805, when it is determined that the round game has already been played for the maximum number of rounds (YES in step S805), first, the jackpot flag and the jackpot playing flag are each turned off ( (Step S807), the winning type of the big hit that is the trigger to execute the big hit game is determined (steps S808, S810). Here, in the process of step S808, it is determined whether or not it is a winning species (random numbers for jackpot symbols are 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9) for operating the probability varying function. As a result, when it is determined that the winning species is not the one that activates the probability varying function, the process proceeds to step S811 without activating either the probability varying function or the time saving function. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S808 that the winning type is the one that activates the probability varying function, the probability varying function is activated (step S809) and the time saving function is activated (step S810). Then, the process proceeds to step S811. Step S811 is a process of stopping the operation of the condition device. When the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S811), when the processing flag is set to "0" (step S812), the big hit game processing is ended.

According to such a jackpot game process, until the round game is determined to have reached the maximum number of rounds in the process of step 805, the special winning opening 2103 is opened according to the type of the big hit (step S802). , S803 and S805), the game is repeatedly opened, and eventually the player can obtain prize balls according to the type of jackpot.

[4. Game contents]
The game contents in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 189 and the like. It should be noted that the functional configuration relating to the payout of gaming balls is omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls and effect controls are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. When a detection signal of a game ball is input from the gate sensor 2302 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number which is a result of a lottery for a normal symbol, and a generated normal random number are predetermined. Normal symbol reserve storage means 4202 that temporarily stores according to the condition, and the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number stored on the normal symbol reserve storage means 4202 and executed, the ROM of the main control board 4100. Normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 to be selected from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in, and a normal symbol display control means for varying and displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern. 4206, when the normal random number (normal lottery result) displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 by the normal symbol display control means 4206 is “normal hit”, the starting opening solenoid 2114 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105. The starting opening opening and closing control means 4208 for, and the normal symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying the normal symbol storage display 1188 as the number of ordinary symbol random numbers reserved and stored in the normal symbol retaining storage means 4202 are provided. There is.

The above-mentioned normal symbol hold storage means 4202 is a normal random number generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2302 as a trigger while the normal symbol is being displayed by the normal symbol display control means 4206. ) Is stored, the execution of the stored ordinary random numbers is suspended until the variable display of the ordinary symbols becomes possible.

In addition, on the main control board 4100, a first predetermined lottery result which is a first special lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start opening sensor 3131 by the start winning of the first start opening 2101. First special random number generation means 4212 for generating a special random number, first special random number generated in the first special random number generation means 4212 first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 for temporarily storing according to a predetermined condition, The first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special random number stored on the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and executed, the predetermined special symbol variation display pattern pre-stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100 First special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4216 to be selected from the table, and the first special symbol of the first special symbol display device 1185 based on the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4216. First special symbol display control means 4218 to be variably displayed, and the first special symbol storage indicator 1184 to be displayed as the number of the first special random numbers reserved and stored by the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 as the stored number. A symbol memory number display control means 4220 is provided. Although not shown in FIG. 189, the main control board 4100 is further provided with a first jackpot symbol random number generating means and a second jackpot symbol random number generating means. When the first special lottery result is a big hit, the random number generated by the first big hit symbol random number generating means is acquired, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined. Similarly, when the second special lottery result is a big hit, the random number generated by the second big hit symbol random number generating means is acquired, and the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined.

Further, on the main control board 4100, based on the detection signal detected by the second starting opening sensor 3132 by the starting winning into the second starting opening 2102, a predetermined second which is a second special lottery result for the second special symbol. A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number, and a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 4222 according to a predetermined condition, The second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number stored on the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224 and executed, the predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 Second special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4226 selected from the table, and the second special symbol display of the second special symbol indicator 1186 based on the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4226. Second special symbol display control means 4228 to be variably displayed, and the second special symbol display indicator 1187 to be displayed as the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol storage storage means 4224 as a stored number. It is provided with a symbol memory number display control means 4230.

These first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224, the first and second special symbol display control means 4218, 4228 newly and special symbols such as the first and second special symbols are variably displayed. When it is not possible to variably display, the first special random number and the second special random number triggered by the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3131 and the second starting port sensor 3132 are each a predetermined number (for example, four each). ) Is stored, and the execution of the stored first special random number and second special random number is suspended until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible.

In the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the second special random number retained by the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224, the start winning prize to the starting ports 2101 and 2102. It is provided with a priority holding digestion means 4231 which preferentially executes (digests) the second special random number rather than timing, and the priority holding digestion means 4231 relates to the second special random number, that is, the second starting port 2102. The hold of the lottery result is given priority (execution).

Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number (first special lottery result) and the second special random number (second) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224. An advantageous game state generating means 4232 for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous based on the special lottery result), and an opening/closing member 2106 for closing the special winning opening 2103 based on an instruction from the advantageous game state generating means 4232. It is provided with a special winning opening opening/closing control means 4234 for controlling the drive of the attacker solenoid 2121 so as to open/close in a predetermined pattern.

Further, on the main control board 4100, according to the first special random number and the second special random number (first special symbol variation pattern or second special symbol variation pattern) in which the advantageous game state is generated by the advantageous game state generation means 4232, It further comprises a variation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the first special symbol variation pattern table and the second special symbol variation pattern table. This fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 is changed to, for example, a fluctuation pattern table (for example, a high-probability fluctuation pattern table) in which a fluctuation pattern in which an advantageous gaming state occurs is selected with a higher probability than a normal fluctuation pattern table ( So-called, probability change), change to a change pattern table (for example, time-shortening change pattern table) where the change time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is shorter than the normal change pattern table (so-called, shortened time), There is a higher probability that the advantageous gaming state occurs than usual, and the change pattern table (for example, the probability variation short time variation pattern table) with a short variation time of the special symbol is changed (so-called, probability variation/time reduction).

In this example, the advantageous game state generating means 4232 is adapted to receive a detection signal from the route detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R), and in accordance with the detection signal from the route detection sensor 2580, You can decide the jackpot form.

Further, the main control board 4100, the normal random number, the first special random number, according to the second special random number, the normal symbol variation pattern, the first symbol variation pattern, the second symbol variation pattern, and the first special symbol storage, A command generating means 4238 for generating a predetermined control command such as an effect command based on the second special symbol storage, and a command transmitting means 4240 for transmitting the command generated by the command generating means 4238 to the peripheral control section 4140. It has and.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are transparent. The game is started by being driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the panel 1200. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 1100 will flow down in the game area 1100 on the left side or the right side above the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls are brought into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is restrained, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed.

When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center character 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails or inclined upper surfaces of the peripheral wall portion 2503 cause the center. It is guided to the area on the left side of the accessory 2500. Further, when the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center character 2500, it enters the receiving space 2530 through the receiving/entry passage 2545. After being sent, it is discharged into the game area 1100 on the upstream side of the special winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 arranged on the downstream side of the gate portion 2301 and the stage 2510 via the guide passage 2540.

Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 enters and passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2302, based on the detection signal, the main In the control board 4100, the ordinary random number generation means 4200 generates an ordinary random number as the ordinary lottery result. Then, based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the ordinary symbol display device 1189 consisting of one LED is alternately emitted in red, green, and orange), A normal symbol based on an ordinary random number (ordinary lottery result) that is extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (ordinary symbol indicator 1189 emits red or green) .. The variation display of this normal symbol is to be performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204.

Specifically, when the ordinary random number drawn is a “normal hit” random number, a stop symbol is displayed with an ordinary symbol that suggests a hit (ordinary symbol indicator 1189 emits a green light), and the ordinary random number is a “ordinary lost” random number. In the case of, it is designed to be stopped and displayed with a normal symbol that suggests a loss (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal pattern that suggests a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 that closes the second starting opening 2102 expands for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first (2) A game ball can be won in the starting port 2102.

The variation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 in the second starting opening 2102 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later, for example, a special random number (special When “shortening per hour (including normal short working hours, high-probability short working hours, etc.)” is extracted as the lottery result), the variation time or the expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern can be easily changed by replacing it with a different table.

By the way, in the present example, while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 in a varying manner, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2302, the changing normal symbol is stopped and is normally generated/extracted first. Until the result of the random number is confirmed, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2302 is temporarily stored in the normal symbol holding storage means 4202 and its display is displayed. It is designed to be held, and the number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of holdings) is normally displayed on the symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display device 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of memorized LEDs is used to suggest the number of memories, and in this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. It should be noted that if the number of stored memory exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2302 is discarded.

In addition, the game ball which is driven into the game area 1100 and flows down the left side of the center role object 2500 is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 below the center role object 2500 by the shelves 2202 and 2203 of the front side unit 2200. It is designed to be used. Then, when the game balls enter the general winning openings 2104, 2201 arranged below the center accessory 2500 and are detected by the general winning opening sensors 2123, 3133, the main control board 4100 detects the detected signals based on the detection signals. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are generated. , Are to be paid out to the upper plate 301.

In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning openings 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the special winning opening 2103, the game is played. The area 1100 is provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, and is discharged from the outlet 1232 (1151) to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of which of the general winning openings 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the special winning opening 2103, the winning game balls are returned to the game area 1100. It is designed to be discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being lost.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2504 opening on the left side surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2504 is supplied from the warp exit 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and is the lowest position mainly after rolling the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction. Is emitted from the front. Then, the game ball released forward from the first stage 2511 is supplied to the second stage 2512 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2511, and is the most after rolling the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction. It is released forward from the lowered central part.

The game ball released forward from the second stage 2512 is supplied to the third stage 2513 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the second stage 2512, and becomes the lowest after rolling the third stage 2513 in the left-right direction. Is released backward from the site where it was released. Then, the game ball released from the third stage 2513 is a fourth stage arranged below the third stage 2513 on the left and right sides of the second stage 2512 between the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511. After being supplied to the second stage 2514 and rolling the fourth stage 2514 in the left-right direction, the fourth stage 2514 is discharged downward from the drop hole 2514a. Furthermore, the game ball discharged downward from the drop hole 2514a of the fourth stage 2514 is supplied to the fifth stage 2515 arranged immediately below the fourth stage 2514, and after rolling the fifth stage 2515 in the left-right direction. , Is discharged to the front from the lowest part on both the left and right sides with the center in the left-right direction interposed, and is returned to the game area 1100.

When a game ball rolling on this stage 2510 enters the first chance entrance 2516 of the first stage 2511 or the second chance entrance 2517 of the second stage 2512, the chance exit 2518 opened immediately above the first starting entrance 2101. It is released into the game area 1100 and is likely to be accepted into the first starting port 2101. Then, when the game ball is received by the first starting port 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 3131, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 and the like. Are to be dispensed to the upper plate 301.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the gaming ball emitted from the stage 2510 is the first with a high probability. It is designed to be received in the starting opening 2101 and the like, and when the second starting opening 2102 is receivable, there is a high possibility that it will be accepted when the game ball is released from the stage 2510, so not only the first starting opening 2101 Also for the second starting opening 2102, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding acceptance of the game ball and enhance the interest.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball is hit so as to flow down on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is moved to the upstream side of the special winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 through the receiving space 2530 or the like. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2103 is receivable, the game ball can be accepted into the special winning opening 2103 with a high probability. Therefore, in the game state in which the special winning opening 2103 can be received, it is possible to perform the driving operation of the game ball such that the game ball rolls in the receiving space 2530. In other words, in a game state in which the special winning opening 2103 can be received, by only hitting the game ball with a certain force or more, the game ball can pass through the receiving space 2530 and be received in the big winning opening 2103 with a high probability. It is like this.

By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate member 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2302 and "normal hit" is selected as a result of the normal lottery, the second starting port 2102 is closed as described above. When a pair of movable pieces 2105 are opened for a predetermined period of time to be able to win a prize, and when the game ball is received by the second starting opening 2102 and detected by the second starting opening sensor 3132, main control is performed. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301 via the substrate 4100 and the like.

Further, in the main control board 4100, when the game balls enter the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102 and are detected by the first starting opening sensor 3131 and the second starting opening sensor 3132, the first starting is performed. The mouth 2101 performs the generation/extraction of the predetermined first special random number by the first special random number generating means 4212, and the second starting mouth 2102 performs the generation/extraction of the predetermined second special random number by the second special random number generating means 4222. Be seen. Then, based on the extracted special random number, after the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display device 1185 or the second special symbol display device 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started, it is extracted. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result.

On the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode suggesting a "big hit", the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 opens/closes in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and by winning a game ball into the special winning opening 2103 during that period, more game balls can be acquired. It should be noted that when one game ball wins the special winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301. However, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests "big hit", the big hit game does not occur immediately, and the condition device that is one condition necessary for the big hit game to operate is activated. Then, based on the fact that the jackpot game mode is subsequently determined, execution of the jackpot game in the determined jackpot game mode is started. In addition, the jackpot game mode, when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R during the valid period in which the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) is enabled, it becomes a jackpot game mode of 9 rounds. It is determined. Further, during the valid period, when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, the big hit mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 is enabled, and when the game ball is detected by the big hit mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, Based on, the jackpot game mode of 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds or 15 rounds is determined.

Note that the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 is not activated when the condition device operates and is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R before the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, and the game is played. When the sphere is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L before being detected by the route detection sensor 2580R, it is validated based on this. Then, during the period in which the jackpot aspect determination gate detection sensor 3665 is enabled, when the jackpot aspect determination gate detection sensor 3665 detects passage of a game ball to the jackpot aspect determination gate 3660, the jackpot aspect is detected based on this. The activation of the decision gate detection sensor 3665 ends.

In addition, also in these first starting port 2101, and the second starting port 2102, similarly to the variable display of the normal symbol due to the passage of the game ball to the gate member 2400, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display. When the special symbol is variable displayed in the device 1186, or when the special symbol such as during the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball wins the starting ports 2101 and 2102 and the first starting port sensor 3131, when detected by the second starting mouth sensor 3132, until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible, it is extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting mouth sensor 3131 and the second starting mouth sensor 3132. The first special random number and the second special random number are stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 to hold the display, and the stored special random number is stored. The number is adapted to be displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187.

Each of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 is composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission states of the LEDs that are turned off, turned on, and blinked. In this example, up to four of each are stored and displayed. It should be noted that the extracted special random number is discarded when the number of memories exceeds four. Further, by the priority holding digestion means 4231, the second special random number stored (held) in the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 has priority over the first special random number stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214. It is designed to be executed (digested). In other words, the holding of the lottery results for the second starting opening 2102 and the third starting opening 2415 is executed (digested) with priority over the holding of the lottery results for the first starting opening 2101.

In the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the special random number of the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting port sensor 3131, the second starting port sensor 3132, the first special symbol variation pattern selection By collating with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table) that is determined in advance by the means 4216 or the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226, the special random number is a “miss” or a “big hit”. While it is determined which is the stop symbol of the special symbol is also determined. Further, "random probability short-time hit", "probable variable hit", "time-variable hit", "probable variable time-short hit", etc. are also determined by the random number determination table.

Then, the first special random number and the second special random number (the special lottery result) extracted (lottery) by the start winning of the game balls to the first start mouth 2101, the second start mouth 2102 (the special lottery result) are In this case, the main control board 4100 operates the condition device which is one condition for executing the jackpot game, as described above. The advantageous game state generation means 4232 executes a jackpot game advantageous to the player, and after the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses or a predetermined time. A round game of an opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing member 2106 is closed when a number of (for example, 9) gaming balls are satisfied in the big winning opening 2103 (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if 3 rounds are determined as the jackpot game mode, “3 times” is determined, if 6 rounds are determined, “6 times”, if 9 rounds are determined, “9 times”, 12 rounds are determined. If it is "12 times", and if 15 rounds have been decided, by repeating the round game "15 times", an advantageous game state advantageous to the player is generated.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the extracted first special random number and second special random number are "big hits", the main control board 4100 causes the gate 2575 to be played based on the fact that the condition device has operated. When the detection signal of the game ball from the route detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) when the ball passes can be accepted, and which of the route detection sensors 2580L and 2580R sends the detection signal first, As described above, one of a plurality of jackpot modes having different processing structures for determining the number of rounds of the “jackpot” game is determined.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the first special random number and the second special random number extracted by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102 and the third starting opening 2415. (Depending on the special lottery result), in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Also, the effect image corresponding to the special random number (special lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows (for example, three rows) composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed, and then sequentially. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, and finally all the symbol strings are stopped and displayed, the player is informed of the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed. That is, in accordance with the special lottery result due to the start winning, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed is displayed. Since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like are easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol display devices 1185 and 1186, the player generally displays them on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like. Attention will be paid to the design.

As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol strings are variably displayed, the "reach effect image" in which the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed with one variable symbol string being displayed so as to satisfy the specific condition (reach) , And the special lottery results for which this “reach effect image” is displayed include “per reach” and “reach lost”. Further, there is also a "reach development effect image" which is displayed so as to be connected to the "reach effect image", and after the reach display, the variable display remaining symbol lines are emphasized and displayed. The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like can display not only the effect display related to the start winning, but also the “big hit game effect image” displayed during the “big hit” game.

The variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 is designed to be directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 189). The variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. Is becoming As a result, since the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like control the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like which the player pays particular attention to, there is a certain result related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100. It is possible to prepare a plurality of variation patterns of symbols for one command in advance and increase the variation patterns of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Further, the "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed during the "big hit" game and the like are also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image to be displayed without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing in the main control board 4100, and to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player and less likely to get tired of it. Has become.

Further, in the peripheral control unit 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, based on the command related to the lottery result, the drive motors 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are provided. Etc., and appropriately actuating each solenoid and the like, and each decorative board 2116, 2125, 2569, 3139, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, provided with the game board 4 The LEDs mounted on the 3690, 3692, etc. are made to emit light as appropriate, and the player can be entertained by the movable effect and the light emission effect.

By the way, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, as described above, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 indicate that it is a "big hit". While the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode, after that, the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R while the condition device is operating, and when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensors 2580L and 2580R, (When the game ball passes the left gate 2575L, when the jackpot mode determination game detection sensor and the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 detect the route detection sensor 2580L, the jackpot game is started. However, the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment are different in the role to be performed from the special symbol lottery in the conventional pachinko machine as follows.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the playability from when the predetermined start condition is satisfied (NO in step S301) to when the jackpot game is started will be summarized.

When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied (NO in step S301) on the basis of a start winning prize to the first starting opening 1502 or a starting winning prize to the second starting opening 1506 (a process of NO in step S301), a process of determining a winning of the jackpot is performed ( Step S315), a process for determining the type of privilege when the jackpot game is played (step S316, step S607), and a variable display of symbols so as to show the result of the determination as to whether or not to play the jackpot game. Process of performing such control (step S150, step S180), a series of processes related to game of special symbols in which execution of each process such as etc. is allowed in sequence (NO in step S301, then the process flag is "0". Processing until it is updated to ") is started.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the starting openings 1502 and 1506, the gates 2575L and 2575R capable of receiving the game balls hit in the game area 1100 are prepared, and then, the predetermined numbers are provided. When the start condition is satisfied, an execution mode determination process of determining an execution mode when the jackpot game is performed among the processes (steps S316 and S607) that determine the type of privilege when the jackpot game is performed For (step S607), a series of processes relating to the game of the special symbol is performed so that this is left as a process not yet performed.

That is, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a lottery type for a jackpot game, such as a "safety type jackpot form" and a "pounding type jackpot form", which will be described later, for one result such as a "jackpot". After making it possible to adopt one of two different types of jackpots in the alternative, first, in the process of determining the winning or losing of the jackpot, it is undecided which one of these jackpots will be adopted. The winning judgment is made as it is. As a result, when the big hit is won, the condition device is operated after performing the symbol control so that the big hit symbol combination appears, and on that, the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580L and the route detection sensor 2580R. Depending on which of the two gates 2575L and 2575R the game ball passes through, the game is progressed under either "safety type jackpot form" or "pounding type jackpot form" to be described later. It is a decision on what to do.

However, even if the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580L and the route detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the operation mode of the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550 is simply directed toward the game area 1100. Basically, such a game ball is more likely to be guided to the right side route than to the left side route if only is fired. That is, when the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 1 basically advances the game in the form of a safe type jackpot, and is a stable-oriented player who wants to win a certain amount of prize balls. It is a game machine for players. And for such a stable player, since the game ball shot is basically guided to the right route, both "safety type jackpot form" and "pounding type jackpot form" are given. It is possible to eliminate the hassle of having to select either the safe type or the pounding type each time a possible state is reached (a big hit is won).

However, even if a player who desires a stable orientation, if he/she wants to bring about a change in the game, he/she does not proceed with the game under the "safety type jackpot form", but rather "the pounding type jackpot form". In some cases, it may be desired to proceed with the game under ". In addition, a player who is originally a speculative player may play a game with such a game machine. Even in these cases, it is not a simple game that simply selects one of the safe type and the pounding type each time the big hit is won, but the game ball is not guided to the left route This adds to the playability of having to shoot a game ball aiming for a chance.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is detected that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R during the period in which the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580L or the route detection sensor 2580R is enabled. When detected by the sensor 2580R, the game under the "safety type big hit form" is advanced. In the game under this "safety type jackpot form", first, when executing the jackpot game, based on the jackpot type (value of the jackpot symbol random number) that has already been determined (step S316), A lottery process that determines the execution mode is performed.

For example, in the process of step S316, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a particular type of jackpot, it is shown in FIG. 203 based on the jackpot game mode determination random number acquired when detected by the route detection sensor 2580R. By referring to the table, the “9” round is determined as the jackpot game mode with the lottery probability of “100%”. However, as described above, in the processing of step S316 which has already been processed, it may be determined that the jackpot is a specific type with a probability of “10%” based on the jackpot random number, and as a result, When the flag to that effect is ON in the process of step S317, the right gate of the table shown in FIG. 202 is based on the jackpot game mode determination random number acquired when detected by the route detection sensor 2580R. By referring to the column, the "15" round is determined as the jackpot gaming mode with the lottery probability of "100%".

In this way, with a game under the "safety type jackpot form", a jackpot game is guaranteed under the condition that a certain amount of prize balls are paid out, such that a round game is repeated at least nine times. It has been started.

On the other hand, when the route detection sensor 2580L detects that the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L during the period in which the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580L or the route detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the message "the pounding type Progress the game under the jackpot form. Even in the game under the "beating jackpot type", first, when the jackpot game is executed, based on the jackpot type (winning species) that has already been determined (step S316), the execution mode The lottery process is decided.

However, the processing structure relating to the progress of such a game is different from the case of the "safety type big hit form", and, for example, when it is determined in the process of step S316 that it is not the particular type big hit Using the jackpot game mode determination random number acquired when the passage of the game ball to the left gate 2575L is detected by the sensor 2580L, referring to the table in FIG. Decide on either. Then, based on the determined lottery pattern (one of the patterns a to c) when the big hit mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 detects the passage of the game ball to the big hit mode determination gate 3660, With reference to FIG. 204(b), the process of determining the “15” round or the “3” round as the jackpot game mode is performed. On the other hand, in the processing of step S316 which has already been processed, when it is determined that the jackpot is a specific type with a probability of “10%” based on the jackpot random number (in the processing of step S317 When the flag indicating that is ON), based on the jackpot game mode determination random number acquired when detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, the left gate column of the table shown in FIG. By referring to the lottery probability of "100%", the "15" round is determined as the jackpot game mode.

In this way, in the game under the "pounding type jackpot form", the "3" round (the smallest number The game mode in which only balls are obtained) has a game risk that is determined as the jackpot game mode, and the probability that the “15” round is determined as the jackpot game mode is high. Compared with the case of the “big hit form”, the processing structure involved in the game lottery when the big hit is won is different, although all of the wins of one big hit can be executed.

It should be noted that the processing structure under the "safety type jackpot form" is the processing of steps S6072 to S6074 shown in FIG. 201 and the processing of step S6081 and subsequent steps based on the processing of these steps S6072 to S6074. That is, the processing structure under the "big-hearted jackpot form" is the processing of steps S6076-S6080 shown in FIG. 201, and step S6081 and subsequent steps based on the processing of these steps S6076-S6080. Of each process.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment as described above, as shown in FIG. 114, the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R are both provided in the receiving unit 2550, but shown in FIG. 136. As described above, the movable valve 2551 that guides the game ball received in the receiving unit 2550 to the left gate 2575L basically makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the right gate 2575R than the left gate 2575L. Therefore, as a player, it is possible to give both a "safety type big hit form" and a "pounding type big hit form", but basically, a certain amount of ball is secured basically. The game will be advanced under the "safety type jackpot form".

However, as described above, the movable valve 2551 according to the present embodiment basically has a mode (mode of FIG. 137) in which the game ball is more easily guided to the right side route than the left side route in the receiving space 2530. , When the game ball is fired at a specific timing that periodically visits, the game ball is rotated so that the game ball is more likely to be guided to the left route than the right route in the receiving space 2530 (the mode of FIG. 136). ..

The movable valve 2551 in the present embodiment is maintained for a predetermined time (17 seconds) in a mode (a mode of FIG. 137) in which the game ball is more likely to be guided to the right route than the left route in the receiving space 2530, and the predetermined time has elapsed. Then, it rotates and is maintained for a short time (3 seconds) in a mode (a mode of FIG. 136) in which the game ball is more likely to be guided to the left side route than the right side route in the receiving space 2530. Then, when such a short time elapses, the movable valve 2551 rotates again, and the state shown in FIG. 137 is obtained. The movable valve 2551 repeatedly executes such a rotating operation in the same pattern.

Considering that 100 game balls are shot in one minute when the game balls are continuously shot, a mode in which the game balls are more likely to be guided to the left route than the right route in the receiving space 2530 (Aspect of FIG. 136), it is preferable to maintain at least about 2 seconds. During this 2 seconds, it is possible to shoot about 3 game balls, but considering the range of the time difference that occurs from when the game ball is launched until it reaches the movable valve 2551, the game ball is If the player aims to be guided to the left side route and shoots the game ball, it is necessary to wait at least 2 seconds for the game ball to be guided to the left side route with a high probability. It is preferable that the movable valve 2551 is maintained in the mode of FIG. 136. Incidentally, in order to absorb the above deviation time and to surely guide the game ball to the left gate 2575L, it is necessary to keep the movable valve 2551 in the mode of FIG. 136 for 3 seconds or more. preferable. However, during the time in which the game ball is more easily guided to the left side route than the right side route in the receiving space 2530 (the mode of FIG. 136), the game ball is guided to the right side route than the left side route in the receiving space 2530. It is necessary that the time is shorter than the time for which the mode (the mode of FIG. 137) that is easily affected is maintained.

On the other hand, the time during which the game balls are more easily guided to the right route than the left route in the receiving space 2530 (the mode of FIG. 137) is at least left side route than the right route in the receiving space 2530. It is essential that the time is longer than the time in which the game ball is easily guided (the mode in FIG. 136), and preferably maintained for at least 10 seconds. During this 10 seconds, about 16 balls can be shot, so that the game balls are more easily guided to the left route than the right route in the receiving space 2530 (the mode of FIG. 136). For example, if the time is 2 seconds, if you simply shoot a game ball without aiming at either the right side route or the left side route, the game ball is guided to the right side route or the left side route. The ratio (the ratio between the case where the “safety type jackpot form” is determined and the case where the “heartbeat type jackpot form” is determined) is approximately 17:3. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball is maintained in the receiving space 2530 for a predetermined time (3 seconds) in the left route rather than the right route (3 seconds), and the receiving space 2530 is maintained. Since the game ball is maintained on the right side route more easily than the left side route (aspect of FIG. 137) for a short time (17 seconds), the case where the game ball is guided to the right side route and the left side route The ratio with the case where the game ball is guided (the ratio between the case where the “safety type jackpot form” is determined and the case where the “pounding type jackpot form” is determined) is approximately 17:3.

However, when you simply shoot a game ball without aiming at either the right side route or the left side route, the game ball is mainly guided to the right side route, and when you aim the left side route and shoot the game ball, rather than the right side route. Based on the viewpoint that the game ball is easily guided to the left side route, the time period in which the game ball is more easily guided to the right side route than the left side route in the receiving space 2530 (the mode of FIG. 137) is maintained for 10 seconds or more ( 16 to 17 or more game balls are guided to the right route), and the time in which the game balls are easily guided to the left route rather than the right route in the receiving space 2530 (the mode of FIG. 136) is maintained. It is preferable to set the time to about 3 seconds (the time for which 4 to 5 game balls are guided to the left route). Then, when the game ball is simply shot without aiming at either the right route or the left route, the game progresses under the "safety type jackpot form" with a probability of approximately 80% or more. However, when a game ball is shot aiming at the left side route (at the timing when the movable valve 2551 is maintained in the mode of FIG. 136), such a game ball is guided to the left side route rather than the right side route. It becomes easier and there is a higher possibility that the game will progress under the "pounding type jackpot form".

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, basically, the game ball is guided to the right side route rather than the left side route, but the operation timing of the movable valve 2551 in which the game ball is allowed to be guided to the left side route. By intentionally giving a periodicity to the game, if you want to proceed with the game under the "pounding type jackpot form", you can adjust the firing timing of the game ball to adjust the left route in the receiving space 2530. A game with technical intervention aiming to roll a game ball to (left gate 2575L) is provided. As a result, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L and is then detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, the round lottery process is performed as a game under the "pounding type jackpot form". Will be performed.

According to such a configuration, if the game ball is simply shot toward the game area 1100, the right gate 2575R (right route) is played rather than the left gate 2575L (left route) in the receiving unit 2550. Since the ball is easily guided, it reduces the hassle of having to select the right side route or the left side route each time for stable players who want to win a certain amount of prize balls when a jackpot game is executed. can do. Also, while be prepared for the risk that when the jackpot game is executed, you will get a smaller amount of prize balls than when the game ball was guided to the right route, it is better than when the game ball was guided to the right route. For a speculative player who desires a gaming property that can obtain a large amount of prize balls, it is not only a right route or a left route within the receiving unit 2550, but also a left side by taking advantage of few chances. The fun is to shoot the game ball aiming at it so that the game ball is guided to the route.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the condition device is operated in the lottery as to whether or not the condition device is operated based on the acceptance of the game balls into the starting openings 2101 and 2102. Even if is determined, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, "3" round (the game mode in which the fewest payouts are obtained) is determined as the jackpot game mode with an average probability of "50%". It has become so. In addition to this, when it is determined that it is a jackpot of a specific type with a probability of "10%" based on the jackpot random number, which of the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R the game ball has passed Regardless, since the "15" round (the game mode in which the most payouts are obtained) is determined as the jackpot game mode, when the jackpot of a specific type, it is possible to successfully pass the game ball through the left gate 2575L. Even if the game is not played, such a game risk is avoided and at least a certain amount of payouts is paid out, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In this example, when the jackpot flag of the specific type is ON, as can be seen by referring to the table of FIG. 202, the lottery probability is set for the jackpot games of the third round, the sixth round, the ninth round, and the twelve rounds. It is set to 0, and a 15-round jackpot game is randomly selected with a probability of 100%. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot flag of a specific type is ON, a specific jackpot game (without being drawn) In this example, a 15-round jackpot game) may be determined.

In addition, when the normal type big hit is won, in the big hit form when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R, as can be seen by referring to the table in FIG. 203, 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 rounds With regard to the jackpot game of the round, the lottery probability is set to 0, and the jackpot game of 9 rounds is drawn with a probability of 100%. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot flag of a specific type is not ON and the right When a game ball passes through the gate 2575R, an average profit calculated based on a prescribed probability is determined as a jackpot game (in this example, a 9-round jackpot game) without being drawn. May be.

It should be noted that during the period in which the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580L or the route detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the route detection sensor 2580L or the route detection sensor is caused by the game ball passing through one of the gates 2575L and 2575R. It is continued until the game ball is detected by 2580R. Therefore, the player can consider the timing at which the game ball should be shot toward the game area 1100 (reception unit 2550) in relation to the periodic operation by the movable valve 2551. However, when at least one game ball is driven toward the receiving unit 2550, the game ball passes through one of the gates 2575L and 2575R, and the "safety type big hit form" and "pounding type big hit form" A process related to the progress of the game is performed in accordance with any of the above, and the jackpot game corresponding to the result of the process is started.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, the functions that the gates 2575L and 2575R should perform according to the type of this big hit are Different.

More specifically, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot, only when the obtained jackpot symbol random number among jackpot symbol random numbers 0 to 9 is 7 It is determined to be a jackpot, and when a jackpot random number other than 7 out of 0 to 9 is acquired, it is determined to be a normal type jackpot. In this way, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, it is determined with high probability that it is a normal type big hit, so that the gates 2575L, 2575R (more specifically, the route detection sensor 2580L, 2580R) and the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 (more specifically, the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665) always function as a member that determines the execution mode of the jackpot game. That is, steps S6074 and S6080 executed by the main control MPU 4100a are respectively a right gate 2575R (route detection sensor 2580R) and a left gate 2575L (route detection sensor 2580L), a big hit mode determination gate 3660 (a big hit mode determination gate detection sensor). 3665) always plays a role as a functioning unit that functions as a member that determines the execution mode of the jackpot game.

However, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type jackpot, refer to the table of FIG. 202 when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R to determine the execution mode of the jackpot game. Although the lottery to be determined is performed, this lottery is merely a formal lottery in which the manner of executing the big hit is predetermined. In other words, in effect, a predetermined 15 round jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates 2575L and 2575R. Therefore, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, route detection) The sensors 2580L and 2580R) function as a trigger for executing the jackpot game. That is, since NO is always determined in step S6072 and step S6076, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, route detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) always use the step S6074 and step S6080 to determine the execution mode of the jackpot game. Although it functions as a member for determining, only when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot of a specific type, YES is determined in step S6072 and step S6076, and gates 2575L and 2575R (more details The route detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) will function as members that determine the execution mode of the jackpot game. Therefore, step S6072 and step S6076 executed by the main control MPU 4100a are always a right gate 2575R (route detection sensor 2580R) and a left gate 2575L (route detection sensor 2580L) that always function as members that determine the execution mode of the jackpot game. ), only when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type big hit, as a function changing means for changing the function so as to function as a member that determines the execution mode of the big hit game. Will play a role.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball rolls on either the route on the route detection sensor 2580L side or the route on the route detection sensor 2580R side by the receiving unit 2550, the rolling route is grasped. As possible, at least until the jackpot game is over, the ball route suggesting member 2590 on the side where the game ball rolls is turned on.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the game ball hit in the game area 1100 by the player, one of the "safety type big hit form" and "pounding type big hit form" is a big hit. The processing according to the form according to the game progress is executed, and the jackpot game according to the result of the processing is started.

[Display effect displayed on the mini LCD display]
When the game according to the "beating type jackpot form" is started, the expected effect using the lower right back effect unit 3600 is executed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player continues to shoot a game ball toward the game area 1100, a case where "safety type jackpot form" is determined and "a pounding type jackpot form" The ratio) is approximately 17:3. Therefore, when the condition device is activated by winning the jackpot lottery, it can be determined as either the "safety type jackpot form" or the "pounding type jackpot form", but it is mainly the "safety type jackpot form". It will be decided as "big hit form". In this way, when most of the conditional devices are determined to be the "safety type jackpot form" when the condition device operates, even if the "pounding type jackpot form" is determined, the non-maximum amount If a display effect that is determined as (big hit of 3 rounds, 6 rounds, and 12 rounds) is performed, there is a risk that it will be aroused and the interest will be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the condition device operates, most of them are determined to be the "safety type big hit type", and the frequency is relatively low. In the mini liquid crystal display 3670, the probability of being determined per maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots) is determined per non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of jackpots). As the effect mode displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670, the display effect of the A pattern that evokes the maximum amount of hits is more than the display effect of the C pattern that evokes the non-maximum amount of hits. It is displayed with a high probability. As a result, although the probability determined for the maximum amount is lower than the probability determined for the non-maximum amount, the maximum amount for the player who sees the presentation mode displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 is the maximum amount. It is possible to make the player aware of whether the expectation that the jackpot game per hit will be executed is higher than the possibility that the jackpot game per non-maximum hit will be executed. As a result, when the condition device is activated, the jackpot game of about 9 rounds is executed, and when the "pounding type jackpot form" is determined, the probability that the maximum amount is internally determined is the non-maximum. Although it is lower than the probability determined per amount, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the jackpot game per maximum amount, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

As described above, when the passage of the game ball to the left gate 2575L is detected by the route detection sensor 2580 (YES in step S6075), and when it is the normal type jackpot (NO in step S6076), the table of FIG. 204(a). With reference to, the lottery pattern is determined to be one of the a pattern, the b pattern, and the c pattern (step S6078). This information is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 as a command from the main control board 4100. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 (more specifically, the display effect displayed in the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670, which has received the command indicating which one of the a pattern, the b pattern, and the c pattern has been selected. The mini liquid crystal display control device for controlling the) controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670 based on the command.

In the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670, one of the A pattern, B pattern, and C pattern as a display effect pattern is displayed based on the lottery pattern determined from the a pattern, the b pattern, and the c pattern. It is determined that the effect pattern is displayed (see FIG. 206). Here, FIG. 206 is a table for determining the display effect pattern displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 based on the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 which is the process of the main control MPU 4100a. The display effect pattern displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 may be determined by the main control MPU 4100a, but from the viewpoint of reducing the load on the main control board 4100, it is determined by the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Is preferred.

As shown in FIG. 207, the pattern A, the pattern B, and the pattern C are all associated with a non-maximum amount of hits (a big hit of 3 rounds, 6 rounds, and 12 rounds) as a character, and a maximum amount of hits of 5000. It is a display effect pattern in which a small dragon 5100 that reminds of 15 rounds of jackpots) is displayed. The A pattern is that most of all dragons are small dragons 5100, and dragons account for only 12.5% (two of 16 dragons are dragons 5000), which is the highest number per non-maximum amount. It is a display effect pattern with the highest expectation determined for each quantity. The B pattern is a display effect pattern in which the ratio of the large dragon 5000 and the small dragon 5100 is almost 1:1 and is a display effect pattern which is next to the A pattern and is expected to be determined in the maximum amount rather than in the non-maximum amount. is there. The C pattern is a display effect pattern in which one small dragon 5100 and approximately two large dragons 5000 are displayed, and a display effect with the lowest expectation determined for the maximum amount rather than for the non-maximum amount. It is a pattern.

As shown in the table of FIG. 206, when the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 which is the process of the main control MPU 4100a is the a pattern, it is determined to be the A pattern with a probability of 30% and the B pattern with a probability of 60%. The pattern is determined, and the C pattern is determined with a probability of 10%. When the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 is the b pattern, the A pattern has a 40% probability, the B pattern has a 50% probability, and the C pattern has a 10% probability. It .. When the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 is the c pattern, the A pattern is determined with 70% probability, the B pattern is determined with 30% probability, and the C pattern is not determined. ..

In this way, when the display effect pattern is determined to be one of the A pattern, the B pattern, and the C pattern, the determined display effect pattern is displayed in the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670. FIG. 208 is an example showing a form of display effect displayed in the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670. As shown in FIG. 208, in the center of the mini liquid crystal display 3670, there is a frame display area 3670a surrounded by a frame, and toward the frame display area 3670a (see the arrow in FIG. 208), a large dragon 5000 and a small box are displayed. One dragon 5100 and one dragon 5100 are scroll-displayed in order.

However, the large dragon 5000 and the small dragon 5100 are not scroll-displayed at a constant speed, but if the small dragon 5100 is light, even if it is about to be displayed in the frame display area 3670a, it is back-displayed or quickly displayed. The frame display area 3670a is displayed while passing through. Further, if it is the great dragon 5000, since it is powerful, it attacks the small dragon 5100 displayed in the frame display area 3670a.

As for the jackpot game to be executed, which is a jackpot among the three rounds, the six rounds, the twelve rounds, and the fifteen rounds, as described above, the passage of the game ball to the jackpot manner determination gate 3660 is the jackpot manner determination gate. It is determined based on the detection by the detection sensor 3665 (see FIGS. 181 to 185) (see step S6080). Here, for the information on which jackpot game mode the determined jackpot game is, among the three rounds, six rounds, twelve rounds and fifteen rounds, the peripheral control unit 4140 is instructed by the main control board 4100 as a command. Sent.

When the route detection sensor 2580L detects that the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 by the player has passed through the left gate 25757L, as described above, one of the lottery patterns a pattern to c pattern is selected. It is determined. Then, before the game ball is passed to the big hit state determination gate 3660 by the big hit state determination gate detection sensor 3665, the character (Dairyu 5000 or Koryu 5100) is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a. Here, when the determined lottery pattern is the a pattern or the b pattern, it is controlled so that the Dairyu 5000 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a. When the determined lottery pattern is the c pattern, the small dragon 5100 is controlled to be stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a. That is, display control is performed on the character stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a based on the determined lottery pattern.

The display effect in which the dragon 5000 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a is a fixed effect that the pattern is the a pattern or the b pattern (a fixed effect that the pattern is not the c pattern). In addition, the display effect in which the small dragon 5100 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a is the c pattern confirmation effect (confirmation effect that is neither the a pattern nor the b pattern).

Therefore, when the small dragon 5100 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a (when it is the c pattern), the probability is higher than the probability determined for the non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds). A display effect that gives the player a sense of expectation, such as determination of the maximum amount of jackpots (15 rounds of jackpots) (see FIG. 204(b)), is executed from the stage where the jackpots to be executed have not yet been determined. It becomes possible.

Further, when the Tairyu 5000 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a (when it is the pattern a or the pattern b), the non-maximum amount (3 Although it is more likely to be decided per round, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of jackpots), it is not certain that it is decided per non-maximum amount. In particular, even if the large dragon 5000 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a, this alone does not confirm that the lottery pattern is the b pattern, and the possibility of the a pattern remains, so that the frame display area 3670a is small. It is possible to perform a c-pattern final performance in which the dragon 5100 is stopped and displayed, but it is possible to avoid a display effect that discourages the player.

As described above, the display control of the character stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a is performed based on the determined lottery pattern, but the large dragon 5000 and the small dragon 5100 are scroll-displayed at a constant speed. However, if it is a small dragon 5100, it is back-displayed or quickly passes through the frame display area 3670a, and if it is a large dragon 5000, it attacks the small dragon 5100 displayed in the frame display area 3670a. Display effect is performed. Therefore, regardless of whether the character displayed in the frame display area 3670a is the large dragon 5000 or the small dragon 5100, the unnaturalness of the player is reduced.

Then, after the big dragon 5000 or the small dragon 5100 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a, the fact that the game ball has passed the big hit manner determination gate 3660 is detected by the big hit manner determination gate detection sensor 3665, but not shown. , A character with a rifle appears, and a display effect (confrontation effect) is performed in which the character (large dragon 5000 or small dragon 5100) stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a and the character with a rifle confront each other. As described above, the jackpot executed out of 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 rounds based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the jackpot aspect determination gate 3660 is detected by the jackpot aspect determination gate detection sensor 3665. Since the game is determined, the display control of the above-mentioned confrontation effect is performed based on this determination.

Specifically, if the jackpot game to be executed is the maximum hit (15 round jackpot), the character with the rifle is displayed as the character (Tayu 5000 or Koyu 5100) stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a. The confrontation production such as winning is performed. After that, the jackpot game of the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots) is executed.

If the jackpot game to be executed is a non-maximum hit (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of big hits), the character with the rifle is displayed in the frame display area 3670a as a stopped character (Dairyu 5000 or small. A confrontation effect of defeating Ryu 5100) is performed. Then, after that, the jackpot game (non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds) determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the hit state determination gate 3660 is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665. Jackpot)) one of the jackpot games) is performed.

It should be noted that the character with a rifle is less likely to win in the case of the large dragon 5000, and the character with the rifle wins in the case of the small dragon 5100 with a higher probability than in the case of the large dragon 5000. Therefore, when the character stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a is the great dragon 5000, the non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of big hits) is determined rather than the maximum amount (15 rounds big hit). Reminding the player that there is a high probability that the player is likely to have been played, and if the character stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a is the small dragon 5100, it is possible that the maximum amount of hits was determined rather than the non-maximum hit amount. This will remind the player of the high price. Even if the character with the rifle loses to the character (Dairyu 5000 or Koryu 5100) stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a, the player wins the reversal and the final display of the maximum amount is displayed. May be.

In the present embodiment, the character (Daiyu 5000 or Koryu 5100) is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a before the game ball passes through the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665. However, after the game ball passes through the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 (that is, after the jackpot game to be executed is internally determined), the character (Tayu 5000 or Koryu 5100) is displayed in the frame display area 3670a. May be stopped and displayed. However, an effect capable of finalizing the lottery pattern (display effect in which the small dragon 5100 or the large dragon 5000 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a) is executed from the stage where the jackpot to be executed has not been determined yet. Considering that it is possible, the character (Dairyu 5000 or Koryu 5100) is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a before the game ball passes through the big hitting form determination gate detection sensor 3665 to the big hitting form determination gate 3660. It is preferable to do so.

In this way, after the passage of the game ball to the left gate 2575L is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, until the passage of the game ball to the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665. The mini liquid crystal display 3670 is scroll-displayed in any one of the display effect patterns of the A pattern, the B pattern, and the C pattern, and the large dragon 5000 or the small dragon 5100 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a. After that, based on the fact that the passage of the game ball to the big hit mode determination gate 3660 is detected by the big hit mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, the character (Daiyu 5000 or Koryu 5100) stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a, Play with a character with a rifle. Then, a display effect indicating the mode of the jackpot game determined based on the fact that the passage of the game ball to the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 is performed.

Since the above-described display effect is performed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 in this manner, among the A pattern, the B pattern, and the C pattern, the C pattern in which the ratio of Dairyu 5000 is relatively high relative to the whole is the mini liquid crystal display. When it is displayed on the device 3670, it is possible to give the player the impression that the big hit game of the non-maximum amount (three rounds, six rounds, and twelve rounds of big hits) is decided with high expectation. As a result, most of the cases where the condition device is activated in the jackpot lottery and the condition device is activated are determined to be the "safety type jackpot form", and when the "pounding type jackpot form" is determined, the non-maximum The player can be made aware that the jackpot of the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots) is more likely to be executed than the jackpot per amount, and thus the player can be given an uplifting feeling. As a result, when most of the winners were selected for the jackpot lottery and the condition device was activated, they were determined to be "safety type jackpots", but despite being determined to be "pounding type jackpots", It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by a display effect that is determined as a big hit per non-maximum amount.

Further, as shown in the table of FIG. 206, the probability that the C pattern with more dragons 5000 than the dragon 5100 is determined is extremely low, and most of the A patterns or B patterns are displayed. Become. The C pattern is a pattern or b pattern (Fig. 204(b) in which the probability that a non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds) is determined is higher than that of the maximum amount (15 rounds jackpot). (See the table in )), the decision is made only with a probability of 10%. Therefore, in the mini liquid crystal display 3670, the a pattern or the b pattern having a higher probability that the non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of big hits) is decided than the maximum amount (15 rounds big hit) is decided. Even if it is done, it is possible to make the player aware that it is easier to determine the maximum amount (15 rounds jackpot) than the non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds jackpots). It is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling when it is determined to be "type jackpot form".

By the way, even if the display effect pattern of any one of the A pattern, the B pattern, and the C pattern is determined based on the passage of the game ball to the left gate 2575L being detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, the non-maximum amount. As for which of the hits (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of jackpots) or the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots) to be executed, passage of the game ball to the jackpot manner determination gate 3660 determines the jackpot manner. It is determined based on what is detected by the gate detection sensor 3665. Therefore, the player looks at the display effect pattern displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670, and at the stage where the mode of the jackpot game to be executed has not yet been determined, one of the a pattern, b pattern, and c pattern. It is possible to find an interesting thing to guess whether the lottery pattern has been determined (that is, the degree of expectation that the maximum amount of hits will be determined). Further, even if the player infers that the b pattern is the one in which the maximum amount of hits is unlikely to be determined, the possibility of the maximum amount of hits remaining being determined, so the degree of discouragement given to the player Is also small.

At the time when the passage of the game ball to the left gate 2575L is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, the display effect pattern displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 is only determined, and the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 is selected. Either the non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds jackpot) or the maximum amount (15 rounds jackpot) is executed only when the passage of the game ball is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665. It will be decided whether it will be done. Therefore, even if the display effect in the C pattern is performed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670, it is not determined to be the non-maximum amount hit at this point, and there is a possibility that it is decided to the maximum amount hit. Becomes

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when most of the jackpot lottery is won and the condition device is activated, the "safety type jackpot form" is determined, and the "pounding type jackpot form" is determined. In such a case, a jackpot of 9 rounds, which would normally secure a certain amount of prize balls, was decided, but there is a possibility that the player was willing to decide to be a “pounding type jackpot form”. .. In this way, if the condition device is activated in the jackpot lottery and the condition device is activated, a certain amount of prize balls should normally be secured, but even if you risk it, you will be determined to be a “pounding type jackpot form”. However, the mini liquid crystal display 3670 has a maximum amount (15 rounds) of the maximum amount (three rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of big hits). A display effect that reminds the player to be decided as a big hit is performed. With this, although there is a possibility that it will be decided per non-maximum amount, it is possible to make the player conscious as if it was decided per maximum amount (15 round big hit), and eventually, "Dokidoki type" It is possible to suppress the display effect that is exciting even though it has been determined to be “the big hit form”.

Even if the b pattern (the lottery pattern in which the non-maximum amount is more likely to be determined than the maximum amount) is determined in step S6078, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that an A pattern or a B pattern that allows the player to be aware of whether or not it is determined is highly likely to be determined as the display effect pattern. On the other hand, even though the b pattern is decided, the player is conscious as if there is a high possibility that the non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of big hits) is decided rather than the maximum amount. The probability that the C pattern that can be attached is determined is as extremely low as 10%. As described above, when the "pounding type jackpot form" is determined, even if the b pattern is determined, a display effect that reminds the player that the maximum amount is determined rather than the non-maximum amount is displayed. I'm trying to do it.

When the pattern b is determined in step S6078, as shown in FIG. 204(b), the non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of jackpots) is determined rather than the maximum amount of 15 rounds. Although it is easy to be done, with a probability of 40% as shown in FIG. 206, it is more likely to be decided to the maximum amount (15 round jackpot) than the non-maximum amount to the player. It is decided to be an A pattern that can be made conscious.

It is to be noted that the uplifting bliss effect is displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 only when specific conditions such as the determination of the c pattern (the lottery pattern in which the maximum amount is more likely to be determined than the non-maximum amount) is established in step S6078. It may be done. This uplifting bliss production is, for example, a premium pattern (not shown) that is displayed only when the pattern c is determined, or a pattern b (a lottery pattern in which it is easier to determine the non-maximum amount of hits than the maximum amount of hits). ) Corresponds to a sub premier pattern (not shown) that is not displayed. The premier pattern is a display effect pattern in which, for example, 15 small dragons 5100 and 1 large dragon 5000 are displayed, and the sub premier pattern is, for example, 15 small dragons 5100 and large dragon 5000. This is a display effect pattern in which only two animals are displayed. Note that the premier pattern is a definite production pattern in which the c pattern is decided, but is not a definite production pattern in which the maximum amount (15 big jackpots) is decided. Similarly, the sub-premier pattern is a definite production pattern that is not determined as the b pattern, but is not a definite production pattern in which the maximum amount of hits is determined. When the premier pattern or sub-premier pattern is displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670, is the mode of the big hit game still a big hit game of non-maximum amount (3 round, 6 round, 12 round big hit)? This is because it has not been determined whether or not the jackpot game of the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots) is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, which of the three rounds, six rounds, twelve rounds, and fifteen rounds of jackpots will be executed when the “pounding type jackpot form” is determined. By visually recognizing the display effect displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 from a stage that has not yet been determined, the player can estimate the expectation that the jackpot game of the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots) will be executed. You can In other words, the mini liquid crystal display 3670 performs either a non-maximum amount jackpot game (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds jackpot) or a maximum jackpot game (15 rounds jackpot). It can be said that the display effect of the lottery process for deciding whether or not to display is displayed in a mode that can be visually recognized by the player. Then, the display effect displayed on this mini liquid crystal display 3670 is that the non-maximum hit is determined with a higher probability than the actual probability that the maximum hit is determined rather than the non-maximum hit. By giving a display effect that reminds the player, it is possible to give the player a disappointment by executing the jackpot game for the non-maximum amount even though the display effect that makes the player expect is performed. It is possible to avoid it.

Here, whether or not to shift to the gaming state in which the probability variation function operates after the jackpot game is played will be decided by the processing of steps S316 and S317 shown in FIG. There are two types of timing. That is, one is to provide a game using two gates 2575L and 2575R as to whether to proceed the game under "safety type jackpot form" or "pounding type jackpot form". It is a timing before being played, and the other is two gates regarding whether to proceed with the game under "safety type big hit form" or "pounding type big hit form" This is the timing after the game using the 2575L and 2575R is provided.

In other words, if the notification is given at a timing before the game using the two gates 2575L and 2575R is provided, for example, if the game state is shifted to the probability variation function, the "safety type" Even if you take the risk of a game that is decided as the big hit game mode, the "3" round (the game mode in which you can get the fewest payouts) is not even paid out in a guaranteed fixed amount , It is possible to aim to start the game under the "pounding type jackpot form". Alternatively, if the probability changing function is activated, the jackpot of a specific type may be won if the game state moves, and in this case, no matter which gate 2575 the game ball passes through, Since a round jackpot game will be played, the game may be started under the "safety type jackpot form" with no game risk. In addition, if the probability variation function does not shift to the game state where it operates, the expected value of the award ball amount that can be obtained is low, but without affecting the game risk It is possible to broaden the range of game strategies, such as playing a game so that the game is started under the "safety type jackpot form" in which payout is guaranteed. In particular, in this embodiment, the time for the game ball to be guided to the right gate 2575R by the movable valve 2551 is 17 seconds, and there is a time lag between the time the game ball is launched and the time it reaches the movable valve 2551. Even if the range of is taken into consideration, it is possible for the player to selectively play such a game strategy because it is possible to play the game ball so that the game ball can be reliably rolled to the right gate 2575R by absorbing this deviation time. Will be possible to do.

As a timing before the game using the two gates 2575L and 2575R is provided, it is possible to adopt notification by a symbol combination that appears when the symbol is stopped. On the other hand, as the timing after the game using the two gates 2575L and 2575R is provided, the notification by the effect image during the period when the jackpot start interval effect is performed or the effect image during the jackpot game It is possible to employ the notification by etc.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front end of the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 on which the game ball rolls is located in front of the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). The depth of the stage 2510 in the front-rear direction is widened as compared with a conventional pachinko machine that extends to substantially the same position as the front end of the front component member 1110A and has the front end in substantially the same position as the front surface of the game panel 1200. Since it is possible to roll the game ball in various states by the wide stage 2510, it is possible to prevent the motion of the game ball from becoming monotonous by making the game ball move in various ways on the stage 2510. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game, and it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, the front end of the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 on which the game ball can roll is extended to a position substantially the same as the front end of the front component member 1110A that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 1100 in front of the front surface of the game panel 1200. By the way, the front end of the third stage 2513 is almost the same position as the front end of the game area 1100, so when the game ball rolls near the front end of the third stage 2513, the stage in the conventional pachinko machine is changed. The game ball can be rolled at a position as close as possible to the player side than the game ball rolling on the top, and the motion of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 can be made easier to see and the movement of the game ball can be further improved. Can entertain.

Further, the rear end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is positioned rearward of the rear surface of the game panel 1200, and the game balls on the stage 2510 are positioned forward and forward of the front surface of the game panel 1200. Since it becomes possible to roll between the rear surface of the panel 1200 and a position on the rear side of the panel 1200, and the depth of the stage 2510 in the front-rear direction can be widened as much as possible, various game balls can be provided by the wide stage 2510. It can be rolled in a state, and by causing the game ball to move in various ways on the stage 2510, it is possible to prevent the game ball from becoming monotonous and prevent the player from getting tired of the stage. It is possible to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the movement of the game ball rolling on the 2510 and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the center role object 2500 is provided with the peripheral wall portion 2503 protruding forward, the stage 2510, which is framed by the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center role object 2500, and arranged in the frame, the respective rendering units 3200, 3400, The 3600, the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the like can be made to stand out, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, when a game ball enters the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 that are opened on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510, from the chance exit 2518 that is opened immediately above the first starting opening 2101. The game ball is about to be released, and the game ball can be accepted into the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 with a high probability, so that the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 is the first chance entrance 2516. Or, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the player enters the second chance entrance 2517, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510, which reduces the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is driven into the game area 1100 aiming at the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 arranged below the center accessory 2500. Even if the game ball hits the obstacle nail on the lower side of the center role object 2500 and bounces upward, the game ball bounced by the third stage 2513 bounces downward and enters the window part 2501 of the center role object 2500. Since this is prevented, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the liquid crystal display device 1900 side and causing a problem, and it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the problem. In addition, the third stage 2513 for preventing the invasion of the game balls is located from the position between the second stage 2512 and the fourth stage 2514 formed on the lower side of the center accessory 2500 from the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). Since the third stage 2513 is made to extend forward, the third stage 2513 can be made relatively inconspicuous by moving away from the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500, and the third stage 2513 extended forward. It is possible to avoid obstructing the decoration of other ornaments and the like by 2513, and since the vertical positional relationship between the third stage 2513 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is farther than that of a conventional pachinko machine, the liquid crystal display The light emitted from the device 1900 and reflected on the upper surface of the third stage 2513 can be made hard to reach the eyes of the player, and the upper surface of the third stage 2513 is prevented from appearing to be shining so that the pachinko machine 1 looks good. You can avoid getting worse.

In addition, the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are arranged above the third stage 2513 for preventing the invasion of the game balls, and contact the obstacle nails planted on the lower side of the center role object 2500. Since it is possible to avoid that the game ball that has bounced upward is placed on the first stage 2511, the second stage 2512, and the third stage 2513, the game ball does not pass through the warp entrance 2504 (regular route). It is possible to prevent the player from being supplied onto the stage 2510, and to prevent the player from feeling distrustful because the game ball is supplied onto the stage 2510 without passing through the regular route. Without it, the game on the pachinko machine 1 can be continued.

Further, since the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510 are arranged above the third stage 2513 that prevents the game balls from entering, the first stage 2511 is not blocked by the third stage 2513. And the game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 can be seen from the player side so that the game ball can be easily seen, and the game ball rolling on the first stage 2511, the second stage 2512, and the third stage 2513 It is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating by entertaining the movement.

Further, the stage 2510 is provided with a game ball that can be discharged into the game area 1100 at a position directly above the first starting opening 2101. The game ball is located at a position directly above the first starting opening 2101 on the stage 2510. When released into 1100, the game balls are received in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 with a high probability, and thus the game balls supplied onto the stage 2510 are released from directly above the first start port 2101. Whether or not the player can be thrilled and excited, and the expectation for receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 can be increased, and the player can roll on the stage 2510. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. Further, since the game ball can be released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 immediately above the first starting port 2101, a game ball aiming at the warp entrance 2504 so that the game ball is supplied onto the stage 2510. The driving operation can be positively performed by the player, the driving operation of the game ball can be enjoyed, and the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are arranged above the third stage 2513. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 can be seen well, and the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Also, when the game ball enters the warp entrance 2504 of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp exit 2505 to the first stage 2511 and then discharged to the second stage 2512 to prevent the game ball from entering from the second stage 2512. It is supplied to the fourth stage 2514 and the fifth stage 2515 through the preventing third stage 2513 and discharged from the fifth stage 2515 into the game area 1100. Therefore, the first stage 2511 to the fifth stage 2515. With the stage 2510 having up to, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy rolling of a variety of game balls, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Further, as described above, the stage 2510 is multistage, and the rolling time of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 becomes long. Therefore, depending on the player, the driving time interval for driving the game ball into the game area 1100 may be set. It becomes possible to make it longer, and it is possible to avoid consuming the game ball that is driven in early, and to make the player feel as if he or she has enjoyed the game for a long time and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, as a part of the stage 2510 is provided with a third stage 2513 extending forward of the front surface of the game panel 1200, the warp entrance 2504 is entered and the stage 2510 (first stage 2511) is entered from the warp exit 2505. ), the game ball supplied to the third stage 2513 rolls in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be rolled in front of the front surface of the game panel 1200 (game panel 1200). The game ball can be rolled in the left-right direction on the side closer to the player than the machine. Therefore, the stage 2510 can give a different impression to the player from the stage of the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained. It is possible to make the game ball rolling on the player's side easier to see, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from moving and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, a first chance entrance 2516 and a second chance entrance 2517 into which game balls can enter are formed on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510, and the first start is performed below the fifth stage 2515. Immediately above the mouth 2101 is formed a chance exit 2518 for releasing the game ball entering the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 into the game area 1100, and rolling on the first stage 2511 or the second stage 2512. Whether or not the moving game ball enters the first chance entrance 2516 or the second chance entrance 2517 can excite and excite the player, which increases the player's expectation for the game and reduces the interest in the game. In addition to being able to suppress, the time until the game ball enters the first chance entrance 2516 or the second chance entrance 2517 and is released from the chance exit 2518 into the game area 1100 is the first stage. Since it is possible to release the game balls from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 in a shorter time than the time required to roll from 2511 to the fifth stage 2515 and be released into the game area 1100, the multi-stage stage 2510 is provided. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying on the stage 2510 for a long time, and it is possible for some players to avoid slowing down the tempo of the game and deteriorating the interest. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back unit 3000 arranged between the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and the liquid crystal display device 1900, below the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210. The back lower unit base 3402 of the back lower production unit 3400 supports a back lower rear middle decorative body 3450 and a pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420 each having a predetermined decoration so as to be vertically movable and rotatable, and The lower back middle decoration 3450 and the pair of back lower back side decorations 3420 support the lower back front middle decoration 3506 via a lower back front base 3502 which is mounted in a normal state. Then, the back lower rear middle decoration 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decorations 3420, and the front lower back middle decoration 3506 are located outside (including the lower side) of the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210. Therefore, the back lower back middle decoration body 3450, the pair of back lower back side decoration bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 are in an unsightly state from the player side. Then, when the player hits a game ball into the game area 1100 to change the game state, the back-bottom rear middle decorative body 3450 rises to the inside of the front view opening 1215 according to the changed game state. , A pair of lower back rear side decorations 3420 are rotated to the inside of the front view opening 1215 so that their tips come into contact with each other, or a lower back front middle decoration 3506 is raised to the inside of the front view opening 1215, The back-rear back middle decoration 3450, the pair of back-rear rear side decorations 3420, and the back-rear front middle decoration 3506 move to the inside of the front view opening 1215 in an appropriate combination, so that various movable effects can be achieved. It is possible to carry out, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired with a variety of effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and to reduce the interest in the game.

Further, the back lower back middle decoration 3450 and the back lower front middle decoration 3506 are made to rise to the inside of the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 substantially at the center in the left-right direction, and a pair of back lower back side decorations are provided. Since the body 3420 is rotated to the inside of the front view opening 1215 so as to surround the outer periphery of the back lower back middle decoration body 3450, for example, the back lower rear middle decoration body 3450 is raised into the opening 1215. In the case where the pair of back underside rear side decorations 3420 are rotated into the opening 1215 after the above, the player can be surprised by first raising the backside underside middle decoration 3450 to appear. At the same time, the player's interest can be attracted to the back-rear middle decoration 3450, and the pair of back-rear rear side decorations 3420 are rotated while the player is focused on the back-rear middle decoration 3450. By surrounding the outer periphery of the back-rear middle decoration 3450 with the pair of back-rear rear side decorations 3420, the back-rear rear middle decoration 3450 can be made to appear to be greatly deformed, which further surprises the player. In addition to being entertaining, it is possible to see (appear) the large back and middle back decorations 3450 and back and back side decorations 3420, which suggests that there is something good for the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing.

In addition, the pair of lower back rear side decorations 3420 are configured to be rotated from the outside to the inside of the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210, and compared to the case of being linearly slid. Since the direction of the back lower back side decoration body 3420 is changed by moving, the appearance of the back lower back side decoration body 3420 is changed during the rotation, which is different from that of the back lower back side decoration body 3420 being rotated. As a result, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the movement of the back side back decorative body 3420 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

Further, the pair of back underside rear side decorations 3420 are arranged such that the front surface thereof is located rearward of the front surface of the back underside middle decoration 3450. Assuming that the side decoration body 3420 and the side decoration body 3420 are moved to the inside of the front view opening 1215 and made to appear, the front side of the side decoration body 3420 surrounds the outer circumference of the back decoration body 3450. Since it is located on the rear side of the front surface of the middle decoration body 3450, a depth feeling is imparted to the decoration composed of the back lower rear middle decoration body 3450 and the pair of back lower rear side decoration bodies 3420 to give a three-dimensional appearance. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to appear and the decorativeness (design) can be enhanced to attract the player's attention. In addition, the front surface of a pair of back lower rear side decoration bodies 3420 surrounding the outer periphery of the back lower rear middle decoration body 3450 is positioned rearward of the front surface of the back lower back middle decoration body 3450. When the decorative body 3450 and the pair of rear side rear decorative bodies 3420 are made to appear, the outer side becomes farther from the player side than the center, so that it is possible to make a wide and decorative decoration. In addition to being able to surprise the player, even if the inside of the front view opening 1215 is blocked by the emerged back lower back middle decoration body 3450 and the pair of back lower back side decoration bodies 3420, the player can be surprised. It is possible to suppress a feeling of pressure from being given, and it is possible to entertain the decoration of the back lower back middle decoration body 3450 and the pair of back lower back side decoration bodies 3420 and prevent a decrease in interest in the game. it can.

In addition, as described above, by arranging the front surface of the pair of back lower back side decoration bodies 3420 to the rear side with respect to the front surface of the back lower rear middle decoration body 3450, a three-dimensional effect can be imparted to the decoration. Even if the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the lower back middle decoration body 3450 and the pair of back lower back side decoration bodies 3420 is thinned, three-dimensional decoration can be sufficiently exerted. Since it is possible to reduce the thickness of the 3450 and the pair of back lower back side decorations 3420, a front-back space for installing the back lower back middle decoration 3450 and the pair of back lower back side decorations 3420 is possible. It is possible to make the size of the other decorations relatively small, and to secure a space for other decorations relatively, and to make the back lower back middle decoration 3450, the back lower back side decoration 3420, the back lower front middle decoration 3506, etc. The size of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, a back lower back middle decoration body 3450, a pair of back lower back side decoration bodies 3420, a back lower front middle decoration body 3506, and the like respectively include a back lower back side decoration board 3426, a back lower back middle decoration board 3456, and a back lower back decoration board 3456. Since the front side decoration board 3536 and the back bottom front middle decoration board 3546 are provided, the back bottom rear side decoration board 3426, the back bottom back middle decoration board 3456, and the back bottom front side decoration board 3536 provided respectively. , And by appropriately illuminating the back under-rear inside decoration body 3450 and the like with the back under-rear inside decoration substrate 3546, it is possible to change the appearance of the back under-rear inside decoration body 3450 in various ways. A variety of effects can be presented to the player by the combination of the light-emitters of the ornament 3450, the pair of back lower back side ornaments 3420, and the back lower front middle ornament 3506, and the player's game is hard to get tired of. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

Furthermore, a rod-shaped pointer member 3458 that rotates is provided on the front surface of the back and middle rear decorative body 3450 (decorative body 3454) that moves up and down between the inside and the lower side of the front view opening 1215 in the panel plate 1210. Therefore, it is possible to entertain not only the appearance of the ornament main body 3454 but also the rotation of the pointer member 3458 by raising the inside of the opening 1215 in the front view and then rotating the pointer member 3458, so that the player can enjoy various colors. Since it is possible to present the effect and prevent the player from getting tired, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered, and at the same time, the rod-shaped pointer member 3458 can be made to look like the hands of a clock. By rotating the pointer member 3458, it is possible to make the player feel as if the time is approaching and to be excited, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and to reduce the interest in the game. ..

In addition, since the pointer member 3458 in the back and middle back decorative body 3450 can be made to illusion like a hand of a clock, the pointer member 3458 has a predetermined rotation position (for example, a position at which rotation is started, the pointer member 3458 is substantially vertical). Position, a position of a specific decoration provided on the decoration body 3454 on the rear side of the pointer member 3458, and the like), and at least the pointer member 3458 has a predetermined position. The player's interest can be attracted to the pointer member 3458 (back lower back middle decorative body 3450) until the player reaches the rotation position of the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and reduce the interest in the game. You can

Further, in the back lower front unit 3500, the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 three-dimensionally formed in a predetermined shape and the left and right sides of the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 extend outward respectively, and the base end side is rotatable. And a pair of back lower front side decorative bodies 3530 whose front end is rotated between a position lower and a position higher than the base end side as the back lower front middle decoration 3506 is moved up and down. When the back lower front middle decoration 3506 is raised from the lower side to the inside of the front view opening 1215, the back lower front middle decoration 3506 appears, and at the same time, it is arranged on both left and right sides of the back lower front middle decoration 3506. The pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 are rotated to a position in which the tip end side is higher than the base end side. Therefore, a pair of back lower front sides extending diagonally left and right from the back lower front middle decoration 3506. The decoration body 3530 can make the appearance of the entire decoration body become larger, which can strongly attract the player's attention to the back lower front unit 3500, and the movable state of the back lower front unit 3500 allows the player to do so. It is possible to give an impression that the player spreads and spreads, and it is possible to enhance the uplifting feeling of the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the back lower rear middle decoration 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decorations 3420, the back lower front middle decoration 3506, etc. of the back lower production unit 3400 are arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, respectively. When the back lower back middle decoration 3450, the pair of back lower back side decorations 3420, and the front lower back middle decoration 3506 are respectively moved from the outside of the front view opening 1215 to the inside of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since it is positioned (appearing) on the front side, the back lower back middle decoration 3450, the pair of back lower back side decorations 3420, and the back lower front middle decoration which have produced the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 By blocking with 3506 or the like, it is possible to change the appearance of the displayed effect image and the appearance of the appearing decorative body to present the player with a wider variety of effects, which makes it harder for the player to get tired and less entertaining to the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the respective decorative bodies such as the back lower back middle decoration body 3450, the pair of back lower back side decoration bodies 3420, and the lower back front middle decoration body 3506 move (appear) to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display Since the effect image displayed on the device 1900 is blocked by the appearance of the decoration, the player can easily notice the movement of each decoration, and the decoration moving to the inside of the opening 1215 in the front view can be displayed. It is possible to entertain attention and entertain the movement, and it is possible to make the player think that there is something good due to the appearance of the decorative body, which raises the expectation for the game and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since each of the decorations such as the back lower back middle decoration 3450, the pair of back lower back side decorations 3420, and the lower back front middle decoration 3506 can be moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display It is possible to correlate the effect image displayed on the device 1900 with the movement of each ornament, and it is possible to perform a collaborative effect that combines the image effect of the effect image and the movable effect of the movement of the ornament. A variety of effects can be used to entertain the player and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second slide base 3248 of the back production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 moves up and down according to the game state that changes by hitting a game ball into the game area 1100. , The second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) attached to the front surface of the second slide base 3248 also moves, and the entire effect image can be moved, so that the effect image is displayed. The display device can give a strong impact to a player or the like who has the preconception that the display device is fixed and does not move, and the player's interest can be displayed in the effect image (second liquid crystal display device 3252). Along with being able to attract and entertain the effect image, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player by displaying the effect image in accordance with the movement of the second elevating/decorating decorative body 3250, so that the effect does not get tired. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is arranged to move to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged in the approximate center of the game area 1100, and the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Since it is blocked by the (second lifting decoration 3250), the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the effect image and the second liquid crystal display device which are blocked. With the effect image displayed on 3252, it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and the interest in the game is reduced, and the effect image is displayed on the moving second liquid crystal display device 3252. It is possible to display the effect images of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a good state without the movement of the lifting decoration 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252) and the effect image being displaced from each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) and the respective effect images from deteriorating and deteriorating the interest.

Further, in a state where the second slide base 3248 and the second lifting decoration body 3250 are separated, the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 is inserted into the fixing groove 3250a of the second lifting decoration body 3250. The slide base 3248 and the second lifting decoration 3250 are relatively moved to one side in the vertical direction to insert the fixing piece 3248a into the fixing groove 3250a, and the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248 is used for the second lifting decoration. By elastically locking the locking claw 3250c of the body 3250, the fixing piece 3248a is prevented from coming off the fixing groove 3250a, and the second lifting decoration 3250 (with respect to the second slide base 3248). The second liquid crystal display device 3252) is attached. On the other hand, with the second elevating decorative body 3250 attached to the second slide base 3248, the engaging claw 3250c of the second elevating decorative body 3250 is elastically deformed to engage with the engaging hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248. After releasing the stop, the second slide base 3248 and the second lifting decoration 3250 are relatively moved to the other side in the vertical direction so that the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 is fixed to the fixing groove of the second lifting decoration 3250. By removing it from the inside of 3250a, the second lifting decorative body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252) is removed from the second slide base 3248, and the second lifting decorative body 3250 is securely attached to the second slide base 3248. It can be detachably attached to. In addition, the locking piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 is elastically locked to the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248 so that the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 is the second lift decorative body. The fixing groove 3250a of the 3250 is prevented from coming off, and the second slide base 3248 and the second elevating and lowering decoration body 3250 can be easily attached and detached by elastic deformation of the locking claw 3250c. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252 of the second lifting decoration 3250, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed, so that maintenance such as replacement of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be performed. It can be performed easily and the time during which the game is interrupted due to maintenance can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can enjoy the game by restarting the game before the player feels frustrated by the interruption. It is possible to suppress the decrease, and it is possible to perform a variety of effects using the effect image by the second liquid crystal display device 3252 without any problem, and the movement of the second elevating decorative body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player by entertaining the player with the or effect image.

Further, since the second lifting decoration 3250 is detachably attached to the second slide base 3248, the work of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, and the cost for manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 increases. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed when the pachinko machine 1 is discarded, so that the waste can be easily separated and the environment-friendly pachinko machine 1 can be disposed. Can be

Further, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and it is probable that the second slide base 3248 positioned on the outer side in front view of the liquid crystal display device 1900 will cause the second liquid crystal display device 3900 to move. Since 3252 is attached so as to extend to the front surface side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, moving the second slide base 3248 causes the second liquid crystal display device 3252 to easily vibrate, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily moved. Although a problem may occur easily, as described above, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is detachably attached to the moving base, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252. It is possible to take immediate action and maintain the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in a good state. Therefore, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 without any problem, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and lessening the interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is a display device separate from the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image can be displayed even if the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved to the outside of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The moving pattern of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be made more diversified, and the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to get tired, and it is not necessary to provide the large liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, a separate second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the position of the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the front-rear direction are different. Therefore, it is possible to perform a deep effect by the two effect images, and it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised and deteriorating the interest, and at the same time, to attract the player's interest and to produce each effect image. It is possible to entertain the movement of the image display means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decoration body 3250) is arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, the second liquid crystal display device 3252. By this, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game balls circulating in the game area 1100 from being obstructed, and the pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy the movement of the game balls can be provided, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be used as the game panel 1200 Since it is made visible through the opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210), when a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252, it can be removed from the second slide base 3248 through the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200. The maintenance work of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be facilitated, and the same effects as the above can be obtained.

Further, since the first lifting decorative body 3218 that can cover a part of the front surface of the second lifting decorative body 3250 and is movable independently of the second lifting decorative body 3250 is provided, By appropriately moving the ornamental body 3218, it is possible to change the range in which the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be seen from the player side, and it is possible to entertain the player with more various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and reduce the interest in the game.

Further, since the first elevating decorative body 3218 moving on the front side of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 has a predetermined decoration, the decoration of the first elevating decorative body 3218 causes the player to move to the first elevating decorative body 3218. It becomes possible to draw attention, and when the player focuses on the first elevating decorative body 3218, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) also enters the field of view and is displayed on the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The produced effect image can be shown without fail, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and reduce the interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball hit in the game area 1100 is accepted into the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102, a predetermined lottery result is drawn and Depending on the lottery result of the lottery, the special winning opening 2103 can be accepted, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by accepting the game balls into the special winning opening 2103. It is possible to entertain the game ball driving operation and the game ball payout aiming at the 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the special winning opening 2103. In this pachinko machine 1, at the time of a game ball driving operation, the driven game balls are driven so as to flow along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, that is, the game balls are hit with a predetermined strength or more. When you hit (so-called right hit), the game ball that is driven from the left side to the upper part of the game area 1100 along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 flows to the right side on the opposite side along the inner circumference as it is Since it enters the receiving space 2530 through the passage 2545, the game ball can be driven (entered) into the receiving space 2530 by a simple driving operation, and the game ball that has entered the receiving space 2530 is Since it is discharged from the inside of the receiving space 2530 through the guide passage 2540 to the upper side of the special winning opening 2103, when the special winning opening 2103 is receivable, the game ball released from the guide passage 2540 through the receiving space 2530 is There is a high probability that the special winning opening 2103 can be accepted. As a result, when the special winning opening 2103 can be received, a driving operation aiming at the receiving space 2530 can be performed so that the game ball is discharged from the guide passage 2540. A movable valve 2551 is arranged in the receiving space 2530, and when the movable valve 2551 rolls the game ball in either of the left and right directions, and the route detection sensor 2580 detects it, the movable valve 2551 rolls. The jackpot form is given according to the direction.

Further, since the movable lower decoration 2567 and the movable upper decoration 2565 are arranged on the rear side of the receiving space 2530, the movable lower decoration 2567 and the movable upper decoration 2565 press the inside of the game area 1100 including the receiving space 2530. It is possible to prevent the game area 1100 from being narrowed by avoiding this, and it becomes possible to distribute the game ball within a range as wide as possible, so that the player can enjoy the original movement of the game ball of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase the size of the movable lower decorative body 2567 and the movable upper decorative body 2565 and increase the moving range without pressing the inside of the game area 1100, and the movable lower decorative body 2567 and the movable upper surface can be increased. The decorative body 2565 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be made sure to recognize the rolling direction of the game ball by the movable valve 2551.

Further, the slide of the slider 2555 that slides reciprocally by the receiving drive motor 2558 is transmitted to the movable valve 2551 via the connecting spring 2556 and the like, and is movable with the movable lower decoration 2567 via the rack gear 2555f and the first transmission gear 2562 and the like. Since it is transmitted to the upper decorative body 2565, the movable valve 2551, the movable lower decorative body 2567, and the movable upper decorative body 2565 can be driven by one receiving drive motor 2558, and the configuration relating to each drive is simplified. The overall space for driving can be reduced. That is, the space for driving the movable valve 2551, the movable lower decoration 2567, and the movable upper decoration 2565 can be reduced, so that the space for the movable lower decoration 2567, the movable upper decoration 2565, and the like can be relatively widened. Becomes

Further, when the game ball is hit with a predetermined strength or more, the game ball that has been hit from the left side along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to the upper part of the game area 1100 is on the opposite right side along the inner circumference. To enter the receiving space 2530 through the receiving/entry passage 2545, and the game ball can be driven (entered) into the receiving space 2530 with a simple driving operation.

Further, the operation with the periodicity by the movable valve 2551 is performed at a constant cycle regardless of the game state. Therefore, by using a period in which the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580 is not enabled, the game ball is driven into the receiving unit 2550 that is always open, so that the desired route in the receiving space 2530 has a high probability. In order to roll the game ball with, the game ball is moved at any timing in consideration of the periodic operation by the movable valve 2551 and the range of the time lag occurring until the movable valve 2551 is reached. I am able to properly seek (practice) whether or not to fire. According to such a configuration, consumption of a predetermined amount of game balls that will not be accepted at the starting opening will be promoted, no value will be generated, and no game condition can be progressed. Even though the game is based on the game, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game due to the playability that focuses only on future profits.

However, in a game (practice) under such a game condition, a search is made as to whether or not the game ball can be rolled to a desired route in the receiving space 2530 without any feeling of tension. Since it is nothing more than, it is assumed that the timing of launching the game ball may fail due to the feeling of tension in the actual production (the period when the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580 is not enabled). Therefore, when the big hit is not won as a result of the big hit lottery, the small hit may be won with a predetermined probability. That is, in this case, since the condition device does not operate, even though it is a period in which the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580 is not valid, the production (the period in which the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580 is not validated) Since the production (production without being able to recognize whether it is a production or not) will be performed, it will be possible to practice with a good sense of tension.

Further, while the movable valve 2551 is rotating, the game ball cannot enter the receiving space 2530, and the game ball that tries to enter the receiving space 2530 during the rotation is stored in the receiving space 2530. Since it can be stopped at the inlet (upper side of the movable valve 2551), as a driving operation of the game ball, by hitting the game ball so as to reach the rotating movable valve 2551, in front of the movable valve 2551. A plurality of game balls can be parked. Therefore, when the movable valve 2551 performs a rotating operation so as to roll the game ball in a predetermined direction, a plurality of game balls are driven and the game ball is stopped in front of the movable valve 2551 so as to rotate. When the process is completed, the stopped game ball can be reliably rolled in the predetermined direction, and at the same time, the plurality of game balls can be rolled in the predetermined direction.

Further, as described above, since the game ball can be stopped in front of the movable valve 2551 during the rotation, it is stopped by hitting more game balls in a state where the game balls are stopped. The interval (time interval, distance interval) at which the game ball and the game ball hit afterwards roll can be made as narrow as possible. In other words, the rolling intervals of the plurality of game balls can be shortened by the time of being stopped by the movable valve 2551 and can be brought closer to each other, so that the rotation operation is completed and the game balls are moved into the receiving space 2530. When it becomes possible to enter, it becomes possible to continuously release at least two game balls to the special winning opening 2103 side at intervals shorter than usual, and it is normal for the time when the special winning opening 2103 can be accepted. It is possible to accept more game balls, entertain the player more, and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, as described above, in order to receive more game balls into the special winning opening 2103, the timing at which the game balls are stopped by the movable valve 2551 and the game ball to the special winning opening 2103 through the receiving space 2530. Since it is necessary to hit the game ball at a timing that takes into account the timing that is accepted, it is probable that the difficulty of the driving operation will be high and it will be difficult for the player who is accustomed to the driving operation to get bored. In addition to being able to improve the motivation for the driving operation, it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating due to the enjoyment of the game.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot of a specific type is prepared, and when the jackpot of this specific type is won, no matter which jackpot form the game is played in, step S6073, Through the processing of S6077, 15 rounds of jackpot games are played, but it is not always necessary to prepare such jackpots of a specific type. That is, in this case, in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607) shown in FIG. 201, each process of steps S6072, S6073, S6076, S6077 and the table shown in FIG. 202 are omitted, and the right gate 2575R is omitted. In the jackpot mode when the game ball passes through, the jackpot game mode is determined with reference to the table of FIG. 203 regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol random number. On the other hand, in the jackpot mode when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, the jackpot game mode is determined with reference to the tables of FIGS. 204(a) and (b) regardless of the value of the jackpot random number. The Rukoto.

The pachinko machine 1 described in the above embodiment for carrying out the invention can be expressed as the following technical idea. In the following, the terms described in the above-described modes for carrying out the invention will be described as a superordinate concept, and the "superconceptualized terms" and the above "terms described in the modes for carrying out the invention". In order to make correspondence with "," the above-mentioned "terms described in the embodiment for carrying out the invention" corresponding to the "generalized term" are described in parentheses. However, once the above-mentioned "terms described in the modes for carrying out the invention" corresponding to the "abbreviated terms" are written in parentheses, they are omitted in the subsequent description to avoid duplicate description. Sometimes.

The technical idea of this gaming machine is that the result of the winning/judging determination made based on the fact that the game medium that has been driven into the game area has been received at the reception port is a win. A gaming machine in which any one of the plurality of winning modes can be determined, and a general winning mode in which a predetermined amount of prize balls can be given when the gaming machine is in one of the plurality of winning modes The hit mode determination means that controls and/or operates as roughly determined, and the jackpot game execution means that executes the jackpot game based on the hit mode determined by the hit mode determination means are provided. The means controls and/or operates so as to determine a special winning mode with a high risk degree, which is a winning mode different from the general winning mode, in which the amount of prize balls to be given is different each time, and the special winning mode. When the mode is determined, a plurality of winning balls, which include a maximum amount of prize balls that greatly exceed the predetermined amount, and a plurality of non-maximum prize balls, in which only a smaller amount of prize balls than the maximum prize amount are awarded, It has a special winning lottery means that can be determined by performing an internal special winning lottery for any one of the winnings, and further, the internal special winning lottery is decided with a predetermined probability to the maximum amount winning. Any lottery mode among a plurality of lottery modes including a determined regular lottery mode (a pattern) and a low lottery mode (b pattern) that is determined for the maximum amount only with a probability lower than the predetermined probability A special winning lottery mode determining means for determining whether to perform based on the above, and when the special winning mode is determined by the winning mode determining means, an expectation that the maximum amount of winning is determined with a high probability is provided to the player. Expected effect execution means for performing a display effect that can be given to a predetermined display area, the expected effect execution means, when the specific condition is satisfied (when the pattern c is determined), the special winning lottery It is provided with a maximum expected promotion effect execution means for executing a display effect (display effect in which the small dragon 5100 having the confirmed c pattern is stopped) indicating that the mode determination means has not determined at least the low lottery mode.

In addition, the technical idea of the gaming machine is that the result of the winning/judging determination made based on the fact that the game medium driven toward the game area is received at the entrance is a success. A gaming machine provided with a multiple hitting state creating means for making a state decidable in any of the hitting modes, wherein when the hitting state decidable in any of the plurality of hitting modes is set, Using the game medium that has been driven into the game area, a hit mode determination means that controls and/or operates so that a general win mode that can give a predetermined amount of prize balls is generally determined, and the hit mode determination means determines the hit mode. The jackpot game executing means for executing the jackpot game based on the hit mode, and the hitting mode determining means, when the jackpot game mode is determined, the general hitting mode is generally determined, When the game medium is driven toward the game area so that the general winning mode is not determined, control and/or control is performed so that a special winning mode with a high risk degree in which the prize balls to be awarded is different each time is determined. When activated, when the special winning mode is determined, the maximum amount of prize balls that can be provided in an amount that greatly exceeds the predetermined amount and a plurality of non-maximum prize balls that are provided in a smaller amount than the maximum amount. It has a special winning lottery means that can be determined by performing an internal special winning lottery for any one of a plurality of winnings including a quantity hit, and the internal special winning lottery A plurality of lottery modes including a normal lottery mode (a pattern) determined with the probability of the maximum amount and a low lottery mode (b pattern) determined with the probability of less than the predetermined probability Of the lottery modes, the special winning lottery mode determining means and the special winning mode determining means determine the special winning mode. Although it is not always decided to be, the expectation that it is decided to the maximum amount with a higher probability than the display effect (C pattern) that can remind that the non-maximum amount is decided. An expected performance executing means for performing a display performance (A pattern) that can give a feeling in a predetermined display area is provided, and the expected performance executing means is always determined to be the maximum amount (15R) by the special winning lottery means. Although not always the case, the non-maximum amount (3 R, 6R, 12R) is displayed with a display effect (Pattern A) that has a higher probability than the display effect (C pattern) that can remind that it is determined as R, 6R, 12R). When displayed in the area, when a specific condition is satisfied (when the pattern c is determined), a display effect indicating that at least the low lottery mode has not been determined by the special winning lottery mode determination means ( It can also be said that the present invention is characterized by having a maximum amount expected promotion effect executing means for executing a display effect in which the small dragon 5100 having the confirmed c pattern is stopped).

According to the above technical idea, the game ball as a game medium that is driven toward the game area 1100 by the operation of the player is a reception opening (first starting opening 2101, second starting opening) provided in the game area 1100. 2102). Then, based on the acceptance of the game medium to the entrance, a predetermined winning/judgment determination is performed by the lottery means (step S315).

If the result of the above-mentioned winning/judging determination is a win (special win), a state in which it is possible to determine one of a plurality of hit modes by the multiple hit state creating means (corresponding to the processing in step S604 of operating the condition device). It is said that This state is, specifically, a state in which the jackpot mode to be executed has not yet been determined, although the condition device has operated. Then, as the plurality of hitting modes, "safety type jackpot form" as a general hitting form, and "pounding type jackpot form" as a special hitting form that is a different hitting form from this general hitting form, Is prepared.

The "safety type big hit form" is a hit mode in which a certain amount of prize balls can be given, and as long as the game balls are fired toward the special winning opening 2103 that is opened and closed during the big hit game. , It is guaranteed that a certain amount of prize balls will be paid out. In the present embodiment, a 9-round jackpot game is equivalent. However, it is not limited to a mode in which a certain amount of prize balls can always be given when the "safety type jackpot form" is determined. Although it is possible to provide the prize balls, it is possible to pay out the prize balls more than a certain amount or less than the certain amount with an extremely low probability. In addition, although the "safety type jackpot form" is determined to be one of a plurality of jackpots, for example, it is determined to be any of 8 rounds, 9 rounds, and 10 rounds. The risk level may be lower than that of the “pounding type jackpot”. In this case, even if it is a "safety type big hit form", it will be decided to be one of a plurality of big hits, but the risk degree is low and it is possible to stably give prize balls. Is no different.

In addition, the “pounding type jackpot form” is a hitting mode in which an amount of prize balls far from the above-described fixed amount is provided in a manner that makes a difference. Specifically, it is possible to give a small amount of prize balls less than the above-mentioned fixed amount (corresponding to a big hit game of 3 rounds or 6 rounds of the present embodiment) and an amount of prize balls exceeding the above-mentioned fixed amount. It is a hit mode in which one of the hit games is executed among the large hits (corresponding to the big hit game of 12 rounds or 15 rounds of the present embodiment). The "mode with a difference" means a mode in which there is a difference in the amount of prize balls to be awarded depending on which of the winning modes is executed, such as a small amount and a large amount. To do.

It should be noted that "amount below a certain amount" and "amount above a certain amount" are more risky when they are determined to be "pounding type jackpot form" than when they are determined to "safety type jackpot form". It is preferable that there is a difference in the amount of prize balls to be awarded so that the player feels that the value is high. For example, "amount below a certain amount" is significantly lower than about half or less than a certain amount, while "amount exceeding a certain amount" is about 1.5 times or more than a certain amount. When it is significantly exceeded, the player is more likely to feel that the risk is higher when the "exciting type jackpot form" is decided than when the "safety type jackpot form" is decided. I think that the.

In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is changed depending on whether the "safety type big hit form" is determined or the "small pounding type big hit form" is determined to be a small amount or a large amount. , This is based on the premise that the amount of prize balls awarded per round is the same. That is, the number of prize balls to be awarded is made different by changing the number of rounds according to the mode of the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, although the number of rounds is the same, the amount of prize balls awarded per round may be different, so that the amount of prize balls awarded according to the mode of the jackpot game may be different. Further, for example, the concept of a round may be eliminated, and the amount of prize balls to be awarded may be changed by changing the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 and the maximum winning number according to the mode of the big hit game.

If a state in which one of the plurality of hitting modes can be determined, that is, a condition in which the condition device has been actuated, but the jackpot mode to be executed has not yet been determined, Using the game ball as a game medium that has been driven into the game area 1100 by an operation, the hit mode to be given is determined by the hit mode determining means (corresponding to the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550). The hit mode determining means operates so that both the general hit mode and the special hit mode can be applied, but generally operates to be determined as the general hit mode. In other words, the player does not shoot a game ball aiming at a specific hit mode (general hit mode or special hit mode), but merely shoots the game ball toward the game area 1100. If (for example, only the game balls are continuously fired toward the game area 1100), the hit mode determining means operates so that the general hit mode is determined more frequently than the special hit mode. ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, after preparing a left side route determined as a special hitting mode and a right side route determined as a general hitting mode, it is easier for the shot game ball to be guided to the right side route than the left side route. In addition, although the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550 as the hitting mode determining means is operated, the mode in which the general hitting mode is more easily determined than the special hitting mode is not limited to this. For example, the destination to which the game ball is launched is, for example, one, but in the special hitting mode or the general hitting mode, depending on the timing at which the game ball is guided to this one guiding destination, The control may be performed so that the general hit mode is more easily determined than the special hit mode.

When the hit manner is determined by the hit manner determination means, the big hit game in the determined execution manner (the big hit game in the manner set in step S6084) is executed by the big hit game execution means (step S210). It More specifically, when the general hit mode is decided, the general hit game (9 round big hit game) is executed, while when the special hit mode is decided (YES in step S6075 and NO in step S6076), An internal special winning lottery is carried out by the special winning determination means (step S6080). In this special winning lottery, a non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds or 12 rounds jackpot) or the maximum amount (15 rounds jackpot) ) Is determined. Then, in this internal lottery, when it is determined to be the non-maximum amount, the jackpot game of any of 3 rounds, 6 rounds and 12 rounds is executed, and it is determined to be the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots). In the case of winning, the maximum amount of winning games (15 rounds of big winning games) are executed.

By the way, the hitting mode determining means (the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550) is, as described above, longer than the mode (the mode shown in FIG. 136) in which the game ball is guided to the left route in the receiving space 2530. , The game ball is maintained in a mode (a mode shown in FIG. 137) in which the game ball is guided to the right route in the receiving space 2530. As a result, when the big hit game mode is determined, the general win mode is generally determined instead of the special win mode.

Further, when the game ball is not shot aiming at the timing at which the game ball is guided to a specific route, but is simply shot toward the game area 1100, the game ball is received in the receiving space 2530. It is more likely to be guided to the right side route than the left side route. As a result, for a stable player, each time the condition device is activated and the general hit mode (safety type big hit type) and the special hit type (pounding type big hit type) can be given, It is possible to reduce the annoyance of having to select one of them. In particular, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is temporarily interrupted so that the hit against the intention of the player is not selected even if the big hit is won, the game is interrupted. You will feel annoyed about things. In this respect, according to the gaming machine of the present technical concept, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that adopts a new gaming property without giving the player such annoyance.

By the way, if the special hitting mode is determined in general, but not the special hitting mode, unless the game ball is shot aiming at the timing when the game ball is guided to a specific route, the left side is decided. It is highly possible that the game ball was launched aiming at the timing when the game ball was guided to the route.

In this way, when the general hit game is generally executed, if the special hit mode is decided as a result of the game ball being shot aiming at the timing at which the game ball is guided to the left route, for example, 3 rounds. Although there is a risk that a small amount of hits will be executed, the player naturally expects that the maximum amount of hits (15 rounds of big hits) will be executed. Also, when the game ball is simply shot, not when the game ball is guided to the left side route, most of them are determined to be the general hit mode, so it is lower than the general hit mode. The special winning mode is determined only by frequency. Therefore, even though the special hit mode is decided while the general hit game is executed, the expectation that the maximum amount hit game (15 round big hit game) is executed is very low. If the display effect is performed, there is a risk that the interest will be aroused and the interest will be reduced. Then, when the condition device operates, the timing determined to be the general hit (the timing not determined to be the special hit mode) is intentionally set, even though both the general hit mode and the special hit mode can be provided. There is a possibility that only the game of aiming and firing the game ball will be performed, and the fun of the gaming machine in a state where both the general winning mode and the special winning mode can be given will be lost.

Therefore, in this gaming machine, unless a game ball is shot aiming at a timing at which the game ball is guided to a specific route, if a special winning mode is determined in the general winning mode, the lottery mode is selected. Including the decision, the probability of being decided per maximum amount (15 round jackpot) is lower than the probability of being decided per non maximum amount (3 round, 6 round, 12 round jackpot) As the effect mode displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670, the display effect (A pattern) that evokes the maximum amount of hits is displayed with a relatively higher probability than the display effect (C pattern) that evokes the non-maximum amount of hits. I am trying to do it. As a result, although the probability determined for the maximum amount is lower than the probability determined for the non-maximum amount, it is the highest for the player who sees the effect mode displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670. As if the expectation that a jackpot game per amount (15 rounds) will be awarded is much higher than the possibility that a jackpot game per non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds) will be executed, It becomes possible to make the player aware. As a result, when the special hit mode is decided while the general hit game is executed when the condition device operates, the probability that the maximum hit game (15 round big hit game) is internally executed is non- Although it is lower than the probability that the maximum amount hit game (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of big hit games) will be executed, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the maximum amount hit game and reduce the interest. It becomes possible to suppress.

Moreover, the display effect performed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 passed the big hit mode determination gate 3660 after the route detection sensor 2580L detected that the game ball shot by the player passed the left gate 2575L. Since the effect is the display effect that is performed until it is detected by the big hit mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, at the time when the display effect is being performed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670, the special win mode is determined. However, the determination of maximum or non-maximum amount has not yet been made. Therefore, unlike the conventional gaming machine in which the player merely sees the display effect, the player can be greatly interested in the display effect performed by the mini liquid crystal display 3670.

Furthermore, the internal special winning lottery is determined as the normal lottery mode (a pattern) that is determined with a predetermined probability to the maximum amount (15 rounds of big hits), and the maximum amount is determined only with a probability lower than the predetermined probability. Which lottery mode is selected among a plurality of lottery modes including a low lottery mode (b pattern) that is not performed and a high lottery mode (c pattern) that is determined for the maximum amount with a probability higher than a predetermined probability You may make it provide the special winning lottery mode determination means determined by. Then, a display effect that can be recollected to be determined as a non-maximum amount (3R, 6R, 12R) even though the special amount lottery means does not always determine the maximum amount (15R round). When the display condition (A pattern) that can give the expectation that the maximum amount of hits is determined is displayed in the display area with a higher probability than (C pattern), when a specific condition is satisfied (in the c pattern). When it is determined), a display effect (display effect in which the small dragon 5100 having the pattern c confirmed) is executed that indicates that the special winning lottery mode determining unit has not determined at least the low lottery mode. As a result, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the maximum amount of winning games, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the specific condition is satisfied, the special winning lottery mode determining means determines the display performance indicating that at least the low lottery mode (b pattern) has not been determined, and instead of the special winning lottery mode determining means. A display effect that confirms that the high lottery mode (c pattern) has been determined may be executed.

It should be noted that the display effect that can give the player the expectation that the maximum amount of hits (15 rounds of big hits) will be given to the player is that the probability of being determined to be the maximum amount of hits is actually higher than that of the non-maximum hits. The present invention is not limited to display effects only, and also includes display effects that allow the player to be conscious of how much the maximum amount of games should be executed regardless of the internal probability. For example, the display effect of the C pattern in the present embodiment is determined by the maximum amount (15-round jackpot) rather than the probability determined by the non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, or 12 rounds jackpot). Is a display effect that is not determined in the higher c pattern (see FIG. 204(b)) (see FIG. 206), so a non-maximum amount per game (3 rounds, 6 rounds) than the maximum amount per game. It can be said that this is a display effect in which the probability of being determined as a 12-round jackpot game) is actually high. However, regardless of the internal probability, a character including a character (Oryu 5000) that evokes a non-maximum hit is more displayed than a character (Oryu 5100) that evokes the most hit. is there.

Further, the normal jackpot game (9 round jackpot game) is a hit game that is executed when the general hit mode (safety type jackpot form) is determined. Further, the maximum amount of hits and the non-maximum amount of hits are types of hits that are further determined when the special hitting mode (big hitting type of pounding type) is determined. And, the maximum amount of winning game (15 rounds of big hitting game) is a winning game that is executed when the maximum amount of hits is decided. Ordinary winning game (3 rounds of big hitting game, 6 rounds of big hitting game, 12 rounds) Jackpot significant) is a winning game executed when the non-maximum winning amount is determined.

Note that, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204, it is not determined to be one of the maximum amount per game and the non-maximum amount per game, and there are three rounds, six rounds, twelve rounds, and fifteen rounds. Either one of them is determined, but first, either one of the maximum amount and the non-maximum amount may be determined, and then the specific number of rounds may be further determined.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the special hit mode is determined, the 9 round jackpot game executed when the general hit mode (safety type jackpot mode) is determined is excluded, and 3 rounds are performed. Although it is determined to be one of 6 rounds, 12 rounds, and 15 rounds, it may be determined to include the 9 rounds of jackpot games.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1200 Game panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2000 Front unit 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3040 Panel relay board 3041 Lamp drive board 3045 Motor drive board 3600 Bottom right bottom Performance unit 3600
4010 peripheral control board (production control means)
4140 Peripheral control unit (production control means)

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation,
A main body frame that detachably supports the game board,
A door frame having a game window in which at least the game area of the game board supported by the main body frame is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the front surface of the main body frame and faces a player side,
Dish light emitting decoration means that is formed below the game window and has a dish portion that bulges forward and can store the game medium, and a light emitting decoration portion that can perform light emission decoration,
First light emitting decoration means which is provided in the vicinity of the plate light emitting decoration means, decorates a predetermined area on the outer periphery of the game window, and is capable of emitting light toward the player side,
A second light emitting decoration means that decorates a region different from the predetermined region on the outer periphery of the game window, and has a bulging portion that bulges forward of the first light emitting decoration means and is capable of emitting light.
Equipped with
The three-dimensional shape of the decoration applied to the light-emitting decoration portion of the dish light-emitting decoration means and the three-dimensional shape of the decoration applied to the second light-emitting decoration means form an integral decoration,
Performing a light emission effect in which the light emission decoration portion of the dish light emission decoration means and the bulge portion of the second light emission decoration means cooperate with each other;
The bulging part capable of emitting light has an inner side surface part that is easily visible to a player facing the game board, and an outer side surface part that is difficult to see from a player facing the game board,
The inner side surface portion is decorated in an inclined shape toward the peripheral portion of the game area, and is formed so as to have a gentle angle compared to the angle of the outer side surface portion toward the main body frame side,
The light emitted from the bulging portion having the second light emission decoration means is emitted toward the inside of the game machine, which is the game window side, through the inner side surface that is easily visible to the player facing the game board. Employees of the game hall where there is light emission and outer light emission that is emitted toward the outside of the game machine through the outer side part that is difficult to see from the player facing the game board, and the outer side part is easily visible. With respect to the notification light for notification to the outside light emission, it is possible to emit light toward the outside of the gaming machine through the outside surface portion,
The bulging portion having the outer side surface portion which is difficult to be seen by the player facing the game board and the inner side surface portion which is easily seen by the player facing the game board can be illuminated and decorated by the effect control means. Cage,
The notification light for notifying the employee of the game hall where the outer side portion is easily visible is emitted only through the outer side portion which is difficult to be seen by the player facing the game board. Machine.